Ford F150 2021 Owner’s Manual
Reklaam
Reklaam
FORD F-150
Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2020
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 202007 20200831140540
California Proposition 65
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling
.
Table of Contents
Contacting Us
Contacting Us ..................................................19
Introduction
About This Publication .................................21
Using This Publication .................................22
Symbols Glossary
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle ................23
Data Privacy
Data Privacy ....................................................26
Service Data .....................................................27
Event Data ........................................................27
Settings Data ..................................................28
Connected Vehicle Data .............................28
Mobile Device Data .......................................29
Emergency Call System Data ...................29
Visual Search
Steering Wheel ..............................................30
Instrument Panel ............................................31
Vehicle Interior ................................................32
Front Exterior ..................................................33
Rear Exterior ....................................................34
Child Safety
Child Safety Precautions ............................35
Child Restraint Anchor Points ..................36
Child Restraints ..............................................38
Installing Child Restraints ..........................39
Booster Seats .................................................46
Child Safety Locks ........................................48
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Precautions ...................................49
Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts
..........................................................................50
Sensitive Locking Mode ...............................51
Automatic Locking Mode ............................51
Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy ....................................................52
Adjusting the Seatbelt Height ..................52
Adjusting the Seatbelt Length .................53
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................53
Checking the Seatbelts ...............................55
Seatbelt Extensions .....................................56
Personal Safety System™
What Is the Personal Safety System
...........................................................................57
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work ...............................................................57
Personal Safety System Components
...........................................................................57
Airbags
How Do the Front Airbags Work ..............58
How Do the Side Airbags Work ...............58
How Do the Knee Airbags Work ..............59
How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work
..........................................................................59
Airbag Precautions .......................................60
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats .........................................61
Children and Airbags ....................................61
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........62
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......65
Disposing of Airbags ....................................66
Pedestrian Alert System
What Is the Pedestrian Alert System
...........................................................................67
911 Assist
What Is 911 Assist .........................................68
How Does 911 Assist Work ........................68
Emergency Call Requirements ................68
Emergency Call Limitations ......................69
1
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Control Limitations ......................70
Using the Remote Control .........................70
Opening and Closing the Flip Key ...........70
Removing the Key Blade ..............................71
Sounding the Panic Alarm ..........................71
Locating Your Vehicle ....................................71
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start ........72
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Flip Key .............................73
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
...........................................................................74
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start ........75
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Flip Key ............................76
Troubleshooting .........................................77
MyKey™
What Is MyKey ................................................78
MyKey Settings ...............................................78
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start ................................................79
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Flip
Key .................................................................80
Programming a MyKey ...............................80
Clearing All MyKeys .....................................80
Checking MyKey System Status .............80
Systems .......................................................80
MyKey – Troubleshooting ...........................81
Doors and Locks
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle ..........................................................84
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle ..........................................................84
Autounlock ......................................................85
Autolock ...........................................................85
Mislock ..............................................................85
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings .......86
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting
..........................................................................86
Keyless Entry
Locating the Keyless Entry Keypad ........87
Keyless Entry Limitations ...........................87
Master Access Code .....................................87
Keyless Entry Settings .................................87
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Remote Keyless Entry .............................88
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Keyless Entry Keypad ..............................89
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting ............89
Easy Entry and Exit
How Does Easy Entry and Exit Work
..........................................................................90
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and
Off ..................................................................90
Tailgate - Vehicles With:
Manual Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate ....................................91
Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate ........91
Removing and Installing the Tailgate
...........................................................................9 1
Tailgate Step ...................................................92
Bed Extender ..................................................93
Tailgate Work Surface .................................95
Tailgate - Vehicles With:
Power Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate ...................................96
Closing the Tailgate .....................................96
Removing and Installing the Tailgate
...........................................................................97
Tailgate Step ..................................................98
Bed Extender ..................................................99
Tailgate Work Surface ................................101
Tailgate – Troubleshooting ......................102
2
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Tailgate - Vehicles With:
Remote Release Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate .................................104
Removing and Installing the Tailgate
........................................................................104
Tailgate Step .................................................105
Bed Extender ................................................106
Tailgate Work Surface ...............................108
Tailgate – Troubleshooting .....................109
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System ...........................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings .........112
Security – Troubleshooting .......................113
Power Running Boards
Power Running Board Precautions ........115
Power Running Board Settings ...............115
Power Running Board Kick Switch .........115
Deploying and Stowing the Power
Running Boards .........................................116
Troubleshooting ........................................116
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................117
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................117
Resetting the Stopping Position -
Vehicles With: Power Adjustable
Steering Column .......................................118
Horn ...................................................................118
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off ..................................................118
Adjustable Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ...................................119
Wipers and Washers
Wipers ..............................................................120
Autowipers .....................................................120
Checking the Wiper Blades .......................121
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ..........121
Washers ...........................................................122
Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................122
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lighting Control ...........................124
Headlamps .....................................................124
Headlamps – Troubleshooting ..............124
Autolamps ......................................................125
Exterior Lamps ..............................................125
Exterior Zone Lighting .................................127
Automatic High Beam Control ...............128
Troubleshooting ......................................130
Glare Free Lighting .......................................131
Glare Free Lighting – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................133
Adaptive Front Lighting .............................133
Interior Lighting
Interior Lamp Function ..............................135
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness ..................................................136
Ambient Lighting .........................................136
Windows
Opening and Closing the Windows .......137
Window Bounce-Back ...............................137
Locking the Rear Window Controls ......138
3
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Opening and Closing the Sliding
Windows .....................................................138
Interior Mirror
Interior Mirror Precautions .......................139
Manually Dimming the Interior Mirror
.........................................................................139
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror .................139
Exterior Mirrors
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors .................140
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Manual Folding Mirrors .............140
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Power Folding Mirrors ................140
Extending the Exterior Mirrors .................141
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror .................141
Moonroof
Opening and Closing the Sun Shade
.........................................................................142
Opening and Closing the Moonroof ......142
Venting the Moonroof ................................142
Moonroof Bounce-Back ............................143
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 4.2 Inch Screen .............................144
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 8 Inch Screen ................................145
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 12.3 Inch Screen ...........................146
What Is the Tachometer ...........................146
What Is the Speedometer .......................146
Fuel Gauge .....................................................146
What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge ...........................................................147
What Is the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
.........................................................................147
What Is the Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge ................................147
What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge .............147
What Is the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge
.........................................................................147
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps ........................................147
Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps ......148
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Indicators ....................................................149
Instrument Cluster Indicators .................149
Instrument Cluster Display
Using the Instrument Cluster Display
Controls ........................................................151
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch Screen ............151
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 8 Inch Screen ...............152
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen ..........152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen ..........................................................152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen .......................153
Customizing the Instrument Cluster
Display .........................................................153
Personalized Settings ................................153
Hybrid Display Information ......................154
What Is Brake Coach ..................................154
What Is the Trip Summary .......................154
Remote Start
What Is Remote Start ................................155
Remote Start Precautions .......................155
Remote Start Limitations .........................155
Enabling Remote Start ..............................155
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle .........................................................155
Extending the Remote Start Duration
.........................................................................156
Remote Start Remote Control Indicators
.........................................................................156
Remote Start Settings ...............................156
4
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Automatic
Temperature Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....158
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Defrost On and Off ................158
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................158
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................159
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off .................................................................159
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.........................................................................159
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........159
Setting the Temperature ..........................159
Directing the Flow of Air ...........................160
Auto Mode .....................................................160
Climate Control Hints .................................161
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Manual Temperature
Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....163
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Defrost On and Off ................163
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................163
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................164
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.........................................................................164
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........164
Setting the Temperature ..........................164
Directing the Flow of Air ...........................164
Climate Control Hints ................................165
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................166
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter .................166
Front Seats
Front Seat Precautions ..............................167
Sitting in the Correct Position .................167
Manual Seats ................................................168
Power Seats ...................................................170
Massage Seats ..............................................173
Heated Seats .................................................174
Ventilated Seats ...........................................174
Rear Seats
Manual Seats ................................................176
Heated Seats .................................................177
Rear Occupant Alert System
What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.........................................................................179
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work .............................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.........................................................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.........................................................................179
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off ..................................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
........................................................................180
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings ....................................................180
5
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Memory Function
What Is the Memory Function .................181
Memory Function Precautions ................181
Locating the Memory Function Buttons
..........................................................................181
Saving a Preset Position ............................181
Recalling a Preset Position .......................181
Garage Door Opener
What Is the Garage Door Opener ..........182
How Does the Garage Door Opener Work
.........................................................................182
Garage Door Opener Precautions .........182
Garage Door Opener Limitations ..........183
Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Hand-Held Transmitter .........183
Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Garage Door Opener Motor
.........................................................................184
Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate Opener Motor .................184
Clearing the Garage Door Opener .........185
Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener
.........................................................................185
Garage Door Opener Radio Frequencies
.........................................................................185
USB Ports
Locating the USB Ports ............................186
Playing Media Using the USB Port .......186
Charging a Device ........................................187
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ........................188
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2kW ..................................................188
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2.4kW/7.2kW .................................189
Locating the Power Outlet ......................190
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2kW ..............................................................190
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2.4kW/7.2kW ..............................................191
What Is Utility Idle Mode - Vehicles With:
Flip Key .........................................................191
Switching Utility Idle On and Off -
Vehicles With: Flip Key ...........................191
What Is Generator Mode ..........................192
Switching Generator Mode On and Off
.........................................................................192
Resetting Ground Fault Detection ........192
Resetting the Circuit Breaker - Vehicles
With: 7.2kW ................................................193
Power Outlet – Troubleshooting ...........194
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
120V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet .........................197
Power Outlet Precautions ........................197
Power Outlet Limitations ..........................197
Locating the Power Outlet .......................197
Power Outlet Indicators ............................198
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
12V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ........................199
Power Outlet Precautions .......................199
Locating the Power Outlet ......................199
Center Console Work Surface
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Column Shift ...........200
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Console Shift ............201
Troubleshooting ......................................202
Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
........................................................................203
6
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
........................................................................203
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger
........................................................................203
Charging a Wireless Device ....................203
Storage
Cup Holders ..................................................205
Glove Compartment .................................205
Under Seat Storage ...................................206
Glasses Holder ............................................208
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Precautions ..............................................209
Ignition Switch .............................................209
Push Button Ignition Switch ....................210
Starting the Engine .....................................210
Engine Block Heater ....................................213
Stopping the Engine ...................................214
Automatic Engine Stop ............................215
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position .......................................................216
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting .......................................216
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Information
What is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle ...........221
How Does a Hybrid Electric Vehicle Work
.........................................................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Driving
Characteristics ..........................................221
Low Engine Use Mode ................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
Indicators ...................................................222
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Troubleshooting ......................................222
Auto-Start-Stop
What Is Auto-Start-Stop .........................224
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions ................224
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off
........................................................................224
Stopping the Engine ..................................224
Restarting the Engine ................................224
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators .....................224
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting
........................................................................225
Fuel and Refueling
Fuel and Refueling Precautions .............227
Fuel Quality ...................................................227
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel ...............232
Running Out of Fuel ...................................232
Refueling ........................................................233
Fuel Tank Capacity - Excluding: Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................238
Fuel Tank Capacity - Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................239
Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting
........................................................................239
Diesel Particulate Filter
What Is the Diesel Particulate Filter .....240
How Does the Diesel Particulate Filter
Work ............................................................240
Diesel Particulate Filter Precautions
........................................................................240
Diesel Particulate Filter Requirements
.........................................................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration .............................................241
Troubleshooting ......................................243
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System - Diesel
What Is the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System ..................................245
How Does the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Work ......................245
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Precautions ...............................................245
7
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Requirements ..........................................246
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Guidelines .................................................246
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank .............................................247
Checking the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Status ...................249
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Troubleshooting .....................................249
Catalytic Converter
What Is the Catalytic Converter .............251
Catalytic Converter Precautions ............251
Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................251
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)
What Is the High Voltage Battery .........252
High Voltage Battery Precautions ........252
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Precautions
........................................................................253
Automatic Transmission Positions ......253
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear ..............254
Manually Shifting Gears ...........................254
Temporary Neutral Mode ........................255
Using Progressive Range Selection ......256
Automatic Return to Park (P) ................256
Stowing the Selector Lever - Vehicles
With: Console Shift ................................256
Manual Park Release .................................257
Four-Wheel Drive
How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work ......260
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions ..............260
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations .................261
Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode ....262
Four-Wheel Drive Modes .........................263
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators ..................264
Four-Wheel Drive Driving Hints .............264
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting
........................................................................266
Electronic Locking Differential
What Is the Electronic Locking
Differential ................................................269
Electronic Locking Differential
Precautions ..............................................269
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x4 .............269
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x2 ...............271
Electronic Locking Differential Indicators
.........................................................................272
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting ......................................272
Brakes
Brake Precautions .......................................273
Anti-Lock Braking System .......................273
Brake Over Accelerator .............................273
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir .......273
Checking the Brake Fluid ..........................273
Brake Fluid Specification .........................274
Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................274
Electric Parking Brake
What Is the Electric Parking Brake .......276
Applying the Electric Parking Brake ......276
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency ................................................276
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake ............................................................276
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake ...........................................276
Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning
.........................................................................277
8
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Charge .........................................................277
Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................277
Reverse Braking Assist
What Is Reverse Braking Assist .............279
How Does Reverse Braking Assist Work
........................................................................279
Reverse Braking Assist Precautions ......279
Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off ................................................................280
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist .......280
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators ........280
Troubleshooting .....................................280
Hill Start Assist
What Is Hill Start Assist ...........................282
How Does Hill Start Assist Work ..........282
Hill Start Assist Precautions ...................282
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting ......282
Auto Hold
How Does Auto Hold Work .....................283
Switching Auto Hold On and Off ..........283
Using Auto Hold ..........................................283
Auto Hold Indicators ..................................283
Traction Control
What Is Traction Control .........................284
How Does Traction Control Work .........284
Switching Traction Control On and Off
........................................................................284
Traction Control Indicator .......................284
Traction Control – Troubleshooting .....285
Stability Control
How Does Stability Control Work ........286
Switching Stability Control On and Off
........................................................................287
Stability Control Indicator .......................288
Hill Descent Control
What Is Hill Descent Control ..................289
How Does Hill Descent Control Work
........................................................................289
Hill Descent Control Precautions .........289
Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Off ................................................................289
Setting the Hill Descent Speed .............289
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............289
Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................290
Active Drive Assist
What Is Active Drive Assist ......................291
How Does Active Drive Assist Work ......291
Active Drive Assist Precautions ..............291
Active Drive Assist Requirements .........292
Active Drive Assist Limitations ..............292
Active Drive Assist Settings ....................292
Switching Active Drive Assist On and Off
........................................................................292
Active Drive Assist Alerts .........................292
Cancellation .............................................293
Active Drive Assist Indicators .................293
Active Drive Assist – Troubleshooting
........................................................................294
Steering
Electric Power Steering ............................295
Steering – Troubleshooting ....................296
Parking Aids
Parking Aid Precautions ...........................297
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................297
Front Parking Aid ........................................298
Side Parking Aid ..........................................299
9
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Parking Aid Indicators ..............................300
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting .............301
Rear View Camera
What Is the Rear View Camera .............302
Rear View Camera Precautions ............302
Locating the Rear View Camera ...........302
Rear View Camera Guide Lines .............302
Rear View Camera Settings ...................303
360 Degree Camera
What Is the 360 Degree Camera .........305
How Does the 360 Degree Camera Work
........................................................................305
360 Degree Camera Precautions ........305
360 Degree Camera Limitations ..........305
Locating the 360 Degree Cameras ......305
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines .........306
360 Degree Camera Settings ................307
Active Park Assist
What Is Active Park Assist ......................309
How Does Active Park Assist Work ......309
Active Park Assist Precautions .............309
Switching Active Park Assist On and Off
.......................................................................309
Entering a Parallel Parking Space .......309
Entering a Perpendicular Parking Space
.........................................................................310
Exiting a Parking Space ............................310
Active Park Assist – Troubleshooting
..........................................................................311
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ...............................313
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
.........................................................................313
Setting the Cruise Control Speed ..........313
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................314
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................314
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................314
Adaptive Cruise Control
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work ...................................315
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
.........................................................................315
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
.........................................................................316
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic
Cancellation ..............................................318
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed ...........................................................318
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
.........................................................................319
Canceling the Set Speed .........................320
Resuming the Set Speed .........................320
Overriding the Set Speed ..........................321
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators .......321
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control to Cruise Control ......................................321
Lane Centering .............................................322
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control ......324
Troubleshooting ......................................325
Drive Mode Control
What Is Drive Mode Control ...................328
How Does Drive Mode Control Work
........................................................................328
Selecting a Drive Mode .............................328
Drive Modes ..................................................329
Drive Mode Control – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................331
Lane Keeping System
What Is the Lane Keeping System .......333
How Does the Lane Keeping System
Work ............................................................333
Lane Keeping System Precautions ......333
10
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Lane Keeping System Limitations ........333
Switching the Lane Keeping System
Mode ...........................................................334
Alert Mode .....................................................334
Aid Mode ........................................................335
Alert and Aid Mode ....................................335
Lane Keeping System Indicators ..........336
Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting
........................................................................337
Blind Spot Information
System
What Is Blind Spot Information System
.......................................................................340
How Does Blind Spot Information
System Work ...........................................340
Precautions ..............................................340
Limitations ................................................340
Requirements ..........................................340
Switching Blind Spot Information
System On and Off ...............................340
Locating the Blind Spot Information
System Sensors .......................................341
Blind Spot Information System With
Trailer Coverage .......................................341
Indicators ...................................................343
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting ......................................343
Cross Traffic Alert
What Is Cross Traffic Alert ......................344
How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work ......344
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions .............344
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations ...............344
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off
........................................................................344
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors
........................................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer Coverage
........................................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators ..................345
Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting
........................................................................346
Pre-Collision Assist
What Is Pre-Collision Assist ....................347
How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work
........................................................................347
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions ...........347
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations ............348
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Off ................................................................349
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors
........................................................................349
Distance Indication ....................................350
Distance Alert ................................................351
Automatic Emergency Braking ...............351
Evasive Steering Assist .............................352
Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting
........................................................................353
Driver Alert
What Is Driver Alert ....................................355
How Does Driver Alert Work ...................355
Driver Alert Precautions ...........................355
Driver Alert Limitations .............................355
Switching Driver Alert On and Off ........355
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting ..............356
Speed Sign Recognition
What Is Speed Sign Recognition ...........357
How Does Speed Sign Recognition Work
........................................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition Precautions
........................................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition Limitations
........................................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition Indicators ......357
11
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Warning ........................................358
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Tolerance .....................................358
Troubleshooting .....................................358
Load Carrying
Load Carrying Precautions .....................360
Using a Slide-In Camper ...........................361
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels ................................361
What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating
.........................................................................361
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.........................................................................361
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating ...........................................................361
Calculating Payload ...................................363
Calculating the Load Limit ......................363
Pickup Bed
Pickup Bed Precautions ...........................366
Pickup Bed Anchor Points ......................366
Tailgate Anchor Points .............................368
Pickup Bed Ramps ....................................368
Connecting a Trailer
Connecting a Trailer Precautions ...........371
Hitches .............................................................371
Connecting a Trailer ...................................372
Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting
........................................................................374
Towing a Trailer
Towing a Trailer Precautions ..................375
Trailer Brake Precautions .........................375
Towing a Trailer Limitations ....................375
Loading Your Trailer ...................................376
Trailer Towing Hints ...................................376
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft ...............................377
Towing Weights and Dimensions .........378
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting .....404
Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller
What Is the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller ..................................................405
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
Precautions ..............................................405
Using the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller ..................................................405
Adjusting the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller Mode .....................................406
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting ......................................407
Trailer Sway Control
How Does Trailer Sway Control Work
.......................................................................409
Trailer Sway Control Precautions ........409
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and
Off ...............................................................409
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Vehicles With: Pro Trailer
Backup Assist
What Is the Trailer Reversing Aid ..........410
How Does the Trailer Reversing Aid Work
........................................................................410
Trailer Reversing Aid Precautions .........410
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for a Conventional Trailer ...........................410
Using the Trailer Reversing Aid Controller
.........................................................................413
Using the Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views ............................................................414
Trailer Reversing Aid - Troubleshooting
.........................................................................416
12
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Vehicles With: Trailer
Reverse Guidance (TRG)
What Is the Trailer Reversing Aid .........420
How Does the Trailer Reversing Aid Work
........................................................................420
Trailer Reversing Aid Precautions ........420
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for a Conventional Trailer ..........................420
Using the Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views ...........................................................422
Trailer Reversing Aid - Troubleshooting
........................................................................424
Driving Hints
Off-Road Driving .........................................428
Cold Weather Precautions ......................430
Breaking-In ...................................................430
Driving Economically ................................430
Floor Mats .......................................................431
Snow Plowing - Vehicles
Without: Snow Plow Mode
Snow Plowing Precautions .....................432
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With:
Snow Plow Mode
Snow Plowing Precautions .....................433
Snowplow .................................................433
Snowplow Mode .........................................434
Crash and Breakdown
Information
Roadside Assistance .................................436
High Voltage Battery Vehicle Precautions
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) .........437
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Off ................................................................438
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................438
Post-Crash Alert System ........................440
Automatic Crash Shutoff ........................440
Recovery Towing ........................................440
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................441
Towing Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions .........443
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
4x4 ...............................................................443
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle - 4x2
........................................................................445
Emergency Towing ....................................445
Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting
........................................................................445
Fuses
Fuse Precautions ........................................446
Under Hood Fuse Box ..............................446
Body Control Module Fuse Box ..............451
Identifying Fuse Types .............................454
Fuses – Troubleshooting .........................454
Maintenance
Maintenance Precautions .......................455
Opening and Closing the Hood .............455
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™
.......................................................................456
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L Diesel .....457
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L .................458
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™
.......................................................................459
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) .........................460
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L ..................461
Engine Oil ......................................................462
Checking the Coolant ...............................463
Engine Air Filter ............................................467
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap -
Diesel ..........................................................470
Changing the Fuel Filter - Diesel ............471
13
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Changing the Fuel Filter - Gasoline .......471
Changing the 12V Battery .........................471
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................473
Exterior Bulbs ...............................................474
Interior Bulbs ................................................483
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators ........483
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator .......483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.0L Diesel ............483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.3L ..........................484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator .......484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators ........484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................484
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Single Generator ....................................485
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Dual Generators .....................................485
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Products .....................................486
Cleaning the Exterior ................................486
Cleaning the Interior .................................488
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............490
Waxing Your Vehicle .................................490
Storing Your Vehicle
Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage ......492
Removing Your Vehicle From Storage
........................................................................493
Wheel and Tire Information
Locating the Tire label .............................494
Department of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades ...............................494
Information on the Tire Sidewall .........495
Glossary of Tire Terminology .................500
Tire Replacement Requirements ..........501
Using Snow Chains ....................................503
Tire Care
Checking the Tire Pressures ...................505
Inflating the Tires .......................................505
Inspecting the Tire for Wear ..................506
Inspecting the Tire for Damage ............506
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems ......507
Tire Rotation .................................................507
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .......................................................509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Overview ...................................................509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Precautions ...............................................510
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Limitations .................................................510
Viewing the Tire Pressures ........................511
Resetting Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..........................................................511
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting .......................................514
Changing a Road Wheel
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................516
Wheel Nuts ...................................................523
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™
........................................................................524
Engine Specifications - 3.0L Diesel ......525
Engine Specifications - 3.3L ...................526
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................527
Engine Specifications - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................528
Engine Specifications - 5.0L ..................529
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .....530
14
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L Diesel .................531
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L .............................532
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .....533
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................534
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L .............................535
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.7L EcoBoost™ ......................................536
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.0L Diesel .................................................537
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.3L ..............................................................539
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L Ecoboost™ ......................................541
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L, Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
........................................................................543
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
5.0L ..............................................................545
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .......547
Specification - 3.0L Diesel .................548
Specification - 3.3L ...............................548
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ......549
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................550
Specification - 5.0L ...............................550
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) .............551
Fuel Tank Capacity - Diesel ....................552
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV) ..........................553
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .......554
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel ..................555
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L ...............................556
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .......557
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV) ..........................................558
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L ...............................559
Washer Fluid Specification .....................559
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................560
Brake Fluid Specification ........................560
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification .............................................561
Specification ............................................562
Specification ............................................562
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number ..............564
Connected Vehicle
What Is a Connected Vehicle .................565
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......565
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............565
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................565
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network .....................................................565
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................566
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........569
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password ................................569
Audio System
Audio System Precautions ......................570
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
........................................................................570
Selecting the Audio Source ....................570
Playing or Pausing the Audio Source
........................................................................570
Adjusting the Volume ...............................570
15
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off
.........................................................................571
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off
.........................................................................571
Setting a Memory Preset ..........................571
Muting the Audio ..........................................571
Adjusting the Sound Settings .................571
Setting the Clock and Date ......................571
AM/FM Radio ................................................572
Switching the Display On and Off ........573
Digital Radio ..................................................573
Satellite Radio .............................................574
Audio System – Troubleshooting ..........577
Identifying the Audio Unit .......................580
Information and
Entertainment Display
Overview
Information and Entertainment Display
Precautions ...............................................581
Information and Entertainment Display
Limitations .................................................581
Status Bar ......................................................581
Feature Bar ...................................................582
Information On Demand Screen -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen .........582
Voice Interaction
What is Voice Interaction ........................583
Setting the Wake Word ............................583
Beginning a Voice Interaction ................583
Voice Interaction Examples ....................583
Phone
Phone Precautions ....................................585
Connecting Your Phone ...........................585
Phone Menu .................................................585
Making and Receiving a Phone Call .....586
Sending and Receiving a Text Message
........................................................................587
Bluetooth®
Connecting a Bluetooth® Device ........589
Playing Media Using Bluetooth® .........589
Apps
App Precautions .........................................590
App Requirements ....................................590
Accessing Apps ..........................................590
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device ..........590
Enabling Apps on an Android Device
.......................................................................590
Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off
.........................................................................591
Switching Android Auto On and Off .....591
Personal Profiles
How Do Personal Profiles Work ............592
Enabling or Disabling Personal Profiles
........................................................................592
Creating a Personal Profile .....................593
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to a Remote Control ...................................593
Navigation
Accessing Navigation ...............................594
Navigation Map Updates ........................594
Adjusting the Map ......................................594
Live Traffic .....................................................594
Setting a Destination ................................594
Waypoints .....................................................595
Route Guidance ..........................................595
Trailer Towing Navigation ........................596
Vehicle System Updates
Updating the Vehicle Systems Wirelessly
........................................................................597
Performing a Master Reset .....................598
16
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................599
Ford Protect
What Is Ford Protect ................................600
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......602
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........605
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Diesel ...........................609
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Gasoline .......................614
Customer Information
Rollover Warning .........................................618
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program - United States of America
........................................................................618
The Mediation and Arbitration Program
- Canada .....................................................619
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Manual ........................................................619
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States .........................................................620
Reporting Safety Defects in Canada
.......................................................................620
Type Approvals ............................................622
Perchlorate ...................................................642
Replacement Parts Recommendation
........................................................................642
Mobile Communications Equipment
........................................................................642
End User License Agreement ................643
Emission Law - United States of America
.......................................................................668
Export Unique Options ............................669
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............670
17
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
18
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Contacting Us
If you require assistance or clarification on policies or procedures, please contact the customer relationship center.
United States
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
PO Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-888-658-6805 www.ford.com/help/contact/
Canada
Customer Relationship Center
Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca
Facebook: FordServiceCA (English),
FordServiceQC (Francais)
Europe
Telephone: 02035644444
E-mail: [email protected]
Twitter: @forduk
Australia
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
Private Mail Bag 5
Fairlane Business Park #3
Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061
Telephone: 13 3673 (FORD)
E-mail: [email protected]
New Zealand
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
Private Bag 76912
Manukau City 2241
Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ)
E-mail: [email protected]
Asia Pacific
E-mail: [email protected]
Caribbean, Central America and
Israel
Ford Motor Company
Ford Export Operations
Attention: Owner Relations
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, MI 48101
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
E-mail: [email protected]
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico
Ford Motor Company
Ford Export Operations
Attention: Owner Relations
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, MI 48101
Telephone: (800) 841-3673
E-mail: [email protected]
Argentina
Telephone: 0800-888-3673
Brazil
www.ford.com.br
North Africa
E-mail: [email protected]
Sub-Saharan Africa
E-mail: [email protected]
19
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Contacting Us
Puerto Rico
Ford International Business Development,
Inc.
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, PR 00922-1957
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
Fax: (313) 390-0804
E-mail: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
Middle East
Ford Middle East Customer Relationship
Center
P.O. Box 21740
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: 80004441066
Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
Arabia: 800850078
Kuwait: 22280384
Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965
1 898900
Fax: +971 4 3327266
E-mail: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
South Korea
Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003
E-mail: [email protected]
Ford Credit - US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for more information about Ford Credit and access to an account manager, visit www.ford.com/finance.
20
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle in order to benefit from greater safety and pleasure from driving it. Use this digital manual, that we have also made available for your continued use through the FordPass app and your local Ford website to familiarize yourself with the basics.
Note: To download the FordPass app, visit your device's app store.
Note: To find the local Ford website, visit https://corporate.ford.com/operations/ locations/global-links.html
.
Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on all printed owner’s information when selling this vehicle.
Our digital resources include a comprehensive digital Owner’s Manual that is dynamically created according to the features on your vehicle by using the
vehicle identification number. See
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number (page 564). The digital Owner’s
Manual includes visual and full text search functions so that you can quickly locate the information you are looking for. It also includes links to a number of how-to videos created to help you understand some of the advanced technologies on your vehicle.
Features and Options
Note: This publication describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options that are not available on the vehicle you have purchased.
Illustrations
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual could show features as used in different models, some can appear different to you on your vehicle.
Location of Components
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
E154903
A
B
Right-hand side.
Left-hand side.
21
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
USING THIS PUBLICATION
To quickly locate information about your vehicle, use the word search within the
Owner's Manual application.
22
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Symbols Glossary
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR
VEHICLE
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Air conditioning system
E162384
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant type
Anti-lock braking system
Child seat tether anchor
E332905
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Electric Parking brake
Engine air filter
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Engine coolant
Battery
Engine coolant temperature
Battery acid
Engine oil
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Fasten seatbelt
E71880
E231160
Flammable
Front airbag
E67017
Front fog lamps
Child seat lower anchor Fuel pump reset
23
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
Parking aid
E139213
Passenger airbag activated
E270849
Symbols Glossary
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E167012
Stability control
E138639
Hill descent control
E163171
Trail control
E332910
Windshield wiping system
E270969
24
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E132353
Symbols Glossary
Windshield wash and wipe
25
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
WARNING: Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector.
We respect your privacy and are committed to protecting it. The information contained in this manual was correct at the time of publication but as technology rapidly changes, we recommend that you visit the local Ford website for the latest information.
Your vehicle has electronic control units that have data recording functionality and the ability to permanently or temporarily store data. This data could include information on the condition and status of your vehicle, vehicle maintenance requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are described in this section. Some of the data recorded is stored in event logs or error logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service or repair.
Note: We may provide information in response to requests from law enforcement, other government authorities and third parties acting with lawful authority or through a legal process. Such information could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system components, for example fuel level, tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for example wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration and seatbelt status.
• Events or errors in essential systems, for example headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations, for example airbag deployment and stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example temperature.
Some of this data, when used in combination with other information, for example an accident report, damage to a vehicle or eyewitness statements, could be associated with a specific person.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use data, for example account information, vehicle location and driving characteristics, that could identify you. We transmit this data through a dedicated, protected connection. We only collect and use data to enable your use of our services to which you have subscribed, with your consent or where permitted by law. For additional information, see the terms and conditions of the services to which you have subscribed.
For additional information about our privacy policy, refer to the local Ford website.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms and conditions and data privacy information for any services equipped with your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We take no responsibility for services that third parties provide.
Where equipped, SiriusXM with 360L may use the modem. To disable, turn off the
SiriusXM 360L or Vehicle Connectivity
setting. See Enabling and Disabling the
26
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
SERVICE DATA
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, for example, your contact information, to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you products and services that may interest you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries.
EVENT DATA
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
27
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (for example name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Active Drive Assist Driver Facing
Camera Data
(If Equipped)
If active drive assist is active in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, the system may record driver attentiveness, based on the direction of eyes and duration, and photographs of the driver seat area.
Note: No data is recorded under normal driving conditions.
SETTINGS DATA
Your vehicle has electronic control units that have the ability to store data based on your personalized settings. The data is stored locally in the vehicle or on devices that you connect to it, for example, a USB drive or digital music player. You can delete some of this data and also choose whether to share it through the services to which
you subscribe. See Enabling and
Disabling the Modem (page 565).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
The modem has a SIM. The modem was enabled when your vehicle was built and periodically sends messages to stay connected to the cell phone network, receive automatic software updates and send vehicle-related information to us, for example diagnostic information. These messages could include information that identifies your vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial number of the modem. Cell phone network service providers could have access to additional information, for example cell phone network tower identification. For additional information about our privacy policy, visit www.FordConnected.com
or refer to your local Ford website.
Note: The modem continues to send this information unless you disable the modem or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
Note: The service can be unavailable or interrupted for a number of reasons, for example environmental or topographical conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a modem, visit www.FordConnected.com
.
28
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Data Privacy
MOBILE DEVICE DATA
If you connect a mobile device to your vehicle, you can display data from your device on the touchscreen for example, music and album art. You can share your vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system. See App
The mobile apps function operates by your connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and includes, for example, the vehicle identification number of your vehicle, the
SYNC module serial number, odometer, enabled apps, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain it only as long as necessary to provide the service, to troubleshoot, for continuous improvement and to offer you products and services that may be of interest to you according to your preferences and where allowed by law.
If you connect a cell phone to the system, the system creates a profile that links to that cell phone. The cell phone profile enables more mobile features and efficient operation. The profile contains, for example data from your phonebook, read and unread text messages and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system creates and retains a media device index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when you connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you use the master reset function to erase the stored
information. See Connecting Your
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's module.
For additional information about our privacy policy, refer to the local Ford website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has connectivity technology, visit www.FordConnected.com
.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
DATA
(IF EQUIPPED)
When the emergency call system is active, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to the emergency call system may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to emergency services operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist emergency services operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the emergency call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency call systems that are required by law.
29
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
STEERING WHEEL
A
Visual Search
B
F E D C
E310594
A
D
E
B
C
F
See Switching Lane Centering On and Off (page 323).
See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 151).
See Selecting a Radio Station (page 572).
See Making and Receiving a Phone Call (page 586).
See What is Voice Interaction (page 583).
See Adjusting the Volume (page 570).
30
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
INSTRUMENT PANEL
B C D E F
A
G
M L K J I H
E328453
A
H
I
F
G
J
D
E
B
C
K
See Instrument Cluster Overview
(page 146). See Instrument Cluster
(page 145). See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 144).
See Switching Traction Control On and Off (page 284).
See Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and Off (page 307).
See Switching Active Park Assist On and Off (page 309).
See Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Off (page 438).
See Switching Snowplow Mode On and Off (page 434).
See Opening the Glove Compartment (page 205).
See What Is the Power Outlet (page 199).
See Identifying the Climate Control Unit
(page 158). See Identifying the
Climate Control Unit (page 163).
See Identifying the Audio Unit (page 580).
31
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
L
M
See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 262).
See Using the Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (page 405).
VEHICLE INTERIOR
A B
D C
E320265
A
B
C
D
See Shifting Using the Buttons on the Selector Lever (page 254).
See Using the Center Console Work Surface
Center Console Work Surface (page 201).
See Folding the Seats (page 176).
See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 167).
32
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
FRONT EXTERIOR
A B
Visual Search
C
E320690
F E D
A
D
E
B
C
F
See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 305).
See What Is the Lane Keeping System (page 333).
See Folding the Exterior Mirrors (page 140).
See Deploying and Stowing the Power Running Boards (page 116).
See Exterior Lighting Control (page 124).
See Accessing the Front Towing Point (page 440).
33
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR
A B C D
G F E
E320171
A
D
E
B
C
F
G
See Locating the Power Outlet (page 190).
See Tailgate Work Surface (page 101).
See Accessing the Tailgate Step (page 98).
See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 305).
See Locating the Blind Spot Information System Sensors (page 341).
See Locating the Rear Parking Aid Sensors (page 298).
See Connecting a Trailer (page 372).
34
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
CHILD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety organizations, base their recommendations for child restraints on probable child height, age and weight thresholds, or on the minimum requirements of the law. We recommend that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly install the child restraint in your vehicle and that you consult your pediatrician to make sure you have a child restraint appropriate for your child. To locate a child restraint fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in child restraints made especially for their height, age and weight, may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
35
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child's height. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child restraints or booster seats when they are not in use. They could become projectiles in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
When installing a child restraint with seatbelts:
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright position before you install the child restraint.
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle.
Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E308373
Super Cab
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the child restraint, with the tongue between the child restraint and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking mode.
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR
POINTS
What Are the Child Restraint
Anchor Points
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren)
Anchor points allow you to quickly and safely install a child restraint.
Locating the Child Restraint Lower
Anchor Points
(If Equipped)
Crew Cab
36
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E308385 E308389
Crew Cab
E312604
The lower child restraint anchors are at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat backrest.
Note: Regular Cab vehicles do not have lower anchors.
Locating the Child Restraint Top
Tether Anchor Points
Regular Cab
E308390
Super Cab
37
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Restraint Position
Information
Install the child restraint tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint.
E308396
Rear Facing Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Child and Child Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29 kg)
Over 65 lb (29 kg)
LATCH (Lower Anchors
Only)
X
Seatbelt Only
X
X
Forward Facing Child Restraints
Combined Weight of
Child and Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29 kg)
Over 65 lb (29 kg)
LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
X
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
X
X
Seatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Top Tether Anchor)
X
X
38
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Child Restraints Recommendation
Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger).
Recommended Restraint Type
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child restraint (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seat backrest upright.
You are required by law to properly use child restraints for infants and toddlers in the United States, Canada and Mexico.
Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle.
When possible, properly restrain children
12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
When installing a rear facing child restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to avoid interference between the child restraint and the vehicle seat in front of the child restraint.
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Using Seatbelts
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
Note: The following does not apply to the front center position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab vehicles.
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated is a forward facing child restraint, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child restraint.
39
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Perform the following steps when installing a child restraint with seatbelts.
1.
Position the child restraint in a seat with a seatbelt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seating position until the latch engages. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Make sure you did not twist the belt webbing.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until you pull all of the seatbelt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. This mode is also available on the center seat of a Regular Cab. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The seatbelt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
40
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
7.
Pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. You should not be able to pull more belt out. If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle helps to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap, attach it.
E142534
10.
Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Seatbelts
WARNING: Always use both the lap and shoulder portion of the seatbelt in the center seating position.
Note: The following applies to the front center position of Super Cab and Crew Cab vehicles.
The seatbelt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the seatbelt. The webbing above the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt.
1.
Position the child restraint in the front center seat.
41
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seating position until the latch engages. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap portions next to the tongue, route the tongue and webbing through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Make sure you did not twist the belt webbing.
E142533
5. When pushing down with your knee on the child restraint, pull up on the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap belt portion of the seatbelt.
6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to securely tighten the child restraint in the vehicle.
7.
If the child restraint has a tether strap, attach it.
E142531
42
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E142534
Child Safety
8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap and shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
• Two lower anchors where the vehicle seat backrest and seat cushion meet, called the seat bight.
• One top tether anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments. These attachments connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint.
However, you can still use the seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the lower anchors are not used. For forward-facing child restraints, you must also attach the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child restraint.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child restraints with tether straps.
Installing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat
WARNING: Do not attach two child safety restraints to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety restraint attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
The Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system has three vehicle anchor points:
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 25.7 in
(652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center.
43
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
You cannot install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the center seating position. You can only use LATCH compatible child restraints with attachments on belt webbing at this seating position provided that the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower anchor if another child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child restraint from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in (2.5 cm).
If you did not properly anchor the child restraint, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child
Restraints
When used in combination, you may attach either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if it is included with the child restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child restraints include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child restraint and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child restraint for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your child restraint does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping the child restraint just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Once you have installed the child restraint using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap.
Attaching the Front Seat Tether
Strap
Regular Cab
E175295
1.
Route the child restraint tether strap over the back of the seat and under the head restraint.
44
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. Otherwise, route the tether strap over the top of the seat backrest.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. You may need to pull the seat backrest forward to access the tether anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before installing the child restraint.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If you incorrectly clip the tether strap, the child restraint may not be retained properly in the event of a crash.
If you did not properly anchor the child restraint, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use.
Attaching the Rear Seat Tether
Strap
(If Equipped)
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E309318
There are three loops of webbing above the back of the rear seat. Use these loops as routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child restraint tether straps.
For example, you can use the center loop as a routing loop for a child restraint in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child restraints installed in the outermost rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child restraint.
To provide a tight tether strap:
E309384
1.
Route the vehicle tether loop between the head restraint posts, then route the child restraint tether strap through the loop, forward of the head restraint.
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether anchor loop in the adjacent seating position. If using the driver side, pass the strap behind the shoulder belt for the center seat. Put the tether strap through the routing loop. The head restraint support post holds the child restraint tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong enough to hold the child restraint during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
45
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
If you did not properly anchor the child restraint, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child restraint and meet the following criteria.
• Generally children who are less than
57 in (1.45 m) tall.
• Are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12).
• Are between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer yes to all of these questions when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat backrest with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat backrest or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head, as measured at the tops of the ears, above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat backrest or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high-back booster seat.
46
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E70710
• High-back booster seats
Child Safety
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high-back booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder.
The following drawings compare the ideal fit to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips.
E142596
E142597
47
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not use any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
(IF
EQUIPPED)
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counterclockwise to switch the child lock on and clockwise to switch it off.
WARNING: You cannot open the rear doors from inside if you have put the child safety locks on.
E238364
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of each rear door. You must switch the child safety lock separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child lock on and counterclockwise to switch it off.
48
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly made up of one buckle and one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
All seating positions in this vehicle have seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle should properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• A shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking mode, except driver seatbelt.
• Height adjusters at the front outermost seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front outermost and rear outermost seating positions.
49
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
A seatbelt warning light and chime.
E71880
Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator.
E67017
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. In side crashes and rollovers, the pretensioners will be activated when the Safety Canopy is activated.
FASTENING AND
UNFASTENING THE
SEATBELTS
This applies to all seating positions, except for the front center position of Super Cab and Crew Cab.
E142588
2. Press the button to release the seatbelt.
Using the Seatbelt With Cinch
Tongue
This applies to the front center seating position of Super Cab and Crew Cab.
The cinch tongue slides up and down the seatbelt webbing when you stow the seatbelt or when you put the seatbelts on.
When you buckle the seatbelt, the cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap portion, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so wear the shoulder belt properly and do not allow any slack in either the lap or shoulder portions.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
E142587
1.
Insert the seatbelt tongue into the buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
1.
Pull the seatbelt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt crosses your shoulder and chest.
2. Make sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
50
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue to the buckle by pulling on the tongue.
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the seatbelt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the seatbelt locks and helps reduce your forward movement.
SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE
What is Sensitive Locking Mode
Sensitive locking mode is a seatbelt retractor feature that allows shoulder belt length adjustment according to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement.
How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Work
If the driver suddenly brakes, turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the seatbelts lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the seatbelt retractor locks if you pull the seatbelt webbing out too quickly. If the retractor locks, slowly lower the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to retract.
If the retractor does not unlock, pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position.
For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat backrest or push the seat backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position.
AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE
What Is Automatic Locking Mode
This feature keeps the seatbelts pre-locked. The belt still retracts to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
When to Use Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time you install a child restraint in a front seating position in a
Regular Cab, Super Cab, Crew Cab or any rear seating position of a Super Cab or
Crew Cab. The optional front seat center seatbelt in the Super Cab and Crew Cab has a cinch mechanism. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in a rear
seat whenever possible. See Child Safety
Note: Automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seatbelt.
Engaging Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
51
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
1.
Fasten the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until you pull the entire belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode.
Disengaging Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive locking mode.
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELTS
DURING PREGNANCY
Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest.
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELT
HEIGHT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce its effectiveness and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and properly fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the seatbelt snugly and low across the hips. Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant women must follow this practice. See the following figure.
E145664
1.
Pull the button and slide the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
E142590
52
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELT
LENGTH
E162708
1.
Pull some seatbelt webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the tongue, grasp the metal tip of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue up.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle.
SEATBELT REMINDER
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder
Work
This feature supplements the seatbelt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the seatbelt warning lamp when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid the system switching on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place on the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to switch on.
53
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
If
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle reaches at least 6.0 mph (9.7 km/h) and
1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Then
You and the front seat passenger buckle your seatbelts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and an indicator tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your seatbelts.
The seatbelt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least
6.0 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and an indicator tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your seatbelts.
54
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators
A warning lamp illuminates if the ignition is on, a front seat is occupied and the seatbelt has not been fastened.
The warning lamp illuminates until you fasten your seatbelt.
E71880
Seatbelt Reminder Audible
Warnings
A warning tone sounds if the warning lamp illuminates and your vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed.
The warning tone sounds for up to five minutes or until you fasten your seatbelt.
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder
On and Off
WARNING: While the system allows you to deactivate it, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this cancels the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot disable the seatbelt reminder. Also, if the seatbelt reminder has been previously disabled, it will be re-enabled during the use
of MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 78).
Read Steps 1 - 4 before proceeding with the programming procedure.
Make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger seatbelts are unfastened.
1.
Switch the ignition on. Do not start the engine.
2. Wait about one minute until the seatbelt warning light switches off.
After Step 2, wait an additional five seconds before proceeding with Step
3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light switches on.
4. When the seatbelt warning light is on, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light flashes for confirmation.
This switches the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on.
This switches the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off.
CHECKING THE SEATBELTS
Check the seatbelts and child restraints periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
Check all of the following seatbelt assemblies after a crash.
• Retractors.
• Buckles.
• Front seatbelt buckle assemblies.
55
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
• Shoulder belt height adjusters.
• Shoulder belt guide on seat backrest.
• Child restraint LATCH and tether anchors.
• Attaching hardware.
Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be checked and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the way the seatbelt fits across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from our dealers. Only use our seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your vehicle restraint system.
WARNING: Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints.
56
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Safety System™
WHAT IS THE PERSONAL
SAFETY SYSTEM
Personal Safety System
An advanced safety system that protects occupants in frontal crashes.
HOW DOES THE PERSONAL
SAFETY SYSTEM WORK
This system provides an improved level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system analyzes occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, and one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with pretensioners, energy management retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front seatbelt usage sensors, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights.
57
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
HOW DO THE FRONT AIRBAGS
WORK
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the seatbelts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
Contact with a deploying airbag may cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
HOW DO THE SIDE AIRBAGS
WORK
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the front or rear seatbacks, or in areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers not released by Ford could prevent the deployment of the airbags and increase the risk of injuries in a crash.
58
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
The side airbags are on the outermost side of the seat backrests of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollovers, the airbags will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided to occupants in side impact crashes.
HOW DO THE KNEE AIRBAGS
WORK
Driver and passenger knee airbags are under or within the instrument panel.
During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the driver and passenger knee airbags (individually or both) based on crash severity and respective occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the driver and passenger knee airbags may deploy (individually or both) but the corresponding front airbag may not activate. It is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbags are
E67017
HOW DOES THE SAFETY
CANOPY™ WORK
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front passenger seat backrests.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag.
59
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
The Safety Canopy deploys during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy inflates between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events.
Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening.
AIRBAG PRECAUTIONS
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
E67017 system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 65).
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms on the airbag cover or through the steering wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
60
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
WARNING: Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Objects could become projectiles during airbag deployment. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
PROPERLY ADJUSTING THE
DRIVER AND FRONT
PASSENGER SEATS
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated occupants sit upright, lean against the seat backrest, and center themselves on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases.
CHILDREN AND AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
61
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
How Does the Front Passenger
Sensing System Work
The system uses a passenger airbag status indicator which illuminates indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either enabled or disabled.
Note: When you first switch the ignition on, the passenger airbag status indicator off and on lamps illuminate for a short period to confirm they are functional.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a vehicle without rear seats, properly restrain the child in the center front seat unless doing so would interfere with driving your vehicle.
This provides lap and shoulder belt protection for all occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. A child or infant properly restrained in the center front seat should not incur risk of serious injury from the airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
What Is the Front Passenger
Sensing System
This system detects a properly seated occupant and determines if the front passenger airbag should be enabled.
E181984
The indicator lamps are in the overhead console.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable the front passenger frontal airbag under these conditions:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off of the seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.
Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat.
62
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
• When the front passenger sensing system disables the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the off lamp.
• If you have installed the child restraint and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the on lamp, switch your vehicle off, remove the child restraint from your vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the on lamp.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the passenger airbag status indicator off lamp is illuminated, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat backrest in an upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This allows the system to detect that person and enable the passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains illuminated even after this, you should advise the person to ride in the rear seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, leaning against the seat backrest, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases.
If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest map pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat.
The listed conditions could cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat could appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions listed.
Make sure the front passenger
E67017 sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 65).
If the airbag readiness light is on, do the following:
63
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Switch your vehicle off.
• Check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction if found.
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated, there may be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle in for service immediately.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact your
Customer Relationship Center. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
Precautions
Front Passenger Sensing System Indicators
Occupant
Empty
Child
Adult
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
OFF: Illuminated
ON: Not Illuminated
OFF: Illuminated
ON: Not Illuminated
OFF: Not Illuminated
ON: Illuminated
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system. This could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
64
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including hood, bumper system, frame, front end body structure, tow hooks and hood pins) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify or add equipment to the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors. These sensors provide information to the restraints control module which activates the following:
• Front seatbelt pretensioners.
• Driver airbag.
• Passenger airbag.
• Knee airbag(s).
• Seat mounted side airbags.
• Safety Canopy.
Based on the type of crash, the restraints control module deploys the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after you switch the ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or stays on.
• You hear a series of five tones. The tone pattern repeats periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced immediately.
Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, seatbelt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• The front airbags activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes. Front airbags may activate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts if the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The side airbags inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation.
• The Safety Canopy inflates in certain side impact crashes or rollover events.
The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover.
65
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Airbags
DISPOSING OF AIRBAGS
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel.
66
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pedestrian Alert System
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE PEDESTRIAN
ALERT SYSTEM
Due to the quiet operation of hybrid and electric vehicles at low speeds, the system creates a subtle sound to alert pedestrians.
The system is on when your vehicle is running and not in park (P). Some sound may be audible in the passenger compartment.
67
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
911 Assist
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that can call for help.
For more information, visit www.owner.ford.com
.
HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off. If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone.
SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides about 10 seconds to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator. The occupants in your vehicle are able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
During an emergency call the system transmits vehicle data to the emergency service.
EMERGENCY CALL
REQUIREMENTS
WARNING: Do not wait for 911
Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
68
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
911 Assist
(If Equipped)
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
EMERGENCY CALL
LIMITATIONS
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
911 is the emergency number. The following are limitations of this feature:
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system.
69
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Make sure a valid remote control is within
5 ft (1.5 m) from the front door handles and rear of vehicle.
The system may not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no charge.
• There is interference causing issues with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
Use your remote control to access various vehicle systems.
Note: The buttons on your remote may vary depending on the vehicle region or options.
Unlock
Press the button to unlock all
E138629
Lock
Press the button to lock all
E138623
Remote Start
(If Equipped)
E138625
Press the button to remote start.
Tailgate
(If Equipped)
Press the button to open the
E191530
Panic Alarm
(If Equipped)
E138624
Press the button to sound the
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
FLIP KEY
Opening Your Flip Key
Press the round button on the remote control to extend the flip key.
70
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOVING THE KEY BLADE
E191532
Note: Inspect the key blade for debris.
Periodically clean with a brush.
Closing Your Flip Key
Press and hold the round button on the remote control to fold the key blade when not in use.
E191532
E322866
Push the release button on your passive key and pull the key blade out.
SOUNDING THE PANIC ALARM
E138624
Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button again, or switch the ignition on to turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off.
LOCATING YOUR VEHICLE
E138623
Press the lock button twice within three seconds. The turn signal lamps flash.
Note: We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle.
71
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START
WARNING: Keep batteries away from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. If ingested, immediately seek medical attention.
WARNING: If the battery compartment does not securely close, stop using the remote control and replace it as soon as possible. In the meantime, keep the remote control away from children. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
The remote control uses one coin-type
3-volt lithium battery CR2450 or equivalent.
1.
Push the release button and pull the key blade out.
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover.
E322866
72
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY -
VEHICLES WITH: FLIP KEY
E218402
3. Insert a screwdriver, and carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter and install the key blade.
E107998
Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The remote control should operate normally.
WARNING: Keep batteries away from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. If ingested, immediately seek medical attention.
WARNING: If the battery compartment does not securely close, stop using the remote control and replace it as soon as possible. In the meantime, keep the remote control away from children. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Battery Replacement Procedure
The remote control uses one coin-type
3-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade before beginning the procedure.
73
E191533
1.
Insert a screwdriver, in the position shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the battery cover.
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing up.
7.
Replace the battery cover.
Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way.
E107998 Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The remote control should operate normally.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle.
E151800
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to release the battery.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference.
E151801
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver.
5. Remove the battery.
74
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
PUSH BUTTON START
General Information
You must have two previously programmed remote controls inside your vehicle and the new unprogrammed remote controls readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare remote control programmed if two previously programmed remotes are not available. Make sure that your vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Make sure that you close all the doors before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure. Perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if you perform any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Note: You can program a maximum of four remote controls to your vehicle.
Note: If your programmed remote controls are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded remote, you need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Store an extra programmed remote away from your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconvenience. Contact an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement remotes.
Steps for Programming Your Spare
Remote Control
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following center consoles.
Programming Backup Location
E312216
E269950
1.
Place the first programmed remote in the backup slot inside the center console with your foot off the brake pedal, press and release the push button ignition switch.
2. Wait five seconds and then press and release the push button ignition switch again.
3. Remove the remote control.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second programmed remote control in the backup slot. Press and release the push button ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press and release the push button ignition switch again. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Remove the remote control.
75
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
7.
Place the unprogrammed remote control in the backup slot and press and release the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the push button ignition switch to verify the remote control functions operate and your vehicle starts with the new remote control.
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
FLIP KEY
General Information
You can program your own remote control to your vehicle. This procedure programs both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle.
Only use remote controls with an integrated mechanical key.
You must have two previously programmed coded remote controls and the new un–programmed remote readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare remote control programmed if the two previously programmed coded remote controls are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Steps for Programming Your Spare
Remote Control
1.
Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7.
After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new un–programmed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds until you hear the door locks cycle.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key starts the engine if programming is successful. You can operate the keyless remote entry system with the new remote control with integrated key.
If programming was not successful, wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: You can program a maximum of six coded remote controls to your vehicle.
76
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – TROUBLESHOOTING
Keys and Remote Controls – Information Messages
Message Action
Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Replace remote control battery.
77
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS MYKEY
MyKey
MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits.
MYKEY SETTINGS
Non-Configurable MyKey Settings
Seatbelt Reminder or Belt-
Minder™
MyKey mutes the audio system until the front seat passengers buckle the front seat belts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute.
Satellite Radio
(If Equipped)
Some Satellite radio channels have restricted access to adult radio content.
Early Low Fuel
The low fuel level warning lamp turns on earlier.
Driving and Parking Aids
You cannot configure settings for parking aids, blind spot information system, and cross traffic alert. These systems turn on when the vehicle turns on, and you cannot switch them off with a MyKey.
You cannot configure settings for pre-collision assist and lane keeping. These systems turn on when the vehicle turns on, but you can switch them off with a MyKey.
A new destination in the navigation system can only be set using voice commands when using a MyKey, and with your vehicle moving.
Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch the lane departure warning feature off, but this feature turns back on automatically with every new key cycle.
Configurable MyKey Settings
You can configure the following settings
after creating a MyKey. See Creating a
Speed Limit
WARNING: Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury.
You can set a speed limit for your vehicle.
Warning messages appear in the information display and a tone sounds if your vehicle reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed when using a MyKey.
Speed Minder
You can set a speed reminder for your vehicle. Warning messages appear in the information display and a tone sounds if your vehicle exceeds the set speed.
Audio System Volume Limit
The audio system maximum volume is reduced. A message appears in the information display if you attempt to exceed the volume limit. Automatic volume control turns off.
78
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
(If Equipped)
Emergency Assistance
If you set emergency assistance to always on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
Do Not Disturb
If you set do not disturb to always on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
Note: If a phone is connected using Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto while driving with a MyKey, the driver can receive phone calls and text messages even if the do not disturb restriction is on, and if the vehicle is equipped with satellite radio, the adult content is not restricted.
Traction Control
If you set traction control to always on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
CREATING A MYKEY -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START
Vehicles with a center console shifter:
3. Place the remote control in the backup slot with the buttons facing toward the front of the vehicle.
4. Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
5. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
6. Press Vehicle Settings .
7.
Press MyKey .
8. Press Create MyKey .
9. Press Yes .
Note: After you confirm the creation of a
MyKey, we recommend that you label this key.
Vehicles with a column shifter.
E312216
1.
Remove the mat from the center console cup holder.
2. Remove the key blade from the transmitter.
E269950
1.
Raise the front center seat storage lid.
2. Place the remote control in the backup slot with the buttons facing toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
4. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
5. Press Vehicle Settings .
6. Press MyKey .
7.
Press Create MyKey .
8. Press Yes .
Note: After you confirm the creation of a
MyKey, we recommend that you label this key.
79
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
(If Equipped)
CREATING A MYKEY -
VEHICLES WITH: FLIP KEY
1.
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings .
4. Press MyKey .
5. Press Create MyKey .
6. Press Yes .
Note: After you confirm the creation of a
MyKey, we recommend that you label this key.
PROGRAMMING A MYKEY
You can program any remote control to become a restricted MyKey, but you must leave one unmodified as an admin key.
1.
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings .
4. Press MyKey .
5. Select a setting and press the OK button.
6. Configure the setting
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear all MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
1.
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings .
4. Press MyKey .
5. Press Clear All MyKeys .
6. Press Yes .
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about the distance traveled using a MyKey, and the number of admin keys and MyKeys created for your vehicle.
1.
Switch the ignition on.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings .
4. Press MyKey .
5. Press MyKey Information .
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
(IF EQUIPPED)
MyKey is not compatible with unapproved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for an approved remote start system.
80
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
(If Equipped)
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
MyKey – Information Messages - Vehicles With: Push Button Start
Message
Place Key in Backup
Location
Key is Already a MyKey
This Key restricted at
Next Key Cycle. Label
Key as MyKey
Description
Displays when trying to create a MyKey and the admin key is
not placed in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey
Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already designated as a MyKey.
Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch the ignition off.
81
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
(If Equipped)
MyKey – Information Messages - Vehicles With: Flip Key
Message
Key is Already a MyKey
This Key restricted at
Next Key Cycle. Label
Key as MyKey
Description
Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already designated as a MyKey.
Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch the ignition off.
82
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
(If Equipped)
MyKey – Frequently Asked
Questions - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
What is an admin key?
An admin key is a key that you have
not created as a MyKey. See Creating a MyKey (page 79).
Why am I not able to create a MyKey?
You have not placed the admin key in
the backup position. See Creating a
MyKey (page 79). The key used to
switch the ignition on is not an admin key. The key used to switch the ignition on is the only admin key. There has to be at least one admin key. You did not switch the ignition off after creating the last MyKey.
Why am I not able to program a MyKey?
The admin key is not inside your vehicle. The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. You
have not created any MyKeys. See
Why am I not able to clear the MyKeys?
The admin key is not inside your vehicle. The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. You
have not created any MyKeys. See
Why is the MyKey distance not accumulating?
The key used to start the engine is an admin key. An admin key and a MyKey are inside your vehicle. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
MyKey (page 79). You have cleared
Why am I not able to start the engine with a MyKey?
An admin key and a MyKey are inside your vehicle. The system recognizes only the admin key when both are present.
MyKey – Frequently Asked
Questions - Vehicles With: Flip Key
What is an admin key?
An admin key is a key that you have
not created as a MyKey. See Creating a MyKey (page 80).
Why am I not able to create a MyKey?
The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. The key used to switch the ignition on is the only admin key. There has to be at least one admin key.
Why am I not able to program a MyKey?
The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
Why am I not able to clear the MyKeys?
The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
Why is the MyKey distance not accumulating?
The key used to start the engine is an admin key. You have not created any
(page 80). You have cleared the
MyKeys. See Clearing All MyKeys
83
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
OPERATING THE DOORS
FROM OUTSIDE YOUR
VEHICLE
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Using the Remote Control
(If Equipped)
You can only use the remote control when your vehicle is stationary.
Unlocking the Doors
E267112
Press the button to unlock all doors.
Locking the Doors
E267111
Press the button to lock all doors. One short flash of the turn signal lamps confirms that your vehicle has locked.
Note: For more information on operating the doors from outside your vehicle
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Using the Key Blade
If there is a power door lock fault you can use the key blade to lock and unlock the doors.
E333745
A
B
Lock.
Unlock.
OPERATING THE DOORS
FROM INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
Individually Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Locking
Button
The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels.
E138628
A
B
Unlock.
Lock.
84
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Opening the Doors From Inside
Your Vehicle - Crew Cab
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull opens the door.
AUTOUNLOCK (If Equipped)
What Is Autounlock
Autounlock is an unlocking feature that unlocks the vehicle doors when your vehicle comes to a stop.
Autounlock Requirements
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed and your vehicle is moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop.
• You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to the accessory position.
Switching Autounlock On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Switch Autounlock on or off.
AUTOLOCK (If Equipped)
What Is Autolock
Autolock is a locking feature that locks your vehicle doors when you start driving.
Autolock Requirements
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Switching Autolock On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Switch Autolock on or off.
MISLOCK (If Equipped)
What Is Mislock
Mislock is a locking feature that warns you if your vehicle has not locked.
Mislock Limitations
When you press the lock button once, the direction indicators do not flash if:
• Any door or the tailgate is open.
• The hood is open.
If you switch mislock off, the horn does not sound if you press the lock button on the remote control when a door is open.
Switching Mislock On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off.
85
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
Door Ajar Audible Warning
Sounds when a door is not fully closed and your vehicle is moving.
DOORS AND LOCKS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
E249859
It illuminates when you switch the ignition on and remains on if any door or the hood is open.
Doors and Locks – Information Messages
Message
Driver Door Ajar
Passenger Door Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar
Rear Right Door Ajar
Action
Displays if a door is open. Fully close the door.
86
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keyless Entry
(If Equipped)
LOCATING THE KEYLESS
ENTRY KEYPAD
(IF EQUIPPED)
The keypad is near the driver window and illuminates when you touch it.
E190936
KEYLESS ENTRY LIMITATIONS
Make sure your remote control is within 3 ft
(1 m) from the front door handles and the tailgate.
The system could not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no charge.
• There is interference causing issues with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
MASTER ACCESS CODE (If
Equipped)
What Is the Master Access Code
The master access code is a factory-set five-digit entry code. You can operate the keypad with the master access code at any time. The master access code is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer.
KEYLESS ENTRY SETTINGS
Switching Keyless Entry On and
Off
1.
Switch the ignition on using an original key that has not been created as a
MyKey.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings .
4. Press Locks .
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function
You can enable two-stage unlocking function allowing you to unlock only the driver door when you touch the unlock sensor.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking.
If you program the unlocking function so that only the driver door unlocks, you can unlock all of the other doors from inside your vehicle using the power door lock control. You can unlock individual doors by pulling the interior door handles on those doors.
87
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keyless Entry
(If Equipped)
Creating Personal Access Codes
To create your own personal access code:
1.
Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal code one.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful.
To program additional personal access codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory-set code works even if you have set your own personal code.
Clearing All Personal Access
Codes
1.
Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for a few seconds.
This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the factory-set five-digit code works.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
THE DOORS USING REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY
Unlocking the Doors
E333747
With your passive key within 5 ft (1.5 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle for a brief period and then pull on the door handle to unlock, being careful not to touch the lock sensor at the same time or pull on the door handle too quickly. The intelligent access system requires a brief delay to authenticate your intelligent access key.
Locking the Doors
E333746
With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock sensor for approximately one second to lock, being careful to not touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle at the same time. After locking, you can immediately pull on the door handle to confirm locking occurred without inadvertently unlocking.
88
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keyless Entry
(If Equipped)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
THE DOORS USING KEYLESS
ENTRY KEYPAD
Unlocking the Doors
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your personal code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other.
• Press 3-4 within five seconds to unlock all doors.
• Press 5-6 within five seconds to release or open the tailgate, if available.
Locking the Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time with the driver door closed.
Note: You do not need to enter the five digit code first.
KEYLESS ENTRY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why does the keypad not accept the access code?
If you enter the access code too fast on the keypad, the unlock function may not work. Slowly re-enter the access code.
Why does the passive key not work?
The system deactivates passive keys left inside your vehicle when you lock it. You cannot switch the ignition on using a deactivated passive key. Press the unlock button on the remote control to reactivate a passive key.
Why does the keypad not function?
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if you enter a wrong code seven times. The anti-scan mode disables the keypad for one minute and the red light flashes.
89
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Easy Entry and Exit
(If Equipped)
HOW DOES EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT WORK
Easy entry and exit moves the driver seat rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) and the steering column up when you switch the ignition off. The driver seat and steering column return to their previous positions when you switch the ignition on.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column may move up and in.
SWITCHING EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT ON AND OFF
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle .
3. Select Easy Entry/Exit .
If you press any adjustment or memory button when in easy exit mode, the system cancels the operation.
90
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
OPENING THE TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
2. Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate.
3. Turn it to the right to unlock the tailgate.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING
THE TAILGATE
E333071
Pull up on the handle to release the tailgate.
Note: You may need to unlock the tailgate first.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does not have power door locks.
E332901
A
B
Lock.
Unlock.
1.
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
E189556
1.
Unlatch the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the power door locks in-line connector. It is under the pickup box on the right-hand side of the vehicle near the spare tire.
3. Install a protective cap on the in-line connector portion that remains under the pickup box.
Note: A protective cap should be in the glove compartment.
91
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully feed the tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup box and the bumper and place it out of the way under the pickup box.
5. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the step molding. The step pops out slightly.
E311529
6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw. Disconnect the cable.
7.
Disconnect the other cable.
Note: To avoid damaging the tailgate, you may need assistance when removing. The tailgate weighs approximately 97 lb (44 kg).
8. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from the horizontal position.
9. Lift the right-hand side off its hinge.
10.
Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from the horizontal position.
11.
Remove the tailgate from the left-hand side hinge by sliding it to the right.
12.
Install the tailgate in reverse order.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Accessing the Tailgate Step
Integrated Tailgate Step
1.
Lower the tailgate.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. To lock the handle in place, rotate the handle up from the horizontal to the vertical position until you hear a click.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab handle molding if it appears as worn or damaged.
92
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with sufficient lighting.
• Make sure you use the grab handle when climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load below the total maximum load of 350 lb (159 kg).
Stowing the Tailgate Step
1.
Press the yellow button on the handle to lower and then press the yellow lever at the bottom of the handle to unlock. Rotate the handle down from the vertical to the horizontal position and push it into the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal, then push it back into the tailgate until the step is secure.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the step before moving your vehicle. Do not drive with the step or grab handle open.
Note: The power tailgate cannot close if the step is opened. A warning message appears and a chime sounds. After stowing step the power close function is restored.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Bed Extender Precautions
Note: Do not use the bed extender when driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the tailgate mode when you are not using it for restraining cargo. Always keep the bed extender in the grocery mode or the stowed position with the tailgate closed.
Using the Bed Extender
E311521
1.
Pull the locking pin toward the center of your vehicle.
93
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
3
A
20
A
B
A
1 2
E311522
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E311524
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels.
E311523
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat steps 1-3 on the other side of your vehicle.
E311520
5. Insert the latch rod into the tailgate hole.
6. Engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box.
94
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Manual Tailgate
Grocery Mode
E308677
C
D
A
B
E
F
Tablet stand.
Tool inset.
Clamp pocket.
Standard and metric ruler.
Cup holder.
Tailgate anchors.
E311519
1.
Follow steps 1-4.
2. Before engaging the locking pins, rotate the panels away from the tailgate.
3. Engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box.
4. Close the tailgate.
TAILGATE WORK SURFACE
(IF
EQUIPPED)
The tailgate work surface is a durable and functional surface on the inside portion of your tailgate you can use to perform various tasks.
To use the tailgate work surface, fold down the tailgate.
E336605
The tailgate work surface contains clamp pockets that allows you to secure work material.
Note: When you have finished using the tailgate work surface, make sure you remove all of your belongings, then close the tailgate.
95
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
OPENING THE TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate From Inside
Your Vehicle
The vehicle must be in park (P) to operate the power tailgate.
Press the button on the instrument panel.
E308661
Note: A tone sounds while the tailgate opens.
Note: The tailgate stops and reverses if it detects an obstruction when opening.
Note: An alert sounds if the electronic tailgate is disabled.
Opening the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
1.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or power door unlock control.
Note: If an intelligent access transmitter is within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the tailgate unlocks when you press the tailgate release button.
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the tailgate handle.
Opening the Tailgate Using the
Remote Control
Press the remote control button twice within three seconds.
E191530
CLOSING THE TAILGATE
Closing the Tailgate From Inside
Your Vehicle
Press the button on the instrument panel.
E308661
Note: The tailgate stops and reverses if it detects an obstruction when closing.
Closing the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
You can close the power tailgate by:
• Pressing the tailgate button on your remote control twice within three seconds.
• Pressing the button on the instrument panel.
• Pressing the button on the tailgate.
Note: The tailgate stops and reverses if it detects an obstruction when closing.
Lift-to-Close
To close the tailgate automatically using lift-to-close, lift the tailgate approximately
4 in (10 cm) and hold it for a few seconds.
Note: If the tailgate position is more than halfway between open and close, it may not close automatically.
Manual Close
You can close the tailgate manually when you lift the tailgate in a continuous motion.
96
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
If you stop the tailgate motion, the lift-to-close feature can engage and power close the tailgate.
Putting the Tailgate in Manual Mode
You can put the tailgate in manual mode through the vehicle settings in your touchscreen.
Note: In manual mode, the tailgate only functions by the tailgate release button and messaging is reduced.
Closing the Tailgate Using the
Remote Control
Press the remote control button twice within three seconds.
E191530
REMOVING AND INSTALLING
THE TAILGATE
1.
Put the tailgate into manual mode by accessing the vehicle settings using the touchscreen.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Disconnect the power door locks in-line connector. It is under the pickup box on the right-hand side of the vehicle near the spare tire.
4. Install a protective cap on the in-line connector portion that remains under the pickup box.
Note: The protective cap is in the glove compartment.
5. Partially raise the tailgate. Carefully feed the tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup box and the bumper and place it out of the way under the pickup box.
6. Fully lower the tailgate.
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others.
E189556
97
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E310339
7.
Remove the retaining screw.
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
2. Push the button in the center of the step molding. The step pops out slightly.
E311529
8. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw. Disconnect the cable.
9. Disconnect the other cable.
Note: To avoid damaging the tailgate, you may need assistance when removing. The tailgate weighs approximately 97 lb (44 kg).
10.
Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from the horizontal position.
11.
Lift the right-hand side off its hinge.
12.
Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from the horizontal position.
13.
Remove the tailgate from the left-hand side hinge by sliding it to the right.
14.
Install the tailgate in reverse order.
Note: After reinstalling the tailgate it is important to reinstall the retaining screw to the recommended torque, 7 lb.ft (10 Nm).
Failure to install the retaining screw can cause the tailgate to detach.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Accessing the Tailgate Step
Integrated Tailgate Step
1.
Lower the tailgate.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. To lock the handle in place, rotate the handle up from the horizontal to the vertical position until you hear a click.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab handle molding if it appears as worn or damaged.
98
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with sufficient lighting.
• Make sure you use the grab handle when climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load below the total maximum load of 350 lb (159 kg).
Stowing the Tailgate Step
1.
Press the yellow button on the handle to lower and then press the yellow lever at the bottom of the handle to unlock. Rotate the handle down from the vertical to the horizontal position and push it into the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal, then push it back into the tailgate until the step is secure.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the step before moving your vehicle. Do not drive with the step or grab handle open.
Note: The power tailgate cannot close if the step is opened. A warning message appears and a chime sounds. After stowing step the power close function is restored.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Bed Extender Precautions
Note: Do not use the bed extender when driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the tailgate mode when you are not using it for restraining cargo. Always keep the bed extender in the grocery mode or the stowed position with the tailgate closed.
Using the Bed Extender
E311521
1.
Pull the locking pin toward the center of your vehicle.
99
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
3
A
20
A
B
A
1 2
E311522
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E311524
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels.
E311523
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat steps 1-3 on the other side of your vehicle.
E311520
5. Insert the latch rod into the tailgate hole.
6. Engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box.
100
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
Grocery Mode
E308677
C
D
A
B
E
F
Tablet stand.
Tool inset.
Clamp pocket.
Standard and metric ruler.
Cup holder.
Tailgate anchors.
E311519
1.
Follow steps 1-4.
2. Before engaging the locking pins, rotate the panels away from the tailgate.
3. Engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box.
4. Close the tailgate.
TAILGATE WORK SURFACE
(IF
EQUIPPED)
The tailgate work surface is a durable and functional surface on the inside portion of your tailgate you can use to perform various tasks.
To use the tailgate work surface, fold down the tailgate.
E336605
The tailgate work surface contains clamp pockets that allows you to secure work material.
Note: When you have finished using the tailgate work surface, make sure you remove all of your belongings, then close the tailgate.
101
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
TAILGATE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tailgate – Warning Lamps
Illuminates when the tailgate is not completely closed.
E311338
Tailgate – Information Messages
Message
Tailgate Ajar
Power Tailgate System
Fault Service Now
Power Tailgate Stow
Step
Action
The tailgate is not completely closed.
Reminder to check if tailgate is closed securely. If message persists contact an authorized dealer.
You need to stow the tailgate step before the power tailgate can close.
102
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Power Tailgate
Tailgate – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why won't my power tailgate open?
Make sure the transmission is in park
(P), ensure nothing is obstructing the tailgate path and or causing resistance
(tonneau cover or other aftermarket accessory, freezing conditions or being parked downhill). If you have continued issues, the battery voltage may be low or other system issues.
See an authorized dealer.
Why won't my power tailgate close?
Your vehicle speed is at or above
2.5 mph (4 km/h), the tailgate encountered an obstacle or freezing conditions. After removing the obstacles, manually close the tailgate to resume normal operation. If you have continued issues, the battery voltage may be low or other system issues. See an authorized dealer.
103
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
OPENING THE TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate From Inside
Your Vehicle
The vehicle must be in park (P) to operate the power tailgate.
Press the button on the instrument panel.
E308661
Note: A tone sounds while the tailgate opens.
Opening the Tailgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
1.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or power door unlock control.
Note: If an intelligent access transmitter is within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the tailgate unlocks when you press the tailgate release button.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING
THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does not have power door locks.
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the tailgate handle.
Opening the Tailgate Using the
Remote Control
Press the remote control button twice within three seconds.
E191530
E189556
1.
Unlatch the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the power door locks in-line connector. It is under the pickup box on the right-hand side of the vehicle near the spare tire.
3. Install a protective cap on the in-line connector portion that remains under the pickup box.
Note: A protective cap should be in the glove compartment.
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully feed the tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup box and the bumper and place it out of the way under the pickup box.
5. Lower the tailgate.
104
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
E311529
6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw. Disconnect the cable.
7.
Disconnect the other cable.
Note: To avoid damaging the tailgate, you may need assistance when removing. The tailgate weighs approximately 97 lb (44 kg).
8. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from the horizontal position.
9. Lift the right-hand side off its hinge.
10.
Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from the horizontal position.
11.
Remove the tailgate from the left-hand side hinge by sliding it to the right.
12.
Install the tailgate in reverse order.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Accessing the Tailgate Step
Integrated Tailgate Step
1.
Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the step molding. The step pops out slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. To lock the handle in place, rotate the handle up from the horizontal to the vertical position until you hear a click.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab handle molding if it appears as worn or damaged.
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with sufficient lighting.
105
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
• Make sure you use the grab handle when climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load below the total maximum load of 350 lb (159 kg).
Stowing the Tailgate Step
1.
Press the yellow button on the handle to lower and then press the yellow lever at the bottom of the handle to unlock. Rotate the handle down from the vertical to the horizontal position and push it into the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal, then push it back into the tailgate until the step is secure.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the step before moving your vehicle. Do not drive with the step or grab handle open.
Note: The power tailgate cannot close if the step is opened. A warning message appears and a chime sounds. After stowing step the power close function is restored.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Bed Extender Precautions
Note: Do not use the bed extender when driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the tailgate mode when you are not using it for restraining cargo. Always keep the bed extender in the grocery mode or the stowed position with the tailgate closed.
Using the Bed Extender
E311521
1.
Pull the locking pin toward the center of your vehicle.
106
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
3
A
20
A
B
A
1 2
E311522
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E311524
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels.
E311523
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat steps 1-3 on the other side of your vehicle.
E311520
5. Insert the latch rod into the tailgate hole.
6. Engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box.
107
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
Grocery Mode
To use the tailgate work surface, fold down the tailgate.
E308677
E
F
C
D
A
B
Tablet stand.
Tool inset.
Clamp pocket.
Standard and metric ruler.
Cup holder.
Tailgate anchors.
E311519
1.
Follow steps 1-4.
2. Before engaging the locking pins, rotate the panels away from the tailgate.
3. Engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box.
4. Close the tailgate.
TAILGATE WORK SURFACE
(IF
EQUIPPED)
The tailgate work surface is a durable and functional surface on the inside portion of your tailgate you can use to perform various tasks.
E336605
The tailgate work surface contains clamp pockets that allows you to secure work material.
Note: When you have finished using the tailgate work surface, make sure you remove all of your belongings, then close the tailgate.
108
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
TAILGATE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Tailgate – Information Messages
Message
Check Tailgate Ajar
Power Tailgate System
Fault Service Now
Action
Reminder to check the tailgate due to it recently being opened from the remote control or the button on the instrument panel while the vehicle is On and the transmission is not in park.
Reminder to check if tailgate is closed securely. If message persists contact an authorized dealer.
109
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tailgate - Vehicles With: Remote Release Tailgate
Tailgate – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why won't my tailgate open?
Make sure the transmission is in park
(P), ensure nothing is obstructing the tailgate path and or causing resistance
(tonneau cover or other aftermarket accessories, freezing conditions or being parked downhill). If you have continued issues, the battery voltage may be low or other system issues.
See an authorized dealer.
110
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
What Is the Passive Anti-Theft
System
The passive anti-theft system prevents someone from starting the vehicle with an incorrectly coded key.
How Does the Passive Anti-Theft
System Work
The passive anti-theft system arms when you switch the ignition off.
It disarms when the ignition is switched on with a correctly coded key.
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take the keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
What Is the Anti-Theft Alarm
System
The Anti-Theft Alarm System warns you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
How Does the Anti-Theft Alarm
System Work
When armed, the anti-theft alarm is triggered in any of the following ways:
• If someone opens a door, the tailgate or the hood without a correctly coded key or remote control.
• If you turn the power on without a correctly coded key.
• If the interior sensors detect movement inside your vehicle.
• If the inclination sensors detect an attempt to raise your vehicle.
• If someone disconnects the vehicle battery or the battery backup alarm.
•
If someone disconnects the trailer. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
Any further attempts to carry out one of the above sounds the alarm again.
If the anti-theft alarm is triggered, the alarm horn sounds for 30 seconds and the direction indicators flash for five minutes.
What Is the Perimeter Alarm
The perimeter alarm is designed to detect unauthorized access to your vehicle.
What Are the Interior Sensors
(If
Equipped)
The interior sensors are designed to detect any movement inside your vehicle.
The interior sensors are in the overhead console.
Note: Do not cover the interior sensors.
What Are the Inclination Sensors
(If Equipped)
The inclination sensor is designed to detect an attempt to raise your vehicle, for example to remove a wheel or to tow it away.
What Is the Battery Backup Alarm
The battery backup alarm is an additional alarm system that has its own battery and horn. It is designed to detect if the vehicle battery or the battery backup alarm is disconnected.
111
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
Arming the Anti-Theft Alarm
System
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in your vehicle.
Lock your vehicle with your remote control to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Anti-Theft Alarm
System
Disarm the alarm by performing any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM
SETTINGS (If Equipped)
What are the Alarm Security Levels
You can select two levels of alarm security, all sensors and perimeter sensing.
All Sensors
All sensors is the standard setting.
In all sensors, all equipped sensors are on when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not arm the alarm with all sensors if passengers, animals or other moving objects are inside your vehicle.
Perimeter Sensing
In perimeter sensing, the interior sensors are off when you arm the alarm.
All the other equipped sensors activate when you arm the alarm in this mode.
Setting the Alarm Security Level
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Alarm System .
4. Press Motion Sensors .
5. Press a setting.
What Is Ask on Exit
You can choose which level of security you require after you switch the ignition off.
Note: If you do not choose a setting, the system defaults to all sensors.
Switching Ask on Exit On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Alarm System .
4. Switch Ask on Exit on or off.
112
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
SECURITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Security – Information Messages
Message
No Key Detected
Starting System Fault
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Alarm Announcement
Action
The system has not detected a correctly coded key.
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry.
113
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
Security – Frequently Asked
Questions
What should I do if there is any potential alarm problem with my vehicle?
Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
What should I do if the vehicle is unable to start with a correctly coded key?
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
114
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Running Boards
(If Equipped)
POWER RUNNING BOARD
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Make sure that the running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before attempting to step on them. The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Switch off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under your vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended running board and your vehicle. A moving running board may cause injury.
Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies, running board motors, or the running board underbody mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Use proper jacking points.
The running boards could move slower in cold temperatures.
POWER RUNNING BOARD
SETTINGS
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Running Boards .
3. Press a setting.
Running Boards (Modes)
Off
The power running boards remain stowed, regardless of door position.
Auto
The power running boards deploy when you approach your vehicle with a remote control, unlock the door or open the door.
The power running boards stow:
• After a few seconds when you close the doors.
• If you unlock the door but do not open it.
• If you have switched Approach detection on and do not open a door before the Auto Timer setting expires.
Note: When you select this mode, an option displays that allows you to select how long the running boards stay deployed without opening the door.
Out
The power running boards remain deployed, regardless of door position.
Approach detection
When you switch Approach detection on with Auto switched on, the running boards deploy when you approach your vehicle with a remote control.
POWER RUNNING BOARD
KICK SWITCH
You can use the power running board kick switch to deploy and stow the running board without opening or closing the door.
115
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Running Boards
(If Equipped)
E334917
Press the switch with your foot to use the power running board kick switch.
Pressing the kick switch with the power running boards stowed switches the mode to Out .
Pressing the kick switch with the power running boards deployed switches the mode to Auto .
Note: When you use the kick switch, the power running board mode changes until you press the kick switch again.
You can change the kick switch setting on
the touchscreen. See Power Running
Kick switch
Always active
The kick switch is on regardless of whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
Only while unlocked
The kick switch is on only with the doors unlocked.
DEPLOYING AND STOWING
THE POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
The power running boards deploy when you approach your vehicle with a remote control, unlock the door or open the door.
The power running boards stow:
• After a few seconds when you close the doors.
• If you unlock the door but do not open it.
• If you have switched Approach detection on and do not open a door before the Auto Timer setting expires.
See Power Running Board Settings
Note: The power running boards reverse direction and move to the end of travel if they encounter an object when moving.
POWER RUNNING BOARDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Power Running Boards –
Frequently Asked Questions
Why is there unwanted noise coming from my power running boards?
The power running board mechanism could trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. If this happens, set the running boards to the deployed position. Then, wash the system, in particular the front and rear hinge arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
116
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
E261502
1.
Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
E261582
Press the top or bottom of the control to move the steering wheel up or down.
Press the front or rear of the control to move the steering wheel in or out.
You can save and recall the steering wheel
position with the memory function. See
Recalling a Preset Position (page 181).
117
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
RESETTING THE STOPPING
POSITION - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Note: The steering wheel stops when it detects an obstruction. This sets a new stopping position.
To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:
1.
Confirm there is nothing obstructing the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column control until the steering column stops moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
Note: The steering column may start to move again.
4. When the steering column stops, continue holding the control for a few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction, as necessary.
HORN
E270945
Press on the center of the steering wheel near the horn icon to activate the horn.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF
To activate the heated steering wheel, press the button on the climate control unit.
On some vehicles, an indicator on the button illuminates when the heated steering wheel is on.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature of the steering wheel.
118
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adjustable Pedals
(If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Do not use the pedal adjustment controls when the vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Your control is on the left-hand side of the steering column or on the instrument panel.
E176213
A.
B.
Farther away from you.
Closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
119
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
WIPERS
Wiper Precautions
Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This could scratch the glass or damage the wiper blades. Use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on.
Switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash.
Switching Windshield Wipers On and Off
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
What Are Autowipers
Autowipers turns on and controls the speed and frequency of the windshield wipers.
Autowipers Settings
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Wipers .
4. Switch Rain Sensing on or off.
Note: When you switch the feature off, the wipers do not operate based on the rain sensor. When you switch on the windshield wipers to the intermittent wipe position with the feature off, the wipers use the wipe speed set by the rotary control.
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the
Rain Sensor
E327739
A
B
C
High-speed wipe.
Intermittent wipe.
Off.
Use the rotary control.
E270969
120
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E311292
A
B
Low sensitivity.
High sensitivity.
Use the rotary control to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Wipers and Washers
When you select low sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield.
When you select high sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
Improving Your Windshield Wiper
Performance
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the wiper arm.
2
E327597
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness.
REPLACING THE FRONT
WIPER BLADES
E327598
3. Press the wiper blade secondary locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place.
E165804
1.
Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass.
121
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
WASHERS
Washer Precautions
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This could cause the washer pump to overheat.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.
Using the Windshield Washer
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off
Courtesy Wipe
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Wipers .
4. Switch Courtesy Wipe on or off.
Adding Washer Fluid
E311291
E270967
Press and hold the button at the end of the lever to operate the windshield washer.
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time after the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid when switched on. See
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off
E328222
Washer Fluid Specification
See Washer Fluid Specification (page
WIPERS AND WASHERS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Wipers and Washers – Warning
Lamps
Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low.
E132353
122
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why are there streaks and smears on the windshield?
The wiper blades could be dirty, worn
or damaged. Check the wiper blades.
(page 121). If the wiper blades are dirty,
clean them with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. If the wiper blades are worn or damaged,
install new ones. See Replacing the
Front Wiper Blades (page 121).
123
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CONTROL
Headlamp Indicators
Lamps On
Illuminates when you switch the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps on.
Headlamp High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the high beam headlamps on.
E327629
A
B
C
D
Lamps off.
Parking lamps on.
Autolamps on.
Headlamps on.
Rotate the control to make a selection.
Note: The lighting control defaults to autolamps every time you switch your vehicle on.
HEADLAMPS
Using the High Beam Headlamps
E327570
Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off.
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps.
HEADLAMPS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Headlamps – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why is there condensation in the headlamps?
Headlamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold.
When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation.
How much condensation is acceptable?
The presence of a fine mist, for example no streaks, drip marks or large droplets. A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
124
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
How long may it take for the acceptable condensation to be cleared?
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.
How much condensation is unacceptable?
A water puddle inside the lamp.
Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens.
What should I do if unacceptable condensation is present?
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Why do my headlamps turn off when I have them switched on when I switch my vehicle off?
The battery saver turns the headlamps off after a short period of time after you switch your vehicle off.
AUTOLAMPS
What Are Autolamps
Autolamp
WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low light situations or when the windshield wipers operate.
Autolamp Settings
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Lighting .
4. Press Autolamp Delay .
5. Press a setting.
EXTERIOR LAMPS
Switching the Turn Signal Lamps
On and Off
Intelligent Three Blink Turn Signal
E311431
Push the lever up or down to switch the turn signal lamps on.
Set the lever to the middle position to switch the turn signal lamps off.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the turn signal lamps flash three times.
How Do Cornering Lamps Work
(If
Equipped)
The cornering lamps illuminate the inside of a corner when you are turning the steering wheel.
125
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
4. Switch Daytime Running Lights on or off.
The daytime running lamps turn on when all of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or you release the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions.
• The lighting control is in the autolamps position.
• The headlamps are off.
Note: Other lighting control positions do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
Switching the Daytime Running
Lamps On and Off - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
E327599
A
B
Headlamp beam.
Cornering lamp beam.
Switching the Daytime Running
Lamps On and Off - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash.
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Lighting .
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash.
Daytime running lamps are always on unless you switch on the headlamps or your vehicle is in park (P).
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On and Off
(If Equipped)
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting control.
Press the button to switch the front fog lamps on or off.
Note: Only switch the front fog lamps on during reduced visibility.
126
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
Note: The brightness of the daytime running lamps may decrease when the front fog lamps are switched on.
Note: When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, you cannot switch the fog lamps on unless the headlamps are on.
Switching the Cargo Lamps On
(If
Equipped)
Press the button in the lighting control or in the rear cargo box.
E189587
Switching the Spot Lamps On and
Off
(If Equipped)
The spot lamp buttons are near the lighting control.
E340436
Press the button to switch on the left-hand spot lamp.
E340437
Press the button to switch on the right-hand spot lamp.
Move the position of the exterior mirrors to adjust the aim.
Note: The lighting control must be set to the parking lamp position.
Note: The spot lamps illuminate the area in front of and to the side of your vehicle.
Exterior Lamp Indicators
Front Fog Lamp
It illuminates when you switch the front fog lamps on.
Turn Signal Lamp
It flashes when you switch the turn signal lamps on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing warns of a failed turn signal lamp bulb.
Exterior Lamp Audible Warning
Exterior Lamps On
Sounds when you open the driver door and the exterior lamps are on.
EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING (If
Equipped)
What Is Exterior Zone Lighting
Exterior zone lighting divides the exterior lighting into zones and allows you to switch them on and off to provide lighting around the perimeter of your vehicle.
Using the Exterior Zone Lighting
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Zone Lighting .
E339129
A
B
C
On and off button.
Settings menu.
Exterior lamp indicators.
127
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
D
E
Individual zones on and off.
All zones on and off.
You can use zone lighting when your vehicle is on or off. When it is off, the lighting turns off after a certain period of time.
You can also use individual zone controls to switch on each zone.
Note: Make sure to remove exterior lighting covers when using zone lighting.
Note: When your vehicle is off and the timer has one minute remaining, the direction indicators flash six times.
Note: Indicators on the touchscreen illuminate when the lights outside of the zone lighting control are on.
Note: You can remotely control the zone lighting using the FordPass app.
Note: Vehicles without spot lamps only have two zones.
Exterior Zone Lighting Settings
When you access zone lighting for the first time, you can choose to allow zone lighting to override the autolamps when zone lighting is on.
You can change this setting at any time in the zone lighting settings menu.
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Zone Lighting .
3. Press the settings menu in the upper right-hand corner.
4. Press a setting.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
How Does Automatic High Beam
Control Work
Automatic high beam control turns the high beams on if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system turns the high beams off.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to turn the high beams on and off.
128
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
E327596
A
B
Without automatic high beam control.
With automatic high beam control.
Automatic High Beam Control
Precautions
WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: You may need to override the system when approaching other road users.
WARNING: You may need to override the system during inclement weather.
Automatic High Beam Control
Requirements
The system turns the high beams on if all of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough that you require high beams.
• There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
Automatic High Beam Control
Limitations
The system turns the high beams off if any of the following occur:
• You switch the system off.
• You set the lighting control to any position except autolamps.
• The ambient light level is high enough that you do not require high beams.
• The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or rear lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or fog.
• The system detects street lighting.
129
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
• The camera has reduced visibility.
• The vehicle speed falls below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
Switching Automatic High Beam
Control On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Lighting .
4. Switch Auto Highbeam on or off.
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators
Illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist.
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch the high beams on.
Push the lever away from you again to switch the high beams off.
Push the lever away from you for a third time to switch automatic high beam control back on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING (If
Equipped)
Automatic High Beam Control – Information Messages
Message
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required
Description
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
130
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
GLARE FREE LIGHTING (If
Equipped)
How Does Glare Free Lighting Work
Glare free lighting enhances visibility and minimizes glare for other road users.
E220921
A
B
Without glare free lighting.
With glare free lighting.
Glare Free Lighting Precautions
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not adapt the lighting to avoid glare if the lights of oncoming vehicles are hidden by obstacles such as guard rails.
WARNING: You may need to override the system when approaching other road users.
WARNING: You may need to override the system during inclement weather.
WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
Glare Free Lighting Requirements
The system turns on if all of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• Your vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
131
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
The system adapts the lighting to avoid glare if all of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the autolamps position.
• The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or rear lamps.
Glare Free Lighting Limitations
The system turns off if any of the following occur:
• You switch the system off.
• You set the lighting control to any position except autolamps.
• The ambient light level is high enough.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or fog.
• The system detects street lighting.
• The camera has reduced visibility.
• The vehicle speed falls below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on curves.
Switching Glare Free Lighting On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Lighting .
4. Switch Glarefree Lighting on or off.
Glare Free Lighting Indicators
Illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist.
Overriding Glare Free Lighting
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch the high beams on.
Push the lever away from you again to switch the high beams off.
Push the lever away from you for a third time to switch glare free lighting back on.
132
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Lighting
GLARE FREE LIGHTING – TROUBLESHOOTING (If Equipped)
Glare Free Lighting – Information Messages
Message
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required
Description
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
(If Equipped)
How Does Adaptive Front Lighting
Work
Adaptive front lighting adapts when you are steering around a curve or if the camera detects lane markings indicating a curve.
A
B
133
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E161714
A
B
Without adaptive front lighting.
With adaptive front lighting.
Exterior Lighting
Switching Adaptive Front Lighting
On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Lighting .
4. Switch Adaptive Headlamps on or off.
Set the lighting control to the autolamps position to use the adaptive front lighting.
134
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Lighting
SWITCHING ALL OF THE
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
The lamps turn on under the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a button on the remote control.
• You press the all lamps on button on the overhead console.
Press to switch all interior lamps on or off.
SWITCHING THE REAR
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
SWITCHING THE FRONT
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
E339273
The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the overhead console depends on your vehicle.
Individual Map Lamps
Press to switch the left-hand individual dome lamp on and off.
E262193
Press to switch the right-hand individual dome lamp on and off.
E281231
The rear interior lamps may be above the rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or off.
Note: If you switch the rear lamps on through the overhead console, you cannot switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION
What Is the Interior Lamp Function
The interior lamp function switches the courtesy and door lamps on or off.
Switching the Interior Lamp
Function On and Off
Press to switch the interior lamp function on and off.
Note: The indicator lamp illuminates amber when the door function is off.
135
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Lighting
ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL LIGHTING
BRIGHTNESS
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons are on the lighting control.
Repeatedly press one of the buttons to adjust the brightness.
E291299
E296433
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If
Equipped)
Switching Ambient Lighting On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Ambient Light .
4. Switch Ambient Light on or off.
Adjusting Ambient Lighting
Drag the slider left or right.
136
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
WINDOWS
One-Touch Power Windows -
Troubleshooting
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, verify they are free of obstruction and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press the window control switch to open the window. Lift the window control switch to close the window.
Note: The power windows operate with the ignition on, and for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open a front door.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when one window is open, slightly open the opposite window.
One-Touch Open
Fully press the window control switch and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Close
Fully lift the window control switch and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Close
Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence.
1.
Close the window.
2. Press and hold the window control switch until the window is fully open.
Keep the window control switch pressed for a few seconds.
3. Lift and hold the window control switch until the window is fully closed. Keep the window control switch held for a few seconds.
4. Press and hold the window control switch until the window is fully open.
Keep the window control switch pressed for a few seconds.
5. Lift and hold the window control switch until the window is fully closed. Keep the window control switch held for a few seconds.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window does not close when you use one-touch.
WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK
What Is Window Bounce-Back
The window stops and reverses if it detects an obstruction when closing.
Overriding Window Bounce-Back
WARNING: If you override bounce-back, the window does not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
1.
Close the window until it reaches the point of resistance and let it reverse.
2. Lift the window control switch within two seconds to override bounce-back and close the window. Bounce-back is now disabled and you can close the window manually.
137
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows
Note: The window goes past the point of resistance and you can fully close it.
Note: If the window does not close, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
LOCKING THE REAR WINDOW
CONTROLS
(IF EQUIPPED)
Press the window control switch to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SLIDING WINDOWS
(IF EQUIPPED)
Press and hold the window control switch to open the window. Pull and hold the window control switch to close the window.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, verify they are free of obstruction and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
E311430
The window control switch is on the overhead console.
138
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Mirror
INTERIOR MIRROR
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
MANUALLY DIMMING THE
INTERIOR MIRROR
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR
MIRROR (If Equipped)
What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior
Mirror
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. It returns to normal when the bright light from behind is no longer present or if you shift into reverse (R).
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Limitations
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint could prevent light from reaching the sensor.
139
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Mirrors
ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E311081
A
B
C
D
E
Power fold.
Window lock.
Adjustment control.
Right-hand mirror.
Left-hand mirror.
To adjust the mirrors, switch your vehicle on, with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running:
1.
Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control light turns on.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The control light turns off.
FOLDING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL FOLDING MIRRORS
Push the mirror toward the door window glass.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
FOLDING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors fold when you lock your vehicle and unfold when you unlock your vehicle.
For tight parking conditions, press the control to fold the mirrors.
Press the control switch again to unfold the mirrors.
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway through their movement. Wait until the mirrors stop moving and press the control again.
The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move at different rates. For example, one mirror may stop while the other one continues to move. This is normal.
If you press the control switch to fold in the mirrors with auto-fold on, the mirrors do not unfold when you unlock your vehicle.
Note: The power folding mirrors operate with the ignition on, and for several minutes after you switch the ignition off.
Note: If you fold and unfold the mirrors several times within one minute, the power fold function may turn off to protect the motors from overheating.
140
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Exterior Mirrors
Switching Auto-fold On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Mirrors .
4. Switch Autofold on or off.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually folded, they may not work properly even after you re-position them. You need to reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position.
To reset the mirrors perform the following steps:
1.
By hand, fold or retract both mirrors.
2. Using the power folding/power telescoping mirror control switch, operate the mirrors until you hear an audible click.
3. Operate the power folding or power telescoping mirrors an additional 3 to
4 times to synchronize the mirrors.
EXTENDING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
This optional feature lets you extend the mirror about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when towing a trailer. You can manually pull out or push in the mirrors to various positions.
Power Telescoping Mirrors
(If
Equipped)
This feature lets you position both mirrors at the same time.
E218902
A. Extend.
B. Retract.
To adjust your mirrors, make sure you switch your vehicle on, with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running.
1.
Press and release the control switch.
2. Press the adjustment control to position the mirrors.
3. Press the left arrow to extend the mirrors out. Press the right arrow to retract the mirrors in.
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors when holding the control down during full travel, could disable the system to protect the motors from overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for function to return to normal.
AUTO-DIMMING EXTERIOR
MIRROR (If Equipped)
What Is the Auto-Dimming Exterior
Mirror
The driver exterior mirror dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
141
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Moonroof
(If Equipped)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUN SHADE
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the sun shades.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
The controls are on the overhead console.
Opening the Sun Shade
Press and release the switch to
E312249 press the switch a second time. The sun shade also opens when you open the moonroof.
activate the one-touch open feature. To stop movement,
Note: The sun shade stops short of its fully opened position for the comfort of rear passengers. To fully open the sun shade, press the switch again.
Closing the Sun Shade
Press and release the switch to activate the one-touch close
E312250 feature. To stop movement, press the switch a second time.
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, verify that it is free of obstruction and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening.
The controls are on the overhead console.
Opening the Moonroof
Press and release the switch to
E312251 activate the one-touch open feature. To stop movement, press the switch a second time.
Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully opened position to reduce wind noise or rumbling that may happen with the moonroof fully open.
Press and release the switch again to fully open the moonroof.
Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the switch to activate the one-touch close
E312252 feature, from either the open or vent positions. To stop movement, press the switch a second time.
VENTING THE MOONROOF
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
MOONROOF
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the moonroof. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the moonroof. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
The moonroof controls are on the overhead console.
142
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Moonroof
(If Equipped)
With the moonroof in the closed
E312252 position, press and release the switch to vent the moonroof. To close the moonroof from the vent position, press and release the switch again.
MOONROOF BOUNCE-BACK
What Is Moonroof Bounce-Back
The moonroof stops and reverses some distance if it detects an obstacle when closing.
Overriding Moonroof Bounce-Back
Press and hold the close button within two seconds after the moonroof comes to a stop.
143
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW - VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH
SCREEN
E219638
F
G
D
E
A
B
C
Engine oil pressure gauge.
Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Fuel gauge.
Transmission fluid temperature gauge.
Speedometer.
Information display.
Tachometer.
144
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW - VEHICLES WITH: 8 INCH
SCREEN
E311317
F
G
D
E
H
A
B
C
I
Tachometer.
Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Configurable gauges.
Compass.
Fuel gauge.
Ambient temperature.
Speedometer.
Distance to empty.
Odometer.
145
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW - VEHICLES WITH: 12.3 INCH
SCREEN
E310245
G
H
E
F
C
D
A
B
Tachometer.
Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Configurable gauges.
Fuel gauge.
Speedometer.
Odometer.
Compass.
Ambient temperature.
WHAT IS THE TACHOMETER
Shows the engine speed. The red line thickens where the engine speed enters the overspeed limiter.
WHAT IS THE SPEEDOMETER
Displays the vehicle speed.
FUEL GAUGE
What Is the Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank.
146
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Fuel Gauge Limitations
The fuel gauge may not provide an accurate reading when your vehicle is on an incline.
Locating the Fuel Filler Door
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
What Is the Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and sounds when the distance to empty reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 12 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.
What Is Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
WHAT IS THE ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
Indicates the engine coolant temperature.
WHAT IS THE ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE GAUGE
Indicates the engine oil pressure.
Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE TRANSMISSION
FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Indicates the transmission fluid temperature.
Special operating conditions can cause higher than normal operating
temperatures. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE TURBO BOOST
GAUGE
(IF EQUIPPED)
Indicates the amount of manifold air pressure in the engine.
Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE DIESEL
EXHAUST FLUID GAUGE
(IF
EQUIPPED)
Indicates the current diesel exhaust fluid level.
WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER WARNING LAMPS
Warning lamps alert you to a vehicle condition that could become serious.
Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information.
147
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
WARNING LAMPS
Anti-Lock Brake System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle continues to have normal braking without the anti-lock brake system function. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Battery
It illuminates when you switch the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine is running, this indicates your vehicle requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Brake System
It illuminates when you apply the parking brake and the ignition is
E270480 on. If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, make sure the parking brake is released. If the parking brake is released, this indicates low brake fluid level or the brake system requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: Indicators may vary depending on region.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Illuminates when the diesel exhaust fluid is low,
E163176 contaminated or the system
requires service. See What Is the
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Door Ajar
It illuminates when you switch the ignition on and remains on if any door is open.
Electric Parking Brake
E146190
It illuminates or flashes when the electric parking brake requires service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
If it illuminates, safely stop your vehicle and switch the vehicle off.
Fasten Seatbelt
It illuminates and a tone sounds until you fasten the seatbelts.
E71880
Hood Ajar
E296055
It illuminates when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level is low.
Low Tire Pressure
It illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If illuminated, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. If it begins to flash at anytime, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Low Washer Fluid Level
It illuminates when the washer fluid is low.
E132353
148
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Oil Pressure
It illuminates when the engine oil pressure is low.
Powertrain Malfunction, Reduced
Power, Electronic Throttle Control,
Check 4X4
Illuminates when the powertrain or four-wheel drive require service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
It illuminates when the ignition is on and the engine is off, this is normal. If it illuminates when the engine is on this indicates the emission control system requires service. If it flashes,
have your vehicle checked immediately.
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Stop Safely
Illuminates if an electrical component requires service or a
E332963 failure that causes your vehicle to shutdown or enter into a limited operating mode.
Tailgate Ajar
E311338
It illuminates when the ignition is on and the tailgate is not completely closed.
Water in Fuel
It illuminates when the fuel and water separator has a significant quantity of water in it and requires immediate draining.
WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER INDICATORS
Indicators notify you of various features that are active on your vehicle.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INDICATORS
Active Drive Assist
E297977
Adaptive Cruise Control
E144524
Automatic High Beam
Control Indicators (page 130).
Automatic Regen Control Off
E252868
Auto Hold Active
E323448
Auto Hold Unavailable
E323449
Auto-Start-Stop
149
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Blind Spot Monitor
E151262
Cruise Control
See Cruise Control (page 313).
E332905
Electronic Locking Differential
E325779
Four-Wheel Drive
E181778
E181781
E181780
Hill Descent
See Hill Descent Control (page
E163171
Lamps On
Ready to Drive
E224090
Reverse Brake Assist
E293490
Stability Control and Traction
Control
E138639
E181779
Note: Some indicators appear different depending on vehicle options.
Front Airbag
E67017
Front Fog Lamp
High Beam
E130458
Turn Signal Lamps
Tow Haul
See Towing a Trailer (page 375).
E246592
Wait to Start
150
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
USING THE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER DISPLAY CONTROLS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Menu Button
Press to display the submenus.
Scroll Buttons
Press the up or down buttons to scroll through the menu items.
Status Indicator
Menu items with a check box
E204495 indicates a feature's status. A check in the box indicates the feature is on, and unchecked indicates the feature is off.
E309379
A
B
C
Back button.
OK button.
Menu button.
Back Button
Press to go back or to exit a menu.
OK Button
Press to make a selection.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU -
VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH
SCREEN
Depending on your vehicle options, some menu items can appear different or not at all.
Note: For your safety, some features are speed-dependent and could be unavailable when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
Select Screens
Truck Info
Towing
Settings
151
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU -
VEHICLES WITH: 8 INCH
SCREEN
Depending on your vehicle options, some menu items can appear different or not at all.
Note: For your safety, some features are speed-dependent and could be unavailable when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Navigation
Phone
Audio
Settings
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU -
VEHICLES WITH: 12.3 INCH
SCREEN
Depending on your vehicle options, some menu items can appear different or not at all.
Note: For your safety, some features are speed-dependent and could be unavailable when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Navigation
Phone
Audio
Settings
TRIP COMPUTER - VEHICLES
WITH: 4.2 INCH SCREEN
Accessing the Trip Computer
Using Select Screens
1.
Select Select Screens .
2. Use the controls on the steering wheel
Customizing the Instrument Cluster
Using the Home Screen
Once screens have been added, use the controls on the steering wheel to view each trip screen.
Resetting the Trip Computer
1.
Use the controls on the steering wheel to navigate the home screen.
2. Select Trip 1 or Trip 2 .
3. Press and hold the OK button for a few seconds.
Note: This Trip resets every time you start your vehicle.
152
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
TRIP COMPUTER - VEHICLES
WITH: 8 INCH SCREEN/12.3
INCH SCREEN
Accessing the Trip Computer
1.
Select Trip/Fuel .
2. Select This Trip , Trip 1 or Trip 2 .
Resetting the Trip Computer
1.
Select Trip/Fuel .
2. Select Trip 1 or Trip 2 .
3. Press and hold the OK button for a few seconds.
Note: This Trip resets every time you start your vehicle.
CUSTOMIZING THE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Adding Screens Using MyView
1.
Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select MyView .
2. Select Configure MyView .
3. Select a screen.
4. Press the OK button.
Note: The number of screens you can add is limited. If the selected screen does not appear you must deselect screens from the
MyView menu.
Adding Screens Using Select
Screens
1.
Select Select Screens .
2. Use the controls on the steering wheel to highlight a screen to add.
3. Press the OK button.
Note: The number of screens you can add is limited. If the selected screen does not appear you must deselect screens from the
Select Screens menu.
Configuring Gauges
1.
Select Settings .
2. Select Configure Gauges .
3. Select to swap or change left-hand side and right-hand side gauges.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Changing the Measure Unit
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General .
3. Press Measure Units .
4. Select a measurement unit.
Changing the Temperature Unit
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General .
3. Press Temperature Units .
4. Select Fahrenheit or Celsius .
Changing the Tire Pressure Unit
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General .
3. Press Tire Pressure Units .
4. Select a pressure unit.
153
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster Display
HYBRID DISPLAY
INFORMATION
What Is EV Coach
EV coach helps you get the most of your vehicle's electrical driving and regenerative braking capabilities.
How Does EV Coach Work
When accelerating or maintaining speed, a blue or white solid bar displays. This indicates vehicle power. A blue rectangular box could also display that shows the power level that the engine turns on at.
When the power level displays in the rectangular box, it is blue which indicates you are in electric only operation.
When the power level displays outside of the rectangular box, it is white which indicates you are in hybrid operation.
When you are decelerating, either releasing the accelerator pedal or applying the brake, you see a green or white solid bar which indicates the power being used to slow your vehicle down. A green rectangular box could also display that shows the amount of power that can be recaptured by the regenerative braking system and returned to the high voltage battery.
When the power level displays in the rectangular box, it is green which indicates that the regenerative braking system is being used to slow down your vehicle and return the maximum amount of energy to the high voltage battery.
When the power level displays outside of the rectangular box, it is white which indicates both regenerative and conventional braking systems are in use.
WHAT IS BRAKE COACH
The brake coach appears after the vehicle has come to a stop. It coaches you to brake in a manner that maximizes the amount of energy returned through the regenerative braking system.
The percent displayed is an indication of the regenerative braking efficiency with
100% representing the maximum amount of energy recovery. You can switch brake coach on or off in the settings menu on your touchscreen.
WHAT IS THE TRIP SUMMARY
Displays the trip summary when you switch off your vehicle. The values are cumulative since you last started your vehicle.
154
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS REMOTE START
The system allows you to remotely start your vehicle and to adjust the interior temperature according to the settings that you chose.
REMOTE START
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS
Remote start does not work under the following conditions:
• The alarm horn is sounding.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The ignition is on.
• The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low.
Note: You can use remote start with
FordPass. See Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network (page 565).
ENABLING REMOTE START
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Remote Start Setup .
4. Switch Remote Start on or off.
Note: To remote start with FordPass, make
sure that the modem is enabled. See
Connecting FordPass to the Modem
REMOTELY STARTING AND
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
Remotely Starting the Vehicle
Press the button on the remote control.
E138623
Within three seconds, press the button on the remote control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the button again.
Note: You can also use FordPass to start the vehicle.
Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice.
Note: The parking lamps turn on when the vehicle is running.
Note: The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: All other vehicle systems remain off when you have remotely started the vehicle.
Note: The vehicle remains secured when you have remotely started the vehicle. A valid key must be inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle.
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle
Within three seconds, press the button on the remote control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the button again.
155
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start
(If Equipped)
EXTENDING THE REMOTE
START DURATION
To extend the remote start duration during remote start, do the following:
Press the button on the remote control.
E138623
Within three seconds, press the button on the remote control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the button again.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the duration extends by another 15 minutes.
This provides a total of 30 minutes.
Note: Remote start can only be extended once.
Note: A maximum of two remote starts, or one remote start with an extension, are allowed. To reset the restart procedure switch the vehicle to on, then to off.
REMOTE START REMOTE
CONTROL INDICATORS
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands.
LED
Solid green.
Solid red.
Blinking red.
Blinking green.
Status
Remote start successful.
Remote stop successful.
Request failed or status not received.
Status incomplete.
REMOTE START SETTINGS
Switching Climate Control Auto
Mode On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Remote Start Setup .
3. Press Climate Control .
4. Select Vehicle .
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the system attempts to heat or cool the interior to 72°F (22°C).
Note: When you switch the ignition on, the climate control system returns to the last used settings.
Switching Climate Control Last
Settings On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Remote Start Setup .
4. Switch Last settings on or off.
Note: If you switch the last settings on, the system remembers the last used settings.
Switching the Heated Seat
Settings On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Remote Start Setup .
4. Press Seats .
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the heated seat settings on, the heated seats turn on during cold weather.
156
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start
(If Equipped)
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel Settings On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Remote Start Setup .
4. Press Seats and Steering Wheel .
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the heated steering wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel turns on during cold weather.
Setting the Remote Start Duration
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle Settings .
3. Press Remote Start Setup .
4. Press Duration .
Note: Wait a few seconds before remotely starting the vehicle after the vehicle stops running.
157
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
E339318
Depending on your vehicle options, the controls could look different than what you see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor could continue to operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
Press the button to activate the selection screen.
E265283
Press the button on the touchscreen to switch the windshield air vents on.
E244097
Make sure that the instrument panel air vents are switched off.
Make sure that the footwell air vents are switched off.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate air currently in the passenger compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be prevented from turning on in all air flow modes except maximum cooling to reduce the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off when you direct air to the instrument panel or footwell air vents during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.
158
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling off, air conditioning remains on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
WIPER PARK ON AND OFF
(IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated wiper park also turns on.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
E266187
Press up or down on the control to select the blower motor speed.
E266186
Note: For Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) and
Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) vehicles, the blower motor may run, and you may feel airflow when the climate control is off to provide cooling to the battery.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window turns off after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window as this could cause damage to the heated rear window grid lines not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF
Heated Mirrors
Press the button.
E266189
E244115
Turn the control on the left-hand side of the climate control to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of the climate control to set the right-hand temperature.
159
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button to activate the selection screen.
E265283
Press the button on the touchscreen.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
Press the button to activate the selection screen.
E265283
E244097
Press the button on the touchscreen.
Press the button on the touchscreen.
AUTO MODE
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press the button to switch auto mode on. Repeatedly press the button to adjust auto mode.
Note: When you switch auto mode on, lights on the blower motor control do not illuminate to indicate the blower motor speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air distribution control to switch auto mode off.
Auto Mode Indicators
The indicators are on the Auto Mode button.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
Press the button to activate the selection screen.
E265283
Auto Mode Indicator
Status
One indicator illuminated.
Description
The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
The blower motor speed is moderate.
Two indicators illuminated.
Three indicators illuminated.
The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
160
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
Switching Dual Mode On and Off
Press the button.
E265280
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS
General Hints
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.
• To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
• Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. Automatic mode is best recommended to maintain set temperature.
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the interior to the temperature you select as quickly as possible.
• For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open.
• If you press AUTO during cold outside temperatures, the system directs air flow to the windshield and side window air vents.In addition, the blower motor may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up.
• If you press AUTO during hot temperatures and the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. Blower motor speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1.
Press AUTO .
2. Adjust the temperature function to the setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1.
Press AUTO .
2. Adjust the temperature function to the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Press MAX A/C .
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1.
Press AUTO .
2. Adjust the temperature function to the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1.
Press and release defrost or maximum defrost.
161
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.
162
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E308141
Depending on your vehicle options, the controls could look different than what you see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor could continue to operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
Press the button to switch the windshield air vents on.
E244097
Make sure that the instrument panel air vents are switched off.
Make sure that the footwell air vents are switched off.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate air currently in the passenger compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be prevented from turning on in all air flow modes except maximum cooling to reduce the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off when you direct air to the instrument panel or footwell air vents during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control clockwise past the highest setting to maximize defrosting.
Note: The temperature control springs back to the highest setting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.
Note: When you switch maximum defrost on, the heated windshield turns on.
163
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control counterclockwise past the lowest setting to maximize cooling.
Note: The temperature control springs back to the lowest setting.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling off, air conditioning remains on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window turns off after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window as this could cause damage to the heated rear window grid lines not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF
Heated Mirrors
Press the button.
E266189
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
Note: When you switch the blower motor off, air conditioning turns off and the windows could fog up.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E244106
Turn the temperature control counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings.
Turn the temperature control clockwise for warmer temperature settings.
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
Press the button.
E244097
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to indicate the blower motor speed.
164
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
Press the button.
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS
General Hints
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.
• To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1.
Adjust the blower motor speed to the highest speed setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1.
Adjust the blower motor speed to the center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1.
Press MAX A/C .
2. Drive with the windows open for a short period of time.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1.
Adjust the blower motor speed to the center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings.
3. Direct air to the instrument panel air vents.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1.
Direct air to the instrument panel and windshield air vents.
2. Press and release A/C .
3. Adjust the temperature control to the setting you prefer.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel air vents.
165
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Air Quality
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen and other particles.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 605).
The cabin air filter is behind the glove compartment.
To remove the lower glove compartment and access the filter:
1.
Open the glove compartment.
E311296
2. Press the tab on each side.
3. Fully lower the glove compartment.
4. Pull the glove compartment toward you.
166
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
FRONT SEAT PRECAUTIONS SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat backrest too far as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seatbelt, resulting in personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that your torso is more than 30 degrees from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
167
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Head Restraint Components
E327921
The head restraints consist of:
A
B
C
D
An energy absorbing head restraint.
Two steel stems.
Guide sleeve adjust and release button.
Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If equipped).
Adjusting the Head Restraint
4-Way Head Restraints
WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint:
1.
Press and hold the adjust and release button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To tilt the head restraint:
E327919
1.
Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving or riding position.
168
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the preferred position.
After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, untilted position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position.
Removing the Head Restraint
1.
Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release button and the unlock and remove button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: You cannot remove head restraints that have audio system speakers.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
Manual Seat Adjustment
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully locks into place by rocking it backward and forward. Not securing the seat into the locked position can be dangerous in a crash and could cause serious personal injury or death.
E308316
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
Manual Seat Adjustment
E327922
169
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E308334
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
Head Restraint Components
Adjusting the Head Restraint
4-Way Head Restraints
WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts.
To raise the head restraint, pull the head restraint up.
To lower the head restraint, do the following:
1.
Press and hold the adjust and release button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
E327921
The head restraints consist of:
A
B
C
D
An energy absorbing head restraint.
Two steel stems.
Guide sleeve adjust and release button.
Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If equipped).
E327919
1.
Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the preferred position.
170
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, untilted position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position.
Removing the Head Restraint
1.
Pull up the head restraint until it reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release button and the unlock and remove button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: You cannot remove head restraints that have audio system speakers.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
To reset the stopping position:
1.
Remove any obstruction.
2. Press and hold the control until the seat stops moving.
3. Press and hold the control again until the seat stops.
4. Continue holding the control for a few seconds. The new position is learned.
Adjusting the Seat Cushion
E308336
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
Max Recline Seat
E308339
If the seat stops prior to reaching the end of the travel position, or an obstruction occurs, a new stopping position is learned.
E308338
171
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
Adjusting the Seat Flat
(If Equipped)
Adjusting the Upper Seat Backrest
(If Equipped)
E306956
This feature allows the occupant to find a comfortable position to rest when the vehicle is not moving.
Note: Before adjusting the seat backrest fully flat, place the rear seat cushion into the upright position and remove any objects that could obstruct the movement of the
flat seat. See Folding the Seats (page 176).
As the seat folds flat, the cushion adjusts to support the hips and lower back. For additional support, you can also adjust the upper seat backrest.
If you fully recline the passenger seat and the vehicle is moving, a message appears on the instrument cluster and a tone sounds. To switch the warning off, return the seat to an upright position.
E311333
The front upper seat backrest tilts for extra comfort. To tilt the upper seat backrest, pivot the upper seat backrest toward your shoulders.
After the upper seat backrest reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, untilted position.
Adjusting the Seat Height
E308337
172
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support Adjusting the Massage Seat
Settings
E327927
MASSAGE SEATS (If
Equipped)
Massage Seat Limitations
The engine must be running or the vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate the seats.
The passenger side massage is available if the occupant meets the seat sensor weight requirements.
Allow a few seconds for any selection to activate. Selecting a different adjustment cancels the current one in progress. When the seat backrest and cushion are both active, the massage alternates between zones.
E156301
A
B
C
D
E
Select the previous massage pattern or lumbar area.
Decrease the massage or lumbar
Intensity.
Select the next massage pattern or lumbar area.
Increase the massage or lumbar
Intensity.
Select the massage or lumbar mode.
You can also adjust this feature through the touchscreen.
173
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Heated Seat Precautions
WARNING: Use caution when using the heated seat if you are unable to feel pain to your skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp objects into the seat cushion or seat backrest. This could damage the heated seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything on the seat that blocks the heat, for example a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol on the climate controls or touchscreen to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
The more indicators that display, the warmer the temperature of the seat.
Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off.
VENTILATED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Ventilated Seat Precautions
Do not:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may cause the air vent holes to become blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing the air vents to not work properly.
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and Off
The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
174
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Front Seats
E224689
Press this symbol on the climate controls or the touchscreen to cycle through the various ventilation settings and off. More indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
Note: When you switch the climate control fan speed and the ventilated seats to their maximum settings, the ventilated seats provide increased cooling.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the ventilated seats are on, the feature turns itself off unless the vehicle is in
Auto-Start-Stop mode. You may need to reactivate the ventilated seats.
Note: The ventilated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The ventilated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off.
175
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Seats
(If Equipped)
MANUAL SEATS
Head Restraint Components
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints
E308301
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
To lower the head restraint:
1.
Press and hold the adjust and release button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1.
Pull up the head restraint until it reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release button and the unlock and remove button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks.
Folding the Seats
You can flip each seat cushion up into a vertical storage position.
E308306
The head restraints consist of:
A
B
C
D
An energy absorbing head restraint.
Two steel stems.
Guide sleeve adjust and release button.
Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If equipped).
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
E181250
Rotate the seat up until it locks in place.
176
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Seats
(If Equipped)
Unfolding the Seats
WARNING: Make sure that cargo and other objects are not trapped under the seat cushion and that you return the seat cushion to the full-down position.
Failure to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly, which could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash.
E308139
Pull the strap to lower the seat
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Heated Seat Precautions
WARNING: Use caution when using the heated seat if you are unable to feel pain to your skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp objects into the seat cushion or seat backrest. This could damage the heated seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything on the seat that blocks the heat, for example a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear of the center console.
177
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Seats
(If Equipped)
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer settings.
The heated seats turn off when you switch off the vehicle.
178
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Occupant Alert System
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
The rear occupant alert system monitors vehicle conditions and notifies you to check for rear seat occupants when you switch the ignition off.
HOW DOES THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
WORK
The system monitors when rear doors have been opened and closed to indicate the potential presence of an occupant in the rear seat.
A message displays in the information and entertainment display screen and an audible warning sounds when you switch the ignition off after any of the following conditions have been met:
• A rear door is opened or closed while the ignition is on.
• You switch the ignition on within 15 minutes of a rear door opening and closing.
• You switch the ignition on within 15 minutes of the alert having displayed or sounded.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The system does not detect the presence of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
It monitors when rear doors are opened and closed.
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when there is no rear seat occupant, but alert conditions are met.
Note: It is possible to receive no alert when there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert conditions are not met. For example, if a rear seat occupant does not enter the vehicle through a rear door.
Note: The audible warning does not sound when the front door is opened before you switch the ignition off.
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle .
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: Performing a master reset causes the system to switch on again.
Semiannual Reminder
(If Equipped)
When you switch the system off, a message appears every six months as a reminder that the system is off. You can switch the system back on or leave it off.
179
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Occupant Alert System
(If Equipped)
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM INDICATORS
E325002
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of time. Press Close to acknowledge and remove the message.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of time.
180
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Memory Function
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE MEMORY
FUNCTION
The memory function recalls the position of these features:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable pedals.
MEMORY FUNCTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Before activating the memory seat, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving.
LOCATING THE MEMORY
FUNCTION BUTTONS
E332006
The memory function buttons are on the driver door.
SAVING A PRESET POSITION
1.
Adjust the memory features to your preferred position.
2. Press and hold the preferred preset button until you hear a single tone.
A confirmation message appears in the information display.
You can save up to three preset memory positions at any time.
RECALLING A PRESET
POSITION
Press and release a preset button.
Note: You can recall a preset memory position when the ignition is off, or when you place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not moving.
Note: Pressing any of the preset buttons or any memory feature control during a memory recall cancels the operation.
You can also recall a preset memory position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your remote control if you linked it to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door handle if a linked remote control is present.
Using a linked remote control to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat and steering column to the easy entry position.
Linking a Preset Position toy Your
Remote Control or Passive Key
See Linking or Unlinking a Personal
Profile to a Remote Control (page 593).
181
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
Universal Garage Door Opener: Getting
Started
Universal Garage Door Opener: HomeLink
Universal Garage Door Opener Homelink for
Genie Intellicode
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
HOW DOES THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER WORK
The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. You can program garage doors as well as entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Clearing the Garage
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with your vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Clearing the Garage
182
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
(If Equipped)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
LIMITATIONS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal.
U.S. gate operators time-out in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR
HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Clearing the Garage Door Opener
1.
With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, switch your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release one of the three
HomeLink function buttons that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button you want to program while watching the indicator light on HomeLink. Continue to hold the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLite indicator flashes rapidly, repeat step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
E188212
183
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
(If Equipped)
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
MOTOR
E142659
1.
Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor, you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E188212
3. Press and hold one of the three
HomeLink function buttons you want to program for two seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR GATE
OPENER MOTOR
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators “time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating.
1.
Press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function button you want to program for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly, repeat Step 3.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
4. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
184
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
(If Equipped)
CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
RADIO FREQUENCIES
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
E188213
1.
Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the indicator light above the buttons flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes, release the buttons.
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
REPROGRAMMING THE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1.
Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow programming steps.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that could cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
185
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
USB Ports
LOCATING THE USB PORTS
Data Transfer USB Ports
PLAYING MEDIA USING THE
USB PORT
The USB Ports could be in the following locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
Note: These USB ports can also charge devices.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have data transfer capabilities.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF certified cables and adapters. Non-certified cables and adapters may not work.
Charge Only USB Ports
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Connect your device to the USB port.
Press the audio button on the feature bar.
E100027
Select Sources .
Select the USB option.
The USB ports could be in the following locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• On the upper instrument panel.
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
Press the button to play a track.
Press the button again to pause the track.
Press the button to skip to the next track.
Press and hold the button to fast forward through the track.
Press the button once to return to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
186
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
USB Ports
CHARGING A DEVICE
Connect your device to the USB port.
You can use the charger when the vehicle is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is running, or when SYNC is on.
187
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
Pro-Power On-Board
The vehicle functions as a portable generator and can power devices that require up to the rating listed on power outlet label.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: 2KW
WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
WARNING: Do not connect any vehicle power outlets to any premises, including buildings or recreational vehicles. This can create a backfeed to utility lines. Failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to the vehicle, fire, electrical shock or death.
WARNING: The vehicle's engine runs while the generator is switched on.
Running engines emit carbon monoxide.
Only use the generator when the vehicle is outdoors. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Note: Automatic engine stop is disabled and the gasoline engine will continue to idle when the outlet is switched on.
Note: We recommend using UL approved devices for use with the power outlet.
Note: Unplug electrical devices from the power outlet when they are not switched on.
Note: Make sure there is no damage to the outlets before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure that objects are not blocking the inverter inlet and exhaust near the rear underseat storage compartment.
Note: The climate control system may turn on and power may be limited during extreme hot or cold temperatures to optimize the performance of the system.
Note: When the outlet is switched on and the vehicle is in Park (P) the engine turns off 30 minutes after the low fuel warning is displayed. After the vehicle is turned off, generator mode only operates while driving or until the vehicle is refueled.
188
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Grounding Types
Vehicle Type
Gas
HEV
Grounding Type
Neutral floating: The neutral of the inverter generator is isolated from system ground.
Neutral bonded: The neutral of the inverter generator is bonded to system ground.
Connecting loads that also have neutral bonded to ground will cause the ground fault detection to trip.
Note: If additional grounding measures are required, consult with a qualified electrician.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: 2.4KW/7.2KW
WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
WARNING: Do not connect any vehicle power outlets to any premises, including buildings or recreational vehicles. This can create a backfeed to utility lines. Failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to the vehicle, fire, electrical shock or death.
WARNING: The vehicle's engine runs while the generator is switched on.
Running engines emit carbon monoxide.
Only use the generator when the vehicle is outdoors. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Note: The gasoline engine may start and stop to provide power when the outlet is switched on.
Note: We recommend using UL approved devices for use with the power outlet.
Note: Unplug electrical devices from the power outlet when they are not switched on.
Note: The climate control system may turn on and power may be limited during extreme hot or cold temperatures to optimize the performance of the system.
Note: When the outlet is switched on and the vehicle is in Park (P) the engine turns off 30 minutes after the low fuel warning is displayed. After the vehicle is turned off, generator mode only operates while driving or until the vehicle is refueled.
189
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Grounding Types
Vehicle Type
Gas
HEV
Grounding Type
Neutral floating: The neutral of the inverter generator is isolated from system ground.
Neutral bonded: The neutral of the inverter generator is bonded to system ground.
Connecting loads that also have neutral bonded to ground will cause the ground fault detection to trip.
Note: If additional grounding measures are required, consult with a qualified electrician.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
Indicator Status
On
Off
Flashing
Description
The power point is working and the vehicle is on.
The power point is off or the vehicle is off.
The power point is in fault mode.
Generator Mode Power Indicator
E335065
The power outlets are behind covers on the left side of the bed.
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
- VEHICLES WITH: 2KW
Power Outlet Status Indicator
The power outlet indicator illuminates to let you know the status of the system.
E335469
190
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
The generator mode power indicator displays the currently used power and total available power level on the touchscreen.
When Generator Mode is switched off the indicator displays a reduced available power level. When generator mode is switched on the indicator displays the full available power.
Note: Ensure plugged in devices do not exceed the available power displayed on the generator mode power indicator.
Note: Maximum power may be reduced when the vehicle is in drive (D).
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
- VEHICLES WITH: 2.4KW/
7.2KW
Power Outlet Status Indicator
The power outlet indicator illuminates to let you know the status of the system.
Indicator Status
On
Off
Flashing
Description
The power point is working and the vehicle is on.
The power point is off and the vehicle is off.
The power point is in fault mode.
Generator Mode Power Indicator
E335469
The generator mode power indicator displays the currently used power and total available power level on the touchscreen.
When Generator Mode is switched off the indicator displays a reduced available power level. When generator mode is switched on the indicator displays the full available power.
Note: Additional indicators may be available based on vehicle configuration.
Note: Ensure plugged in devices do not exceed the available power displayed on the generator mode power indicator.
WHAT IS UTILITY IDLE MODE -
VEHICLES WITH: FLIP KEY
Utility Idle mode allows you to remove the key from the ignition and keep the vehicle and bed power point running.
SWITCHING UTILITY IDLE ON
AND OFF - VEHICLES WITH:
FLIP KEY
Switching Utility Idle On
1.
Start the vehicle. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 209).
191
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
2. Press the Features button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Pro Power Onboard button.
4. Press the Generator Mode button to switch the power outlet to the rating listed on the power outlet label.
5. Press the Utility Idle button.
6. Turn the key to position 0 .
7.
Remove the key from the ignition.
Switching Utility Idle Off using the
Key
1.
Insert the key into the ignition.
2. Turn the key to position III .
Switching Utility Idle off using the
Information and Entertainment
Display Screen
Use the controls on the touchscreen to switch off the vehicle.
WHAT IS GENERATOR MODE
Pro-Power On-Board
Generator Mode uses the vehicle engine to increase power to the bed power outlets up to the rating listed on the power outlet label.
SWITCHING GENERATOR
MODE ON AND OFF
Using the Information and
Entertainment Display Screen
1.
Switch the vehicle on. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 209).
2. Press the Features button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Pro Power Onboard button.
4. Press the Generator Mode button to switch the power outlet to the full rating listed on the power outlet label.
Using the Instrument Panel
E311311
Press the button to switch between off, Convenience Mode, and Generator Mode.
Using the Bed Control
E337175
Press the button to switch Generator Mode on and off.
RESETTING GROUND FAULT
DETECTION
After disconnecting all electrical loads the ground fault can be reset using the switches on the power point, on the instrument panel or on the touchscreen.
Use the controls on the touchscreen to test the ground fault detection circuit.
192
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
RESETTING THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER - VEHICLES WITH:
7.2KW
Press the button on the upper right area of the bed outlet when the circuit breaker has opened after a fault has occurred to reset the circuit breaker to the on position. There are two circuit breaker buttons that correspond to the A and B outlets.
E337774
193
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
POWER OUTLET – TROUBLESHOOTING
Power Outlet – Information Messages
Message Description
Item(s) plugged in exceed the system's maximum capacity. Try unplugging one or more items and reset. See Owner's Manual for detail.
Ensure plugged in devices do not exceed the available power displayed. Devices may exceed the power rating shown the device label when plugged in. Unplug the device and switch the ignition on and off to reset the system.
Ground Fault Detected. See Owner's
Manual for details.
After disconnecting all electrical loads, the ground fault can be reset using the switches on the power point, on the instrument panel or on the touchscreen. Use the controls on the touchscreen to test the ground fault detection circuit.
Generator System is outside its operating temperature and capacity is reduced. See
Owner's Manual for details.
Another power source is trying to supply power to your vehicle's AC outlets. Disconnect vehicle from that power source. See
Owner's Manual for details.
The climate control system may turn on and power may be limited during extreme hot or cold temperatures to optimize the performance of the system.
Do not plug in any device that supplies power to the vehicle through the power points. This could result in damage to vehicle systems.
Pro Power OnBoard is currently unavailable.
See Owner's Manual for details.
The Pickup Bed Power Generator is in fault mode. Ensure all devices are unplugged from the system. Use the controls on the touchscreen to reset the system. Switch the vehicle on and off if the touchscreen controls are unable to reset the system. See an authorized dealer if these steps do not fix the fault.
This button test outlets for proper operation of ground fault detection. In a successful test, Pro Power OnBoard detects the ground fault and turns off. See
Owner's Manual for details.
After disconnecting all electrical loads, the ground fault can be reset using the switches on the power point, on the instrument panel or on the touchscreen. Use the controls on the touchscreen to test the ground fault detection circuit.
194
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Message
Extended idling in drive (D) is reducing available power to 4300W. See Owner’s
Manual for details
Description
Extended idling in drive (D) is reducing available power. When safe, shift to park
(P) while idling, or reduce power draw to less than 4300W to keep the generator running.
195
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Pickup Bed Power Generator
Outlet
Power Outlet – Frequently Asked
Questions
Why am I not able to put my vehicle in
Drive (D) while using the pickup bed power outlet?
Unplug all devices from the Bed Power
Generator Outlets and make sure you have closed the outlet covers. If you are still unable to drive the vehicle, use
Manual Park Release to put the
transmission into Drive (D). See Using
Manual Park Release (page 257).
What do I do when my touchscreen is malfunctioning and I cannot accept the popup message to put the vehicle in
Drive (D)?
196
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices that require up to the rating on the outlet cover.
Note: The total power delivered is divided if more than one outlet is used.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
The power outlet may be located on the instrument panel, the rear of the center console or the in the bed.
Instrument Panel
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 120 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 400 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
POWER OUTLET LIMITATIONS
Devices may exceed the power rating shown the device label when plugged in.
Unplug the device and switch the ignition on and off to reset the system.
You should not use the power outlet for these types of electric devices:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, for example vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools, or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices which process precise data, for example medical equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply, for example microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch sensor lamps.
E337927
Rear of the Center Console
E337926
197
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Bed
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
Note: Due to different technologies used on its construction, some devices may exceed the capacity shown on its label when they are initially plugged in.
Note: The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the Watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode.
Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on.
E338700
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
The power outlet indicator illuminates to let you know the status of the system.
Indicator Status
On
Off
Flashing
Description
The power point is working, the ignition is on, or the vehicle is in accessory mode.
The power point is off, the ignition is off, or the vehicle is not in accessory mode.
The power point is in fault mode.
198
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices using a 12 V outlet adapter.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
When you switch the vehicle on, you can use the socket to power 12 V appliances with a maximum current rating of 20 A. Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse could blow. Do not plug in any device that supplies power to the vehicle through the power points. This could result in damage to vehicle systems. Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
Power outlets are in the following locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
199
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Center Console Work Surface
(If Equipped)
USING THE CENTER CONSOLE
WORK SURFACE - VEHICLES
WITH: COLUMN SHIFT
E313248
Push the lever on the side of the seat and fold the seat down.
There are three different positions:
E327628
Push the latch down on the top of the work surface to move it to the forward position.
There are 11 lockable positions.
E312215
A.
B.
C.
Home position.
Forward position.
Rotated position.
200
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Center Console Work Surface
(If Equipped)
Note: Do not use the work surface as a handle when entering or exiting the vehicle to avoid damaging it.
USING THE CENTER CONSOLE
WORK SURFACE - VEHICLES
WITH: CONSOLE SHIFT
To use the center console work surface,
stow the selector lever. See Stowing the
E331800
Push the latch on the side of the work surface to rotate it toward the driver. It can be rotated into 11 lockable positions in 5° increments.
Note: The work surface must be placed in the home position when driving your vehicle.
Note: Do not drive with the center console work surface rotated. This could interfere with steering your vehicle.
Note: Do not adjust the steering column when the work surface is rotated.
Note: Do not raise the seat when the work surface is in the forward or rotated positions to avoid damaging it.
E327042
1.
Press the button to release the folding surface.
E327043
2. Open the work surface. Fold the work surface to close.
201
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Center Console Work Surface
(If Equipped)
CENTER CONSOLE WORK SURFACE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Center Console Work Surface – Information Messages
Message
Stow work surface before driving.
Action
Return the work surface to the home position to clear the message.
202
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wireless Accessory Charger
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
The wireless accessory charger allows you to charge one compatible Qi wireless charging device on the charging area.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Wireless charging devices can affect the operation of implanted medical devices, including cardiac pacemakers. If you have any implanted medical devices, we recommend that you consult with your physician.
Tests on this equipment show that it complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, please consult the dealer.
• This product is not end-user serviceable.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Keep the charging area clean and remove foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip, for example passports, parking tickets or credit cards, near the charging area when charging a device. Damage may occur to the magnetic strip.
Do not place metal objects, for example remote controls, coins and candy wrappers, on or near the charging area when charging a device. Metal objects may heat up and degrade the charging performance, in addition to causing error messages and interruptions in charging.
Note: During charging, the device and the charger could heat up, this is normal. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the device may stop charging.
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
E297549
The charging area is on the center console or in the media bin below the instrument panel.
CHARGING A WIRELESS
DEVICE
Place the device on the center of the charging surface with the charging side down. The charging stops after your device reaches a full charge.
203
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wireless Accessory Charger
(If Equipped)
You can use the charger when the vehicle is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is running, or when SYNC is on.
204
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
CUP HOLDERS
Cup Holder Precautions
Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING: Use caution when stowing items or hot drinks in the cup holders. Items could become loose or spill during hard braking, acceleration or crashes. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Opening the Glove Compartment
Upper Glove Compartment
E310218
Pull the latch to the left to open.
Locking the Glove Compartment
E310219
Push the button on the instrument panel to open.
E310618
The glove compartment may be locked using the key.
205
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
UNDER SEAT STORAGE (If
Equipped)
Locating the Under Seat Storage
Compartment
Front Under Seat Storage
E306120
Lift the latch to access the storage compartment under the center seat cushion.
Locking the Front Under Seat
Storage
E223578
2. Press the latch to release the cushion.
3. Lift the cushion to access the storage compartment.
Rear Under Seat Storage
E224738
1.
Use the key in the remote control to unlock.
206
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E229819
Lift the rear seat to access the under seat storage bin.
Locking the Rear Under Seat
Storage
Storage
2. Lift the front and side panels to expand and lock them in place.
E229819
1.
Lift the rear seat to access under seat storage bin.
E235008
3. Lock the panels in an open position.
E235007
207
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
GLASSES HOLDER
Locating the Glasses Holder
E235009
4. To collapse, release the lever, push down to the stowed position and fold in the side and front panels.
Note: Make sure the storage divider is not locked into place when collapsing. Push the button to release the divider door and swing to stowed position on front wall.
E306967
The glasses holder is in the overhead console.
Press near the rear edge of the door to open it.
E224956
The locking key is in the key fob. Turn the key to lock or unlock the cushion.
208
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING AND STOPPING
THE ENGINE – PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use starting fluid, for example ether, in the air intake system. Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise.
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
IGNITION SWITCH
0
/
//
///
E252522
Switching the Ignition Off
Turn the key to position 0 .
Switching the Ignition to
Accessory Mode
Turn the key to position I . Electrical accessories, for example the radio, operate without the engine running.
Switching the Ignition On
Turn the key to position II . All electrical circuits and accessories are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
209
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting the Engine
Turn the key to position III . Release the key when the engine starts.
PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH
(IF EQUIPPED)
E321258
Switching the Ignition Off
When the ignition is on or in accessory mode, press the push button ignition switch once without your foot on the brake pedal.
Switching the Ignition to
Accessory Mode
When the ignition is off, press the push button ignition switch once without your foot on the brake pedal.
All electrical circuits and accessories are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
Note: Your vehicle has a battery saver feature that shuts your vehicle off when it detects a certain amount of battery drain, or after approximately 30 minutes of inactivity in accessory mode.
Starting the Engine
With the transmission in park (P), press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. An indicator light on the button illuminates when the ignition is on and when the engine starts.
Note: The system may not function if the passive key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: A valid key must be inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Starting a Gasoline Engine -
Vehicles Without: Push Button
Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in park (P).
1.
Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E322354
2. Turn the key to position III .
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at lower temperatures. It may crank for several seconds when very cold.
210
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting a Gasoline Engine -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in park (P).
1.
Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Wait until the glow plug indicator turns off.
2. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at lower temperatures. It may crank for several seconds when very cold.
Starting a Diesel Engine - Vehicles
Without: Push Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in park (P).
E322354
3. Turn the key to position III .
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at lower temperatures. It may crank for several seconds when very cold.
Glow Plug Indicator
If it illuminates, wait until the glow plug indicator turns off before starting the engine.
Starting a Diesel Engine - Vehicles
With: Push Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in park (P).
1.
Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E322357
1.
Turn the key to position II .
211
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at lower temperatures. It may crank for several seconds when very cold.
Glow Plug Indicator
The engine does not start until the glow plug indicator turns off.
This may take several seconds in extremely cold conditions.
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System - Vehicles Without: Push
Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in park (P).
1.
Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E322354
2. Turn the key to position III .
Note: The green ready indicator illuminates letting you know that your vehicle is ready for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped with a silent key start, the engine may not start when your vehicle starts.
When the engine starts for the first time on your drive, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
Before starting your vehicle, check the following:
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1.
Fully press the brake pedal.
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The green ready indicator illuminates letting you know that your vehicle is ready for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped with a silent key start, the engine may not start when your vehicle starts.
When the engine starts for the first time on your drive, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
Restarting the Engine After
Stopping it - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
The system allows you to start the engine within 10 seconds of switching it off, even if it does not detect a valid passive key.
212
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 10 seconds of switching the engine off, fully press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. After 10 seconds, you can no longer start the engine if the system does not detect a valid passive key.
When you start the engine, it remains running until you press the push button ignition switch, even if your vehicle does not detect a valid passive key. If you open and close a door when the engine is running, the system searches for a valid passive key.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
Engine Block Heater Precautions
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the hood, or allow it to drop under its own weight when using the engine block heater. This could damage the power cable and may cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury and property damage.
We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and engine block heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• If the engine block heater cord is under the hood, do not remove the wiring from its original location. Do not close the hood on the extension wiring.
• Park your vehicle in a clean area, clear of combustible materials.
• Firmly connect the engine block heater cord and the extension cord.
• Check the extension cord for heat anywhere when the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Unplug and properly stow the system before starting and driving your vehicle.
The protective cover seals the terminals of the engine block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Check the engine block heater system for proper operation before winter.
213
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
How Does the Engine Block Heater
Work
The engine block heater warms the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to quickly respond. The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded
220-240 volt AC electrical source.
Note: The engine block heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation.
Using the engine block heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary - Vehicles
Without: Push Button Start
1.
Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle speed.
4. Turn the key to position 0 .
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary - Vehicles
With: Push Button Start
1.
Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle speed.
E321258
4. Press the push button ignition switch.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving - Vehicles
Without: Push Button Start
WARNING: Switching off the engine when your vehicle is still moving results in a significant decrease in braking assistance. Higher effort is required to apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle. A significant decrease in steering assistance could also occur. The steering does not lock, but higher effort could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some electrical circuits, for example airbags, also turn off. If you unintentionally switch the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the engine.
E322405
214
E322405
1.
Turn the key to position 0 .
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving - Vehicles With:
Push Button Start
WARNING: Switching off the engine when your vehicle is still moving results in a significant decrease in braking assistance. Higher effort is required to apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle. A significant decrease in steering assistance could also occur. The steering does not lock, but higher effort could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some electrical circuits, for example airbags, also turn off. If you unintentionally switch the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the engine.
E321258
1.
Press and hold the push button ignition switch until the engine stops, or press it three times within two seconds.
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP
What Is Automatic Engine Stop
Automatic engine stop is a feature that switches the engine off if it has been idling for an extended period to help you save fuel.
How Does Automatic Engine Stop
Work
Automatic engine stop turns the engine off. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down.
Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.
Switching Automatic Engine Stop
On and Off - Vehicles With: 4.2
Inch Screen
1.
Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select Settings .
2. Select Vehicle Settings .
3. Switch 30min Max Idle on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown. If you switch it off, it turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
Switching Automatic Engine Stop
On and Off - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen
1.
Press the menu button on the steering wheel to enter the information display main menu.
2. Select Settings .
215
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
3. Switch Auto Engine Off on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown. If you switch it off, it turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the
30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following:
• Pressing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
• Pressing the OK or RESET button during the countdown.
ACCESSING THE PASSIVE KEY
BACKUP POSITION
If you are unable to start your vehicle, locate the backup slot in one of two positions:
Type One
Type Two
E269950
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Type
One, make sure to place the key properly into the backup slot.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Type
Two, make sure the buttons are facing the rear of the vehicle and the key ring up. Place the key into the backup slot.
With the key in the backup slot, press the brake pedal, then press the push button ignition switch to start your vehicle.
STARTING AND STOPPING
THE ENGINE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Warning Lamps
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If it illuminates when the engine is running, the on-board diagnostics system is detecting a malfunction of the vehicle emission control system.
E312216
216
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
If it flashes, engine misfire could be occurring. Increased exhaust gas temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration, and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Powertrain Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when the engine is running, this indicates a powertrain or four-wheel drive fault. If it flashes when you are driving, immediately reduce the vehicle speed.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration, and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
If both lamps illuminate when the engine is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Continuing to drive your vehicle could cause reduced power or the engine to stop. Switch the ignition off and attempt to restart the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Information Messages
Message Action
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays if you exceed the starting time limit. You cannot attempt to start the engine for 15 minutes. If you cannot start the engine after 15 minutes passes, have your vehicle immediately checked.
Starting System Fault
No Key Detected
Displays if you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key. The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Displays if the system does not detect a valid passive key.
217
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Gasoline, Vehicles Without: Push
Button Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting is optimized to minimize vehicle emissions and maximize cabin comfort and fuel economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the engine for a limited amount of time before the starting system temporarily disables. If you exceed the starting time limit, a message may appear and you cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine after 3 attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the following:
1.
Fully press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
E322354
3. Turn the key to position III and wait until the engine stops cranking.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
5. Turn the key to position III .
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Gasoline, Vehicles With: Push
Button Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting is optimized to minimize vehicle emissions and maximize cabin comfort and fuel economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the engine for a limited amount of time before the starting system temporarily disables. If you exceed the starting time limit, a message may appear and you cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.
218
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine after 3 attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the following:
1.
Fully press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The engine cranks for a short period of time and then it stops.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
E321258
5. Press the push button ignition switch.
Why does the system not detect a passive key?
If the system does not detect a passive key and you are unable to start the engine, insert the passive key into the backup position and press the push button ignition switch to start the
engine. See Accessing the Passive
Key Backup Position (page 216).
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Diesel, Vehicles Without: Push
Button Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting is optimized to minimize vehicle emissions and maximize cabin comfort and fuel economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the engine for a limited amount of time before the starting system temporarily disables. If you exceed the starting time limit, a message may appear and you cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine, do the following:
1.
Fully press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
219
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E322354
2. Turn the key to position III until the engine starts.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Frequently Asked Questions -
Diesel, Vehicles With: Push Button
Start
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting is optimized to minimize vehicle emissions and maximize cabin comfort and fuel economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the engine for a limited amount of time before the starting system temporarily disables. If you exceed the starting time limit, a message may appear and you cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes.
Why do I experience different driving characteristics?
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine, do the following:
1.
Fully press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
E321258
2. Press the push button ignition switch until the engine starts.
Why does the system not detect a passive key?
If the system does not detect a passive key and you are unable to start the engine, insert the passive key into the backup position and press the push button ignition switch to start the
engine. See Accessing the Passive
Key Backup Position (page 216).
220
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS A HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE
A hybrid vehicle has an electric motor and a high voltage battery combined with a gasoline engine.
HOW DOES A HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE WORK
The hybrid vehicle combines electric and gasoline propulsion to provide optimal performance and improved efficiency.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
DRIVING CHARACTERISTICS
The gasoline engine starts and stops to provide power when required and to save fuel when not needed. When coasting at low speeds, coming to a stop or standing, the gas engine normally shuts down and your vehicle operates in electric-only mode.
Conditions that may cause the gasoline engine to start or remain running include:
• Considerable vehicle acceleration.
• Driving uphill.
• The high voltage battery charge level is low.
• Heating or cooling the vehicle interior in high or low outside temperatures.
• The gasoline engine is below normal operating temperature.
• Towing a trailer.
• Certain selectable drive modes could
cause the engine to run. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 328). Use of the
paddle shifters while in drive (D) could cause the engine to run.
Your hybrid vehicle also comes with standard hydraulic braking and regenerative braking. Regenerative braking is performed by your transmission and captures brake energy and stores it in the high voltage battery.
You could also notice that your engine continues to run instead of shutting off during extended downhill driving. The engine stays on during this engine braking but is not using any fuel.
You could also hear a slight whine or whistle when operating your vehicle. This is the normal operation of the electric motor in the hybrid system.
LOW ENGINE USE MODE
What is Low Engine Use Mode
Low engine use mode maintains proper engine lubrication at sufficient temperature and activates when you drive your vehicle with limited engine operation.
How Does Low Engine Use Mode
Work
When in low engine use mode, your vehicle runs the engine as necessary. When low engine use mode begins, a message appears in the information display. If low engine use mode does not complete before you switch your vehicle off, it continues the next time you start your vehicle and the message reappears.
Note: Cold temperatures affect the engine warm up time and the low engine use mode may operate more frequently.
Note: An oil change is not required but gives you the option of not running a low engine use cycle. Resetting the oil life monitoring system suspends the low engine use mode.
221
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
(If Equipped)
Low Engine Use Mode Limitations
Cold temperatures affect the engine warm up time and the low engine use mode could operate more frequently.
An oil change is not required but gives you the option of not running a low engine use cycle. Resetting the oil life monitoring system suspends the low engine use mode.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION INDICATORS
When you start your vehicle, a green READY indicator light
E293827 appears in the instrument cluster letting you know that your vehicle is ready for driving.
The engine may not start because your vehicle has a silent key start feature. This fuel saving feature allows your vehicle to be ready to drive without requiring the gas engine to be running.
The indicator remains on when your vehicle is on, whether the engine is running or not, to indicate your vehicle is capable of movement using the electric motor, gas engine or both.
Typically, the engine does not start unless the vehicle is cold, a climate control change is requested or you press the accelerator pedal.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Information – Frequently Asked
Questions
How long is the high voltage battery system designed to last?
The high voltage battery system is designed to last the life of your vehicle.
Does the high voltage battery require maintenance?
The high voltage battery does not require maintenance.
What should I do if the vehicle runs out of fuel and the high voltage battery is out of charge?
Refuel and start your vehicle normally.
The engine will recharge the high voltage battery.
Why does the engine sometimes start at key-on?
The vehicle's computer will determine if an engine start is required at key-on.
It starts the engine when necessary for cabin heating, windshield defrost, or if the outside temperature is low.
Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how will it affect my fuel economy?
Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15% ethanol, 85% gasoline) fuel, but you may notice slightly reduced fuel economy because ethanol contains less energy per gallon than gasoline.
Your hybrid vehicle is not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).
222
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
(If Equipped)
Why does it take a long time before the engine shuts down?
There are several reasons the engine stays on for an extended amount of time when you first start it. One common reason is to make sure that the emissions components are warm enough to minimize tailpipe emission.
As the climate gets cooler, the engine-on time is extended.
Why does my engine stay on when it is extremely cold outside?
In order to make sure that the climate control system can begin heating the cabin or defrosting the windshield as soon as a driver requests it, the engine coolant temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot. Keeping the engine on is required to maintain the correct coolant temperature.
223
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto-Start-Stop
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP
Auto Start-Stop
The system is designed to help reduce fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions by stopping the engine when it is idling, for example at traffic lights.
AUTO-START-STOP
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you open the hood or have any service or repair work completed. If you do not switch the ignition off, the engine could restart at any time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
SWITCHING AUTO-START-
STOP ON AND OFF
The system turns on when you switch the ignition on.
Press the button to switch the system off.
Note: OFF illuminates in the switch.
Note: Deactivating the system using the button lasts only one key cycle.
Press the button again to switch the system back on.
Note: The system turns off if it detects a malfunction. If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Stop your vehicle, keep your foot on the brake pedal and the transmission in drive
(D).
Note: Power assist steering turns off when the engine stops.
RESTARTING THE ENGINE
Release the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal.
A message appears in the information display if the system requires you to take action.
AUTO-START-STOP
INDICATORS
WARNING: The system may require the engine to automatically restart when the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates green or flashes amber. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop indicator illuminates green when the engine stops. It flashes amber and a message appears when you need to take action.
The Auto-Start-Stop indicator
E146361 illuminates gray with a strikethrough when the system is not available.
224
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto-Start-Stop
(If Equipped)
Note: You can display the reason why the system is not available in the information display.
AUTO-START-STOP –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Auto-Start-Stop – Information
Messages
A message appears in the information display if the system requires you to take action.
Message
Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine
Auto StartStop Press a
Pedal to Start Engine
Condition Action
The system needs to restart the engine but requires your confirmation.
Press the brake pedal to restart the engine.
The system needs to restart the engine but requires your confirmation.
Press the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal to restart the engine.
225
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto-Start-Stop
(If Equipped)
Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does the engine not always stop when I expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way that complements other vehicle systems, allowing them to operate at optimum performance.
The system does not stop the engine if:
• The driver door is open.
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
• The heated windshield is on.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or too high.
• The battery charge is low.
• The battery temperature is outside the optimal operating range.
• The engine is required to run to maintain interior climate and reduce fogging.
Why does the engine sometimes restart when I do not expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way that complements other vehicle systems, allowing them to operate at optimum performance.
The system restarts the engine if:
• You switch the heated windshield on.
• You switch maximum defrost on.
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in neutral.
• The engine is required to run to maintain adequate brake system assistance.
• The engine is required to run to maintain interior climate and reduce fogging.
Can I permanently switch the system off?
No. The system plays an important role in reducing the fuel consumption and the CO
2 emissions.
Will the frequent engine starts cause parts to wear out?
Your vehicle has an enhanced battery and starter motor that are designed for the increased number of engine starts.
226
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL AND REFUELING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle.
• Switch the engine off before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately call a physician, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel vapor can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you splash fuel in your eyes, immediately remove contact lenses, if worn, flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and thoroughly wash your skin with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. Immediately call a physician if you experience any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Selecting the Correct Fuel - Flex
Fuel – Ethanol
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following identifiers:
• Yellow fuel filler cap.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler door.
227
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E161513
Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or regular unleaded gasoline blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance.
For additional information, visit www.toptiergas.com
.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85% ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system.
Selecting the Correct Fuel -
Gasoline
E161513
Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
228
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance.
For additional information, visit www.toptiergas.com
.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system.
Selecting the Correct Fuel for Cold
Weather - Diesel
Choosing the Right Fuel: Vehicles
Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands And Other Locales)
Note: Your Warranty will not cover damage caused by using an improper type of fuel or fuel additive.
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel significantly increases your vehicle’s exhaust emissions and reduce engine life due to increased internal wear.
We recommend Top Tier diesel fuel where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance.
For additional information, visit www.toptiergas.com
.
229
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
You should use ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel designated as number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of 15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You can operate your vehicle on diesel fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also known as B20. These fuels should meet the ASTM D975 diesel or the
ASTM D7467 B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications. Outside of North America, use fuels meeting EN590 or equivalent local market standard.
Using low-sulfur diesel fuel
(16-500 ppm) or high-sulfur diesel fuel (greater than 500 ppm) in your diesel engine will cause certain emission components to malfunction which could also cause the service engine soon light to illuminate indicating an emissions-related concern.
Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold temperature. For best results at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), we recommend using a diesel fuel which has been seasonally adjusted for the ambient conditions.
Choosing the Right Fuel: Vehicles
Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel Is Not Required
For the engine to operate reliably on low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the engine must be a factory-built high-sulfur engine (available as a dealer order option for select markets) or an ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel configured engine that has been retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using authorized dealer service parts. Failure to use retrofit components other than those available through your authorized dealer results in coolant system damage, engine overheating, selective catalyst reduction system or diesel particulate filter damage and possible base engine damage.
Use only a diesel engine configured for use with high-sulfur diesel fuel in markets with diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater than 15 ppm. Using low-sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high-sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine designed to use only ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel could result in damage to engine emission control devices and the after treatment system, potentially rendering the vehicle inoperable.
Vehicles with engines configured for use with high-sulfur diesel fuel are only available for sale in countries where ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in an ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel market that are subsequently exported to non-ultra low sulfur diesel fuel markets will need to be retrofitted at the customer’s expense using
Ford authorized dealer service parts in order to be reliably operated on non-ultra low sulfur diesel fuel.
Biodiesel
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could cause an explosion.
Note: Do not use home heating oil, agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste cooking greases, biodiesel greater than 20% or any diesel not intended for highway use.
Damage to the fuel injection system, engine and exhaust catalyst, and diesel particulate filter can occur if you use an improper fuel.
Red dye is used to identify fuels intended for agricultural and non-highway use.
You can operate your vehicle on diesel fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also known as B20.
230
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted product from renewable fuel sources, such as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste cooking greases.
To help achieve acceptable engine performance and durability when using biodiesel in your vehicle:
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less.
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality that complies with industry standards.
• Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals. See General
Maintenance Information (page 602).
• Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel tank for more than 1 month.
• Consider changing brands or reducing biodiesel content if you have cold temperature fuel gelling issues or a frequently appearing LOW FUEL
PRESSURE message.
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater than 20% can cause damage to your vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust after-treatment hardware (exhaust catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
Concentrations greater than 20% can also cause fuel filter restrictions that could result in a lack of power or damage to fuel system components, including fuel pump and fuel injector failures.
We recommend SAE 5W-40 oil for fuels with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). For more information about oil change intervals and other maintenance when
operating on biodiesel. See Special
Operating Conditions Scheduled
Look for a label on the fuel pump to confirm the amount of biodiesel contained in diesel fuel. Ask the service station attendant to confirm the biodiesel content of diesel fuel, if you do not see a label on the fuel pump.
If you plan to park or store your vehicle for more than 1 month, then you should empty your vehicle fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can damage fuel system seals and plastics and corrode steel parts.
During cold weather, if you have problems operating on biodiesel, you may need to use diesel fuel with lower biodiesel content, try another brand or discontinue the use of biodiesel.
Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket additives to your fuel if you use a high-quality diesel fuel that conforms to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel injector system or engine.
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an equivalent cetane booster additive if you suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel and performance improver or an equivalent additive if there is fuel gelling.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol additives could result in damage to the fuel injectors and system.
Your Warranty may not cover repairs needed to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product that does not meet our specifications in your fuel.
231
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly alternating between E85 and gasoline. If you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as possible, at least half a tank. Drive your vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you use E85 exclusively, we recommend that you fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER
FUNNEL
Regular Cab
The fuel filler funnel is behind the right-hand front seat.
Super Cab/Crew Cab
The fuel filler funnel is under the second row right-hand rear seat.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up, which can produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 232).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they may not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it.
232
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following:
1.
Fully open the fuel filler door.
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
A B
E157452
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the fuel filler inlet.
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it back in your vehicle or correctly dispose of it.
Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine.
Note: You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel.
C
E267248
A
B
C
Fuel filler door.
Fuel tank filler valve.
Fuel tank filler pipe.
Refueling Your Vehicle - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
233
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
1.
Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for your vehicle.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler pipe.
E327438
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
A when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position B can affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
234
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown. Refer to A for left hand drive or B for right hand drive.
E119081
6. When the pump shuts off, wait 5 seconds, then raise the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7.
Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling Your Vehicle - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
1.
When you stop your vehicle, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
235
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E293006
2. Press the button on the left side of the instrument panel next to the headlamp switch to open the fuel filler door. The fuel filler door can take up to 15 seconds to open before you can insert a fuel filler nozzle.
3. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for your vehicle.
E327438
5. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
A when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position B can affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E206912
6. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown. Refer to A for left hand drive or B for right hand drive.
E139202
4. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler pipe.
E119081
7.
When the pump shuts off, wait 5 seconds, then raise the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
8. Fully close the fuel filler door.
236
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: To close the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release.
Complete the refueling process within 20 minutes. If 20 minutes elapses, press the button on the left side of the instrument panel again. Fuel pump nozzle automatic shut off could occur if you do not press the button on the left side instrument panel.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle immediately checked.
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler
Door - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler cap.
E206911
A
B
C
D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release.
Right-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release.
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it.
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it.
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler
Door - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)
Note: The transmission must be in park (P) or neutral (N).
To manually open the fuel door do the following:
237
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E333731
1.
Retrieve the emergency opening tool.
Note: The emergency opening tool is with
the jack and tool bag. See Changing a Flat
E333736
2. Insert the emergency opening tool in the position shown and gently pry the fuel door open.
Note: Do not press the fuel filler door release button if the emergency opening tool has been used.
E333737
Using the emergency opening tool can cause the tappet to temporarily dislodge from the fuel filler door and remain attached to the fuel filler door opening. If you press the fuel filler door release button after using the emergency opening tool, locate the tappet and reinsert it into the fuel door.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY -
EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank after running out of fuel. Included in the advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range.
238
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL TANK CAPACITY -
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range.
FUEL AND REFUELING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuel and Refueling – Warning
Lamps
If it illuminates when you are driving, refuel as soon as possible.
Fuel and Refueling – Information
Messages
Refueling System Warning
(If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close, a message could appear in the information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any debris that may be restricting its movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank filler valve.
7.
Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel
(page 232). This action should dislodge
any debris that may be preventing the fuel tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately reset. If the message continues to appear and a warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
239
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE DIESEL
PARTICULATE FILTER
The diesel particulate filter is part of your vehicle's emissions system and filters harmful diesel particulates from the exhaust gas.
HOW DOES THE DIESEL
PARTICULATE FILTER WORK
The diesel particulate filter reduces carbon emissions by trapping exhaust particles before they reach the tailpipe. The system must periodically clean the exhaust particles that gather inside the filter. This is carried out in three ways, passive regeneration, active regeneration and manual regeneration.
Passive Regeneration
In passive regeneration, the normal exhaust system temperature cleans the filter by oxidizing the soot. Cleaning occurs during normal vehicle operating conditions due to driving patterns.
Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full, active regeneration raises the exhaust temperature to eliminate the particles.
During cleaning, the particles convert to harmless gasses.
When the engine control module detects that the diesel particulate filter is nearly full of particulates, and you are not operating your vehicle in a manner to allow effective regeneration, messages appear in the information display as a reminder for you to drive your vehicle in order to clean the diesel particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle in a manner to allow effective regeneration, the information display shows a cleaning exhaust filter message.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard.
WARNING: When the Exhaust
Filter Cleaning message appears in the information display, do not park near flammable materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete.
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the diesel oxidation catalytic converter or the diesel particulate filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic converter and the diesel particulate filter heat up to very high temperatures after only a short period of engine operation and remain hot after you switch the engine off.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust sound may be heard during the regeneration process.
240
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter
(If Equipped)
Failure to perform active or manual regeneration when instructed could result in a clogged diesel particulate filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills beyond the regeneration threshold, your vehicle disables the ability for active and manual regeneration. This could result in irreversible damage your vehicle Warranty may not cover.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
REQUIREMENTS
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle requires periodic regeneration to maintain its correct function.
If your journeys meet one of the following conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition on and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of acceleration and deceleration.
You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable conditions, which you will find at higher vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a main road or freeway for a minimum of 20 minutes. This drive may include short stops that will not affect the regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and observe speed limits and road conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally maintain engine speed between 1500 and 3000 RPM.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
MANUAL REGENERATION
What Is Diesel Particulate Filter
Manual Regeneration
Diesel particulate filter manual regeneration allows you to manually start regeneration of the diesel particulate filter at idle to clean the filter.
Note: If you are not sure whether your vehicle has this feature, contact your authorized dealer.
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Precautions
WARNING: Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust gases can burn you badly.
You may not be able to use manual regeneration if the service engine soon warning lamp appears in the information display.
Note: During the use of manual regeneration, you may observe a light amount of white smoke. This is normal.
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Requirements
You can use the manual regeneration feature when a message appears in the information display and you are not able to drive in a manner that allows effective automatic active regeneration or if you choose to manually start the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter while the vehicle is idle.
241
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter
(If Equipped)
Before you start manual regeneration, do the following:
• Shift into park (P) and apply the parking brake, on stable, level ground.
• Park your vehicle outside of any structure.
• Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m) away from any obstructions and away from materials that can easily combust or melt, for example paper, leaves, petroleum products, fuels, plastics and other dry organic material.
• Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8 tank of fuel.
• Make sure all fluids are at proper levels.
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Limitations
You cannot use manual regeneration until the diesel particulate filter load percentage has reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter load percentage fluctuates up and down when driving your vehicle due to active and passive regenerations.
If your vehicle is operated with significant stationary operation, low speed drive cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully warm up, passive and active regeneration may not sufficiently clean the diesel particulate filter system.
Aftermarket devices or modifications to the exhaust system may reduce the effectiveness of the exhaust system as well as cause damage to the exhaust system or engine. This may also degrade vehicle performance and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Starting Diesel Particulate Filter
Manual Regeneration
Start with your vehicle engine and when it has reached the normal operating temperature, press the information display
control button on the steering wheel. See
Instrument Cluster Display (page 151).
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at saturation, a message requesting permission to initiate filter cleaning
appears in the information display. See
What Is the Diesel Particulate Filter
(page 240). Answer yes to this prompt and
then follow the next prompts regarding exhaust position required to initiate manual regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an authorized dealer. The display confirms the operation has started and when it has finished. You can also drive to clean the filter.
When the system is at the point of oversaturation, the service engine warning lamp illuminates and a message appears in the information display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning.
You must have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Once manual regeneration starts, engine speed increases to approximately 1600 rpm and the cooling fan speed increases.
You will hear a change in audible sound due to engine speed and cooling fan speed increases.
It is not necessary to open the hood on the engine compartment. Once manual regeneration completes, the engine speed returns to normal idling. The exhaust system remains very hot for several minutes even after regeneration is complete. Do not reposition the vehicle over materials that could burn until the
242
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter
(If Equipped) exhaust system has had sufficient time to cool. Depending on the amount of soot collected by the diesel particulate filter, ambient temperature and altitude, manual regeneration lasts approximately 30 minutes.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
– TROUBLESHOOTING
If there are any issues with the diesel particulate filter system, the engine control system warning lamp and a service engine soon warning lamp illuminate to inform you that your vehicle requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Diesel Particulate Filter – Warning
Lamps
If filter service is required, the engine control system warning lamp illuminates in the information display.
Diesel Particulate Filter – Information Messages
Message
Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Exhaust Filter Overloaded Drive to Clean
Exhaust Filter Overloaded Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Drive to Clean Now
Exhaust Filter Drive
Complete
Action
Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel
Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust temperature will return to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL.
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot) and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the message turns off.
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot) and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the message turns off.
Your diesel particulate filter is clean.
243
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Diesel Particulate Filter
(If Equipped)
Message Action
Exhaust Filter Cleaned
Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Stopped
Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).
The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).
Exhaust Filter Over Limit
Service Now
You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Ignoring this warning message could lead to reduced drivability and customer expense, including damage to the diesel particulate filter. Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage.
244
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
WHAT IS THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM
The selective catalytic reduction system helps reduce emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from the exhaust system.
HOW DOES THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM WORK
The selective catalytic reduction system injects diesel exhaust fluid into the exhaust system to enable correct selective catalytic reduction system function.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case of contact with your eyes, flush immediately with water and get prompt medical attention. In case of contact with your skin, clean immediately with soap and water. If you swallow any diesel exhaust fluid, drink plenty of water, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated area. When you remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap or a diesel exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Ammonia vapors can be irritating to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapors can cause burning to the eyes, throat and nose and cause coughing and watery eyes.
WARNING: Diesel exhaust fluid must be refilled when low or replaced when contaminated or your vehicle speed becomes limited to 50 mph
(80 km/h). In these conditions, drive with caution and refill diesel exhaust fluid immediately. If the diesel exhaust fluid becomes empty or contaminated and fluid is not replaced, your vehicle becomes limited to engine idle only once stopped. In these conditions, be cautious where you stop your vehicle because you may not be able to drive long distances or maintain highway speeds until you refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid.
WARNING: Tampering with or disabling the selective catalytic reduction system results in severe vehicle performance limitation including eventual speed limiting to 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the fuel tank. This can cause damage that your vehicle Warranty may not cover.
Selective catalytic reduction systems are sensitive to contamination of the diesel exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the fluid is important to avoid system malfunctions. If you remove or drain the diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the same fluid to refill the tank. The system has a sensor to monitor fluid quality.
245
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
Driving without refilling, replacing contaminated diesel exhaust fluid, or having the selective catalytic reduction system repaired results in the following actions as required by the California Air
Resources Board (CARB) and the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
• Within a preset distance to empty, speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without refilling or replacing contaminated diesel exhaust fluid causes the engine to enter an idle-only condition. This only occurs upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for 10 minutes or more and is indicated by a message in the information display indicating required actions to resume normal operation. It is required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal (3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the tank to exit the idle-only condition, but your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting mode until you refill the tank completely.
Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank or repair the contaminated system. If the system is contaminated or inoperative, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS
E163354
Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at an authorized dealer, or contact roadside assistance for help in finding a retailer that sells diesel exhaust fluid.
Note: Non-certified diesel exhaust fluid use can cause damage that your Warranty may not cover
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
GUIDELINES
• Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable, non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble liquid.
• In order for the system to operate correctly you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid level.
• Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
• Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
246
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
• Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic components. Immediately wipe away any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled with a damp cloth and water. If it has already crystallized, use warm water and a sponge.
• Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could cause damage to interior components or release an ammonia odor inside your vehicle.
• Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid container once it is emptied.
• Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct sunlight and in temperatures between
23–68°F (-5–20°C).
• The system has a diesel exhaust fluid quality sensor. Dilution of diesel exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid in the selective catalytic reduction system leads to a diesel exhaust fluid system fault, eventually leading to the vehicle only operating in idle-only mode.
• Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with water or any other liquid.
FILLING THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM TANK
Filling the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Tank in Cold
Weather
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system which allows diesel exhaust fluid to operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not use your vehicle for an extended period when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid freezes it may cause damage that your
Warranty will not cover.
Filling the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Tank Using a
Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using a fuel station pump is similar to refueling your vehicle.
1.
Fully open the fuel filler door.
247
E328788
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap.
Note: The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue filler cap.
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
3. Fully insert the diesel exhaust fluid pump nozzle.
E328783
4. Operate the diesel exhaust fluid pump nozzle within the area shown.
Note: The pump nozzle shuts off when the tank is full.
5. Slightly raise the diesel exhaust fluid pump nozzle and then slowly remove it.
6. Replace the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance and it clicks.
Filling the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Tank Using a
Portable Container
The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar fluid containers. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
1.
Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid container cap.
3. Place the spout on to the container and tighten it until you feel a strong resistance.
E328788
4. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap.
Note: The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue filler cap.
5. Insert the spout into the filler neck until the seal on the spout fully seats.
6. Pour the fluid into the tank.
Note: The fluid stops flowing when the tank is full.
7.
Return the container to the vertical position slightly below the diesel exhaust fluid filler neck.
8. Allow any fluid remaining in the spout to drain back into the container.
9. Remove the spout from the diesel exhaust fluid filler neck.
10.
Replace the diesel exhaust fluid tank cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance and it clicks.
11.
Remove the spout from the diesel exhaust fluid container and replace the cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in the container retain it for later use. The spout is reusable. Wash the spout with clean water prior to storage. Do not use the diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other fluid.
248
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
CHECKING THE SELECTIVE
CATALYTIC REDUCTION
SYSTEM STATUS
The information display shows a series of messages about the amount of diesel exhaust fluid available. A systems check displays messages indicating the amount of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays a warning message indicating the approximate distance remaining as the fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears
empty. See Selective Catalytic
Reduction System – Information
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System – Warning Lamps
As the diesel exhaust fluid level
E163176 nears empty, the warning symbol displays and a series of tones and messages starting at 500 mi
(800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and messages continue until you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
The warning lamp illuminates and a message appears in the information display if the system becomes contaminated or inoperative.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
For filling information please refer to the
Capacities and Specifications section of
the owner's manual. See Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Capacity and Specification (page
Selective Catalytic Reduction System – Information Messages
Message Action
DEF Level Range: XX mi/ km Refill Now
The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining diesel exhaust fluid. Refill as soon as possible.
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH / km/ h in XX mi/km
Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/ h Upon Restart
Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel
exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and Specification (page
249
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Selective Catalytic Reduction System - Diesel
Message Action
DEF Level Low Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/ h
The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and Specification (page 249).
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled Soon
The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and Specification (page 249).
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled See Manual
The vehicle will enter into an idle only mode. You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
DEF Fault Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h in XX mi/km
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed distance and count down from this point. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DEF Fault Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h Upon
Restart
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DEF Fault Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DEF Fault Engine Idled
Soon
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
250
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Catalytic Converter
WHAT IS THE CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
The catalytic converter is part of your vehicle's emissions system and filters harmful pollutants from the exhaust gas.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
PRECAUTIONS
CATALYTIC CONVERTER –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Catalytic Converter – Warning
Lamps
Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics system that monitors the emission control system. If any of the following warning lamps illuminate, this may indicate that the on-board diagnostics system has detected an emission control system malfunction.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off.
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 439).
•
Use the correct fuel. See Fuel and
• Do not switch the ignition off when your vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule.
Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause reduced power or the engine to stop.
Failure to respond to a warning lamp may cause damage that your vehicle Warranty may not cover. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
251
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
WHAT IS THE HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY
The high voltage battery is a highly sophisticated lithium ion battery system, used to store electrified propulsion energy to power the vehicle.
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: This battery pack should only be serviced by an authorized electric vehicle technician. Improper handling can result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you open the hood or have any service or repair work completed. If you do not switch the ignition off, the engine could restart at any time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not touch the electronic ignition system parts after you have switched the ignition on or when the engine is running. The system operates at high voltage. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Keep your hands and clothing clear of the engine cooling fan.
252
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul when the road surface is slippery. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: When your vehicle is stationary, keep the brake pedal fully pressed when shifting gears. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury, death or property damage.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than a few seconds will limit engine performance, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
POSITIONS
Park (P)
This position locks the driveline and prevents the wheels from turning. Come to a complete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of park (P).
The electric parking brake could apply when you shift to park (P) without the brake pedal fully pressed. The electric parking brake applies when you shift to park (P) on large slopes. The electric parking brake releases with the drive away release function or manually as described in the Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
section. See Electric Parking Brake
Note: A warning tone sounds if you open the driver door and you have not shifted the transmission selector to park (P).
Reverse (R)
WARNING: Move the transmission selector lever to reverse (R) only when your vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle speed.
This position allows your vehicle to move backward. Come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
WARNING: In neutral (N) your vehicle has the ability to roll freely. If you intend to leave your vehicle, make sure you apply the parking brake.
This position allows your vehicle to roll free. Hold the brake pedal down when in this position.
Note: You can start your vehicle in this position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position, and allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears.
253
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
Manual (M)
To select manual mode press the (M) button on the shifter.
Note: In order to activate manual mode your vehicle must be in drive (D).
This position allows you to change gears up or down as preferred using + or buttons on the shifter lever.
To return to the normal drive (D) position, press the (M) button again to exit manual mode.
SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO
GEAR
Center Console Shifter
1.
Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Depress the front button on the shifter and move the gearshift lever into the desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to a complete stop.
4. Depress the front button on the shifter and move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P).
Column Shifter
1.
Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to a complete stop.
4. Pull lever toward the driver and move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P).
MANUALLY SHIFTING GEARS
Shifting Using the Buttons on the
Selector Lever
Pressing the manual (M) button on the shifter allows you to select the gear you prefer. Only the current gear displays. Press the + button to upshift or the – button to downshift. Return the transmission to a different gearshift position to deactivate manual control or press manual (M).
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic transmission gearshift lever. This gives you the ability to change gears up or down, without a clutch, as preferred.
Note: To prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which could cause it to stall, SelectShift still makes some downshifts if it determines that you have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time if it determines that damage to the engine from over-revving does not occur.
Note: SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. Shift manually by pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage could occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting.
254
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
Center Console Shifter
E311242
Column Shifter
E327267
TEMPORARY NEUTRAL MODE
What Is Temporary Neutral Mode
This mode keeps your vehicle in neutral
(N) when you switch your vehicle off. Use this mode if you exit your vehicle or switch your vehicle off at an automatic car wash.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Automatic return to park (P) is delayed when your vehicle is in this mode.
See What Is Automatic Return to Park
Temporary Neutral Mode
Limitations
Your vehicle could shift to park (P) after
30 minutes, or when the vehicle battery charge level is low. Prolonged use of this mode can cause the vehicle battery to run out of charge.
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Failure to follow these instructions could result in vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode
1.
Power your vehicle on.
2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift into neutral (N).
Note: An instructional message appears.
5. Press the manual (M) button.
Note: A confirmation message appears when your vehicle enters the mode.
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
7.
Switch your vehicle off.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: The neutral (N) indicator on the transmission selector may flash in this mode.
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode
1.
Press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P), or power your vehicle on and shift into drive (D) or reverse (R).
255
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
USING PROGRESSIVE RANGE
SELECTION
Progressive range selection gives you the ability to lock out gears from the automatic shifting range. This could provide you with an improved driving experience by reducing transmission shifts, for example, in slippery conditions or steep slopes.
With the transmission in drive (D), press the button to begin to switch the feature on.
Press the button again to continue locking out higher gears. Beginning with the highest gear, the instrument cluster will indicate the current gear and highest gear available.
For example, press the - button twice to lock out 10th and 9th gears.
Note: The instrument cluster will indicate the current gear and highest gear available.
Press the + button to unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears.
Note: The transmission automatically shifts within the gear range you select.
AUTOMATIC RETURN TO
PARK (P)
What Is Automatic Return to Park
(P)
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) if you attempt to exit your vehicle without the transmission in park (P).
How Does Automatic Return to
Park (P) Work
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) when your vehicle is stationary and any of the following occur:
• You switch the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with your seatbelt unlatched.
• You unlatch the driver seatbelt when the driver door is open.
Note: Do not use automatic return to park
(P) when your vehicle is moving, except in
an emergency. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 209).
Automatic Return to Park (P)
Limitations
Automatic return to park may not work if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning.
See an authorized dealer if any of the following occur:
• Door ajar indicator does not illuminate with the driver door open.
• Door ajar indicator illuminates with the driver door closed.
• Transmission not in park message appears with the driver door closed, after you shift out of park (P).
STOWING THE SELECTOR
LEVER - VEHICLES WITH:
CONSOLE SHIFT
Press the stow button to fold down the selector lever. Press the button again to release the selector lever from the stow position to use.
The stow function allows the shifter to lay flat in the console, enabling the use of the working surface tray.
256
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
Manual Park Release Precautions
E311505
E311503
Note: Do not store objects in the selector lever stow bin, and be sure that the bottom selector lever tray mat is flat inside the selector lever stow bin.
Note: If there are objects in the stow bin while stowing the selector lever, the selector lever could come back to the upright park
(P) position.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
What Is Manual Park Release
Manual park release allows you to move your transmission out of the park (P) position in the event of an electrical malfunction or emergency.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully apply the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the stoplamps are working.
Use the manual park release to move your transmission from the park (P) position in the event of an electrical malfunction or
emergency. See Emergency Towing
Note: Do not engage the manual park release with the engine on.
Using Manual Park Release
Activating the Manual Park
Release Cable
1.
Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example, no electrical power available, an external power source may be required to apply the parking brake.
2. Locate the manual park release cable access cover at the bottom of the driver dash lower panel, under the steering wheel.
257
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
7.
Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) for emergency towing purposes.
8. Switch off the ignition.
9. Once safe to do so, and there is no risk that your vehicle will roll, disconnect the negative (black) battery cable from the battery.
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal
Mode
E336473
3. Carefully open the hinged access cover using a plastic type wedge or pry tool at the upper edge of the panel. If done correctly the panel will swing downward.
Note:
Note:
Do not activate the override lever until you are in the driver's seat.
4. Switch ignition on, but do not start your vehicle.
5. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the brake pedal and hold. Do not release.
Pull the tether straight out toward the driver seat until engaged. If done correctly, a message will appear in the instrument cluster.
Note: Do not use excessive force when using the manual park release handle, as it could result in damage to the handle.
Your vehicle is now out of the park
(P) position and is free to roll.
E315156
6. With your foot still fully applied on the brake pedal, disengage the parking
brake. See Electric Parking Brake
E315157
1.
Once it is safe to do so, reconnect the negative (black) battery cable to the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example, no electrical power available, an external power may be required to apply the parking brake.
Note: Do not pull the tether until you are in the driver seat.
3. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the brake pedal and hold, do not release.
Using the tether, pull the handle towards the driver seat until you hit a hard stop.
4. Pull the lever toward the floor until it hits a hard stop, before returning to the stowed position.
Note: Maintain tension on the strap until the lever reaches the stowed position.
5. Return the manual park release cable lever to the stowed position and install the access cover.
258
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic Transmission
6. With your foot fully applied on the brake pedal, start your vehicle. Confirm that your vehicle is in the park (P) position and that the instrument cluster indicates park (P).
Note: If the instrument cluster is not displaying the park (P) position or the instrument cluster displays an error message, apply the parking brake before exiting your vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
7.
Close the access cover.
259
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE WORK
Using the Electronic Shift On the
Fly System
(If Equipped)
This four wheel drive system utilizes a
2-speed Electronic Shift On the Fly (ESOF) transfer case which is also known as a part-time system. This system offers the driver two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive high, and four-wheel drive low as available modes of operation. When either four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low are selected, the system provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or slippery conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. When four-wheel drive low is selected, the system provides additional gearing for increased torque multiplication for conditions like deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. Additionally, the system is capable of recreational flat towing by putting the transfer case into a
neutral position. See Recreationally
Towing Your Vehicle (page 443).
Using the 2-Speed Automatic
Four-Wheel Drive System
(If Equipped)
The 2-speed automatic four-wheel drive system utilizes an electronically controlled on-demand 2-speed transfer case. This system monitors various vehicle sensory inputs to provide an increased level of performance. This system offers the driver two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive auto, four-wheel drive high, and four-wheel drive low as available modes of operation.
When four-wheel drive auto is selected, the system continuously varies power to the front wheels for optimum performance for all on-road conditions. When either four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low are selected, the system provides electronically locked power to the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or slippery conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. When four-wheel drive low is selected, the system provides additional gearing for increased torque multiplication for conditions like deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. Additionally, the system is capable of recreational flat towing by putting the transfer case into a
neutral position. See Recreationally
Towing Your Vehicle (page 443).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
260
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle could be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting stuck or damaging underbody components. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Always maintain steering wheel control, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
Note: Do not use four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and can damage drive components. Four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of four-wheel drive low mode on these surfaces could produce some noise, such as occasional clunks, but should not damage drive components.
When transitioning from consistently loose or slippery surfaces, be sure the four-wheel drive system is not mechanically blocked once on dry, hard surfaced roads in two-wheel drive high.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
LIMITATIONS
Do not use four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and can damage drive components. four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of four low mode on these surfaces could produce some noise
,such as occasional clunks, but should not damage drive components. When transitioning from consistently loose or slippery surfaces, be sure the four-wheel drive system is not mechanically blocked once on dry, hard surfaced roads in two-wheel drive high.
Operating Four-Wheel Drive with a Spare or Mismatched tires
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the spare tire can affect the four-wheel drive system. If there is a significant difference between the size of the spare tire and the remaining tires, you could have limited four-wheel drive functionality.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a four-wheel drive mode turned on.
• Turn on a four-wheel drive mode unless the vehicle is stationary.
• Use a four-wheel drive mode on dry pavement.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, four-wheel drive functionality can be limited, especially when driving in a mechanically locked four-wheel drive mode. You can experience the following:
261
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
• Additional noise from the transfer case or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically locked four-wheel drive mode.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following:
• Comfort and noise.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
Mechanical Shift Blocking
On four-wheel drive vehicles without a four-wheel drive auto selection (ESOF), the transfer case distributes torque to the front wheels by mechanically interlocking the front and rear driveshafts together.
Shifting performance of this type of system can be affected by various external factors including, but not limited to:
• Vehicle acceleration.
• Dissimilar tire sizes.
• Steering input.
If the system detects a mechanical shift block at speed after two-wheel drive high has been selected, a message can appear momentarily that four-wheel drive is unable to disengage one or more of following actions can relieve the mechanical shift block:
• Momentary acceleration.
• Momentary braking.
• Bringing the vehicle to a stop.
• Shifting the transmission to neutral and back to drive.
• Shifting the transmission to reverse and back to drive.
• Driving the vehicle around a tight turn at slow speed.
SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE MODE
E308146
E323655
The four-wheel drive mode control is on the instrument panel.
262
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
To select a four-wheel drive mode, press the four-wheel drive mode control button of the desired mode. You can select two-wheel drive high (2H), four-wheel drive high (4H), or if your vehicle has four-wheel drive auto (4A) at a stop or while driving. Once the shift is complete, the information display will then display the selected four-wheel drive mode. While shifts are in progress, the lights on the four-wheel drive control switch can flash and you could see messages in the information display indicating that a shift is in progress or to release the accelerator pedal to improve shift performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping or while applying the accelerator pedal.
Note: You could hear some noise as the system shifts or engages which is normal.
If the system detects a fault, a warning message appears in the information
display. See Four-Wheel Drive –
Information Messages (page 267).
Shifting to or from Four-Wheel
Drive Low (4L)
To select or exit four-wheel drive low (4L):
1.
Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N)
3. Press the desired four-wheel drive button on the four-wheel drive mode control switch.
The information display will display a message indicating a four-wheel drive shift is in progress. If any of the above shift conditions are not present, the shift will not occur and the information display will display information guiding the driver through the proper shifting procedures. If there is a transfer case tooth blockage a message will display in the information display. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Note: You could hear some noise as the system shifts or engages which is normal.
If the system detects a fault, a warning message appears in the information
display. See Four-Wheel Drive –
Information Messages (page 267).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODES
Two-Wheel Drive High
Two-wheel drive high is for general on-road driving. Power is sent to the rear wheels only.
Two-wheel drive high can turn on or off
based on Drive Mode selection See Drive
Four-Wheel Drive Auto
(If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive Auto provides electronic controlled four-wheel drive with power delivered to the front and rear wheels, as required, for increased traction on varying road conditions. The four-wheel drive auto function varies based on selected Drive
Mode. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page
Note: Four-wheel drive auto can turn on or off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode
263
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive High
Four-Wheel Drive High provides electronically or mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or winter conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. This mode is not for use on dry pavement.
Note: Four-wheel drive high can turn on or off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode
Four-Wheel Drive Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low provides electronically or mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use on low traction surfaces, but does so with additional gearing for increased torque multiplication.
This mode is intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects.
Note: Four-wheel drive low can turn on or off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
INDICATORS
Two-wheel Drive High
Momentarily illuminates when two-wheel drive high is selected.
E181778
Four-wheel Drive Auto
(If Equipped)
Continuously illuminates when four-wheel drive auto is selected.
E181781
Four-wheel Drive High
Continuously illuminates when four-wheel drive high is selected.
E181779
Four-wheel Drive Low
Continuously illuminates when four-wheel drive low is selected.
E181780
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE DRIVING
HINTS
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering can result in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal when changes in vehicle speed are required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration and braking. This could result in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss of vehicle control and personal injury. Use all available road surface to bring your vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there can be a change in the way your vehicle responds to a maneuver, i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking.
264
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
Driving In Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Low gear operation can maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speed. This causes vehicle momentum to work against you and your vehicle could become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Driving Through Mud and Water
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts can cause an imbalance that could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth and avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system gets wet, your vehicle may stall. Once through water, test the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves by applying light pressure to the brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you can use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turnaround because this could cause vehicle roll over. It is better to reverse back to a safe location.
265
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power can cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage overdrive or move the transmission selector lever to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death.
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it cannot stop any faster as braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Anti-Lock Braking System
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning
Lamps
Illuminates when a four-wheel drive or power train fault is present.
Note: When a system fault is present, the system can typically remain in whichever mode was selected prior to the fault condition occurring. It does not default to two-wheel drive in all circumstances. When this warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
266
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive – Information Messages
Message
Check 4x4
4x4 Shift in Progress
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
Shift Delayed Drive Forward
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
4x4 Unable to Disengage. See Manual
Action
A four-wheel drive system fault is present.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The four-wheel drive system is making a shift.
Displays when you attempt to switch to four-wheel drive low mode and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
Displays when you attempt to switch to four-wheel drive low mode and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Displays when you attempt to switch from four-wheel drive low mode and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
Displays when you attempt to switch from four-wheel drive low mode and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Displays when there is a transfer case gear tooth blockage while shifting to or from four-wheel drive low mode or to the neutral state. Place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Displays when the system turns off the clutch due to excessive stress. The system automatically turns on the clutch after it cools.
Displays when the four-wheel drive system detects a mechanical shift block when
shifting out of four-wheel drive high. See
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations (page 261).
267
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
(If Equipped)
Message
4x4 Restored
4X4 Temporarily Locked
Shift to Neutral
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h
To Engage 4x4 Release Accelerator Pedal
Action
Displays when the four-wheel drive system restores to the four-wheel drive auto setting.
Displays when the four-wheel drive system temporarily turns on four-wheel drive high mode from four-wheel drive auto mode after detecting driving conditions that require greater four-wheel drive performance. The system automatically returns to four-wheel drive auto mode after the system no longer detects these driving conditions.
Displays when the system requires an additional transmission shift to neutral (N) to complete a transfer case shift.
Displays when you command a four-wheel drive shift during conditions which are potentially harmful to the driveline components
Displays when the four-wheel drive system requests that you release the accelerator pedal to complete a four-wheel drive shift.
See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode
268
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE ELECTRONIC
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL
The electronic locking differential is a device housed in the rear axle, and when activated, allows both wheels on a specific axle to turn at the same speed. The electronic locking differential can provide additional traction should your vehicle become stuck. You can activate the differential electronically and shift it on the fly within the operating speed range. The electronic differential will disengage when the vehicle speed exceeds a set value and it will reengage when the vehicle speed
based on certain selected drive modes.
See Selecting a Drive Mode (page 328).
The electronic locking differential is for use in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition where you need maximum traction.
Note: The electronic locking differential is for off-road use only and is not for use on dry pavement. Using the electronic locking differential on dry pavement will result in increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL PRECAUTIONS
Operating the Electronic Locking
Differential with a Spare or
Mismatched Tires
On vehicles with an electronic locking differential, the size of the spare tire can affect performance of the system. If there is a significant difference between the two rear tires, you may have limited electronic locking differential functionality. If the system has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction when rolling. We recommend engaging and disengaging the electronic locking differential at a stop when you mount a spare on the rear axle.
SWITCHING THE ELECTRONIC
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ON
AND OFF - 4X4
The button to activate and deactivate the electronic locking differential is in the center of the drive mode rotary switch.
E323655
269
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential
(If Equipped)
To manually activate or deactivate the electronic locking differential, press the electronic locking differential button.
Note: The electronic locking differential can activate or deactivate automatically based on speed, four-wheel drive mode, and drive
mode selection. See Selecting a Drive
E308146
4X4 Rear Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability
Drive Modes Maximum Engagement Speed
Automatic Disengagement Speed
Automatic Re-
Engagement Speed
Normal (2H, 4A 2 , 4H)
20 mph (30 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (30 km/h)
Eco (2H, 4A
2
, 4H)
20 mph (30 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (30 km/h)
Sport (2H, 4A
2
, 4H)
20 mph (30 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (30 km/h)
20 mph (30 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (30 km/h)
Slippery (2H, 4A
2
,
4H)
Deep Snow/Sand
(4H, 4L) 1
Mud/Ruts (4H, 4L)
1
No Speed Limit No Speed Limit No Speed Limit
Rock Crawl (4L)
1
1
Automatically engages when these drive modes are selected. You have the ability to manually override the automatic engagement by pressing the electronic locking differential button.
2
If available for 4A drive modes.
270
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential
(If Equipped)
4WD Mode Maximum Engagement Speed
No speed Limit Four-Wheel Drive
Low (4L)
Note: The electronic locking differential may not engage if you press your accelerator pedal during an engagement attempt. A message could display in the instrument display guiding you to release the accelerator pedal.
Note: If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
Note: The electronic locking differential is for off-road use only and is not for use on dry pavement. Using the electronic locking differential on dry pavement results in increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
Automatic Disengagement Speed
No speed Limit
Automatic Re-
Engagement Speed
No speed Limit
SWITCHING THE ELECTRONIC
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ON
AND OFF - 4X2
E333748
To manually activate or deactivate the electronic locking differential, press the electronic locking differential button.
The button to activate and deactivate the electronic locking differential is located in the center of the Drive mode rotary switch.
4X2 Rear Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability
Maximum Engagement
Speed
20 mph (30 km/h)
Automatic Disengagement
Speed
25 mph (41 km/h)
Automatic Re-Engagement
Speed
20 mph (30 km/h)
Note: The electronic locking differential may not engage if you press your accelerator pedal during an engagement attempt. A message could display in the instrument display guiding you to release the accelerator pedal.
Note: If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
271
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electronic Locking Differential
(If Equipped)
Note: The electronic locking differential is for off-road use only and is not for use on dry pavement. Using the electronic locking differential on dry pavement results in increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL INDICATORS
Amber Color: This indicator
E325779 on, indicating that both rear wheel axle shafts are locked together providing added traction.
illuminates in amber when the electronic locking differential is
Gray Color: This indicator illuminates in gray when the electronic locking differential has been requested to activate but the vehicle speed is too high, or the left and right wheel speed difference is too high during an engagement attempt.
If the electronic locking differential has been selected, but has malfunctioned, a message appears in the information display. See your authorized dealer for assistance.
Note: If the vehicle is experiencing an anti-lock braking event, the electronic locking differential may momentarily disengage.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Electronic Locking Differential – Information Messages
Message
To Engage Locking
Differential Slow to XX mph/km/h
To Engage Locking
Differential Release
Accelerator Pedal
Check Locking Differential
Description and Action
The electronic locking differential has been requested and will engage when the speed condition is met.
Release the accelerator pedal in order to engage.
An electronic locking differential system fault is present.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
272
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It may take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
Anti-Lock Braking System
Limitations
The anti-lock braking system does not eliminate the risk of crash when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake pedal could pulse and could travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.
BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR
Brake over accelerator allows you to slow your vehicle if the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Shift the transmission into park (P), switch the power off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If nothing is found, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID
RESERVOIR
See Under Hood Overview (page 456).
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician.
273
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
WARNING: The brake system could be affected if the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark or above the MAX mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
BRAKES –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Brakes – Warning Lamps
If the ABS indicator illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle continues to have normal braking without the anti-lock braking system function. See an authorized dealer.
It also momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
E170684
1.
Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see where the brake fluid level is relative to the MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
See Brake Fluid Specification (page 560).
E270480
The brake indicator momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. It may also illuminate when you apply the parking brake and the ignition is on. If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, make sure the parking brake is disengaged. If the parking brake is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system fault. See an authorized dealer.
Brakes – Frequently Asked
Questions
Is it normal for my brakes to make noise?
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding, or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake lining could be worn-out.
Have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
274
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
There is an electrical motor sound when I hit the brakes. Is this normal?
Yes, that sound is the electric brake booster operating. This sound is normal when operating your vehicle's brakes.
Note: Brake dust could accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning Wheels (page
275
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electric Parking Brake
WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake is used to hold your vehicle on slopes and flat roads.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended distances with the parking brake applied, you could cause damage to the brake system.
E267156
The switch is on the lower part of the instrument panel.
1.
Pull the switch up.
The red warning lamp flashes during operation and illuminates when the parking brake is applied.
Note: You can apply the electric parking brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
apply when you shift into park (P). See Park
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE IN AN
EMERGENCY
You can use the electric parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
1.
Pull the switch up and hold it.
The electric parking brake continues to slow your vehicle down unless you release the switch.
The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone sounds and the stoplamps turn on when you use the electric parking brake in an emergency.
Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving, except in an emergency.
MANUALLY RELEASING THE
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
1.
Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Push the switch down.
The red warning lamp turns off.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
1.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Pull the switch upward and hold it.
3. Shift into gear.
4. Press the accelerator pedal until engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
5. Release the switch and pull away in a normal manner.
AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING
THE ELECTRIC PARKING
BRAKE
1.
Close the driver door.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in a normal manner.
276
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electric Parking Brake
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
AUDIBLE WARNING
Sounds when the parking brake is on and your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone continues after you have released the parking brake, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
RELEASING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE IF THE
VEHICLE BATTERY HAS RUN
OUT OF CHARGE
WARNING: The electric parking brake does not operate if the vehicle battery has run out of charge.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery has run out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps
Brake System
E270480
It illuminates red when you apply the parking brake and your vehicle is on. If the lamp flashes when the parking brake has been released, this indicates the parking brake system requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
Electric Parking Brake
When the lamp illuminates yellow, it indicates a malfunction
E146190 in the electric parking brake.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
277
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Electric Parking Brake
Electric Parking Brake – Information Messages
Message
To Release: Press Brake and
Switch
Park Brake Use Switch to
Release
Release Park Brake
Park Brake Not Applied
Park Brake Not Released
Park Brake Maintenance Mode
Park Brake Limited Function
Service Required
Park Brake Malfunction Service
Now
Action
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be performed.
Perform a manual release.
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release the parking brake before continuing driving.
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.
The electric parking brake is not fully released.
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer.
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality may still be available. Contact an authorized dealer.
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
278
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Reverse Braking Assist
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS REVERSE BRAKING
ASSIST
Reverse Braking Assist reduces impact damage or avoids a collision completely by using the sensors on the rear of your vehicle.
HOW DOES REVERSE
BRAKING ASSIST WORK
Reverse Braking Assist functions when in reverse (R) and traveling at a speed of
1–7 mph (2–12 km/h).
If the system detects an obstacle behind your vehicle, it provides a warning through the rear parking aid or cross traffic alert system.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system. This may cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: Some situations and objects prevent hazard detection. For example low or direct sunlight, inclement weather, unconventional vehicle types, and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system with accessories that extend beyond the front or rear of your vehicle, for example a trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is not able to make corrections for the additional length of the accessories.
The system only applies the brakes for a short period of time when an event occurs.
Act as soon as you notice the brakes apply in order to remain in control of the vehicle.
Note: Certain add-on devices around the bumper or fascia may create false alerts.
For example, large trailer hitches, bicycle or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that may block the normal detection zone of the system. Remove the add-on device to prevent false alerts.
Note: The system does not react to small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground.
Note: The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering.
279
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Reverse Braking Assist
(If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned or bent, it could alter the sensing zone causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension changes can impact the angle of the sensors and may change the normal detection zone of the system resulting in inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer, the system may detect the trailer and provide an alert, or the system turns off. If the system does not turn off, switch the system off manually after you connect the trailer.
Note: You may experience reduced system performance on road surfaces that limit deceleration. For example, roads with ice, loose gravel, mud or sand.
SWITCHING REVERSE
BRAKING ASSIST ON AND OFF
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Switch Reverse Brake Assist on or off.
Note: The system is unavailable when rear parking aid or cross traffic alert is off.
OVERRIDING REVERSE
BRAKING ASSIST
There could be instances when unexpected or unwanted braking occurs.
Firmly pressing the accelerator pedal or switching the feature off overrides the system.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST
INDICATORS
If the system determines that a collision with an obstacle may occur, full braking may apply. Bring your vehicle to a stop a safe distance away from the obstacle.
E293490
A message and warning indicator appear when the system applies the brakes.
REVERSE BRAKING ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
Reverse Braking Assist – Information Messages
Message
Reverse Brake Assist Not Available See
Manual
Reverse Brake Assist Fault
Reverse Brake Assist Off
Action
Make sure that all doors, liftgate and hood are closed. Drive the vehicle on a straight road for a short period. If message remains, contact an authorized dealer.
Displays when a system error has occurred.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Displays when reverse brake assist is off.
Make sure the parking aids and cross traffic systems are on.
280
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Reverse Braking Assist
(If Equipped)
Reverse Braking Assist –
Frequently Asked Questions
Why is reverse braking assist unavailable?
• Make sure that all doors, liftgate and hood are closed. Drive the vehicle on a straight road for a short period. If the message remains, contact an authorized dealer.
• Make sure the cross traffic alert system
is on. See How Does Cross Traffic
• Make sure the rear parking aid system
is on. See What is the Rear Parking
•
Make sure traction control is on. See
• The vehicle has sustained a rear end impact. Contact an authorized dealer to have the sensors checked for proper coverage and operation.
• An ABS, traction control or stability control event may have occurred.
Reverse braking assist resumes operation when the event is complete.
• Make sure the rear view camera and
360 degree camera are not dirty or obstructed. If dirty, clean the camera.
If the message still appears after cleaning the camera, wait a short time and the message should clear. If the message does not clear, contact an authorized dealer.
• Make sure there are no blocked or
faulted sensors. See How Does Cross
Traffic Alert Work (page 344).
• You recently had your vehicle serviced, or the battery disconnected. Drive your vehicle a short distance to resume system operation.
• Reverse braking assist does not function when you connect a trailer.
Operation resumes when you disconnect the trailer.
Note: If the answers to why the system is unavailable do not assist in returning reverse braking assist to available, have the system checked as soon as possible.
281
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hill Start Assist
WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST
Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist makes it easier for you to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without using the parking brake.
HOW DOES HILL START
ASSIST WORK
When the system activates, your vehicle remains stationary for a few seconds after you release the brake pedal. This gives you time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. The brakes release when the engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope.
HILL START ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
HILL START ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hill Start Assist – Information
Messages
Message Action
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Displays when system is not available. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system turns off if there is a malfunction or if you excessively rev the engine.
282
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Auto Hold
HOW DOES AUTO HOLD WORK
Auto Hold applies the brakes to hold your vehicle after you stop it and release the brake pedal. This can help when waiting on a hill or in traffic.
SWITCHING AUTO HOLD ON
AND OFF
WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
You can switch the system on or off by accessing the menu in the SYNC display screen.
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
Note: You can only switch the system on after you close the driver door, and fasten your seatbelt.
Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: Make sure you switch the system off before using an automatic car wash.
USING AUTO HOLD
1.
Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
The auto hold active indicator illuminates in the information display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system holds your vehicle at a standstill. The auto hold active indicator remains illuminated in the information display.
3. Pull away in the normal manner. The system releases the brakes and the auto hold active indicator switches off.
Note: The system only activates if you apply enough brake pressure on the brake pedal.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system could apply the electric parking brake. The brake system warning lamp illuminates. The electric parking brake releases when you
press the accelerator pedal. See
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Note: The system switches off if you shift into reverse (R) and press the brake pedal.
There could be actions that can cause the auto hold system not to work when the following occur:
• When you use active park assist.
• Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
• The driver door is open.
• You have not fastened your seatbelt.
• You shift into reverse (R) before the system is active.
AUTO HOLD INDICATORS
E323448
Illuminates when the system is active.
E323449
Illuminates when the system is on but cannot hold your vehicle at a standstill at this particular time.
283
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Traction Control
WHAT IS TRACTION CONTROL
The traction control system helps to avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
HOW DOES TRACTION
CONTROL WORK
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
SWITCHING TRACTION
CONTROL ON AND OFF
WARNING: The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
E327252
The traction control system turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active.
The button for the stability and traction control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a message and an illuminated icon appear on the instrument cluster.
Press the switch again to turn the traction control system back on to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See What Is
TRACTION CONTROL
INDICATOR
E138639
If the indicator does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or remains on when the engine is running, this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
E130458
The traction control off indicator illuminates when you switch the traction control system off, or when an alternative stability control mode is selected that requires the traction control off.
284
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Traction Control
TRACTION CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Traction Control – Information Messages
Message
Service AdvanceTrac
AdvanceTrac Off
AdvanceTrac On
Traction Control Off
Traction Control On
Action
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it off.
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it on.
The status of the traction control system after you switched it off.
The status of the traction control system after you switched it on.
285
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
HOW DOES STABILITY
CONTROL WORK
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It's always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator's ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
If a driving condition activates either the stability control or traction control you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic stability control enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
Roll stability control enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually.
Curve Control
Curve control enhances your vehicle’s ability to follow the road when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway.
Curve control operates by reducing engine power and, if necessary, applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually.
Side Wind Stabilization
Side wind stabilization is an advanced feature that works by carefully applying the brakes on one side of the vehicle to reduce the effect of a side wind gust on the vehicle's path.
286
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
Torque Vectoring by Brakes
Torque vectoring control applies brake torque on the inner driven wheel in a curve for better traction to avoid an understeer, or oversteer situation. Unlike electronic stability control, enhanced torque vectoring control does not slow the vehicle. It helps control excessive wheel slip and gives the vehicle improved cornering agility.
Traction Control
Traction control enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels
by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
See What Is Traction Control (page 284).
SWITCHING STABILITY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
The system turns on each time you switch the ignition on.
You can switch the electronic stability control system off by pressing and holding the ESC off button for over 5 seconds, or you can press the button again to switch the system on.
Shifting the transmission into reverse (R) will disable the system.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Switching
Traction Control On and Off (page 284).
B
B
B
A
A B
A
E72903
A
B
Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route.
Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface.
287
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with Roll Stability Control
Stability Control
OFF Light
Roll Stability
Control
3
Electronic
Stability
Control
3
Traction Control
System
3
Default at startup
Illuminated during bulb check illuminated
Enabled
Enabled
3
Enabled
Button pressed momentarily
Button Pressed and held for 5 -
15 seconds illuminated
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
3
2
Disabled
Disabled
1
1
Button not pressed and transfer case is switched to 4x4
Low or put into
Rock Crawl
Mode illuminated Enabled Disabled
Disabled
1
1 The Traction Control system can still be enabled but with tighter or looser thresholds.
2 When you press and hold the button, a progress bar will display to show the button hold time progress.
3 Functions can vary depending on what selectable drive mode the vehicle is currently in.
STABILITY CONTROL
INDICATOR
If it does not illuminate when you
E138639 switch the power on, or remains on, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
288
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hill Descent Control
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed while descending steep slopes in various surface conditions.
HOW DOES HILL DESCENT
CONTROL WORK
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill slopes between
2–20 mph (3–32 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains on but the descent speed cannot be set or maintained.
Note: The system does not function below
2 mph (3 km/h).
The system requires a cool down interval after a period of sustained use. Hill descent control provides a warning in the message center and a tone sounds when the system is about to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as needed to maintain descent speed.
Note: The amount of time that the system can remain active before cooling varies with conditions.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system does not control speed in low traction conditions or extremely steep slopes. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission.
SWITCHING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL ON AND OFF
E163171
Press the button on the instrument panel. A light illuminates and a tone sounds when the system is active.
SETTING THE HILL DESCENT
SPEED
To increase or decrease the descent speed, press the accelerator or brake pedal, or use the SET + and SET buttons on the steering wheel. Once you reach the preferred speed remove your feet from the pedals.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
INDICATOR
Illuminates when you switch hill descent control on.
E163171
289
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Hill Descent Control
(If Equipped)
HILL DESCENT CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Hill Descent Control – Information Messages
Message
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
Hill Descent Control Fault
Action
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met.
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent mode.
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must resume control.
A hill descent system fault is present.
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling
Hill Descent Control not available with Cruise Control Active
The hill descent system cannot activate while Cruise
Control is actively controlling speed.
290
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS ACTIVE DRIVE
ASSIST
Active drive assist keeps your vehicle centered in the lane when using adaptive cruise control.
HOW DOES ACTIVE DRIVE
ASSIST WORK
Active drive assist uses cameras to monitor your vehicle position within a lane and applies steering support to keep your vehicle centered in the lane.
When active, active drive assist uses a driver facing camera and infrared lighting to monitor your eyes and head position to detect if you are distracted. If the system determines you are distracted, it alerts you to return your eyes to the road.
A B A
E319812
A
B
Lighting area.
Camera.
Note: When active drive assist is active, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, camera data may be recorded through the vehicle event data
recorder. See Event Data (page 27).
Note: No data is recorded under normal driving conditions.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Obstructions to the driver facing camera or infrared lighting could prevent the system from properly operating. Keep the camera and lighting areas free from obstruction. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system if any changes or modifications to the steering wheel have been made. Any changes or modifications to the steering wheel could affect the functionality or performance of the system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
291
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist
(If Equipped)
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
REQUIREMENTS
Active drive assist only activates when all of the following occur:
• Active drive assist is enabled in your
information and entertainment screen.
See Active Drive Assist Settings
• Adaptive cruise control is on.
• The system detects both lane markings.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel.
• Your eyes are on the road.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Any of the following conditions could result in active drive assist not operating correctly:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or too wide.
• The system does not detect at least one lane marking or when lanes merge or split.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Using the system in areas under construction.
• When modifications to the steering system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
• If you have a pre-existing eye condition, such as an eye misalignment, or have had eye surgery.
Note: The steering assistance is limited and may not be sufficient for all driving situations.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system could deviate from the center line.
Note: The information provided by the navigation map data could be inaccurate or out of date.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
SETTINGS
Enabling Active Drive Assist
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Cruise Control .
4. Press Lane Centering Assist .
SWITCHING ACTIVE DRIVE
ASSIST ON AND OFF
Switching Active Drive Assist On
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E308131
Using the adaptive cruise control and lateral support buttons, ensure both systems are active.
Active drive assist activates.
E144529
Switching Active Drive Assist Off
E308131
E144529
Press either the lateral support or adaptive cruise control button when system is active or in standby mode.
Active drive assist turns off through each ignition cycle.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST ALERTS
When active drive assist is providing hands-on driving and detects no steering activity for a certain period of time, the system alerts you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
292
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist
(If Equipped)
When active drive assist is providing hands-on driving and detects you are not looking at the road for a certain period of time, the system alerts you to return your eyes to the road.
If you do not react to the warnings, active drive assist cancels, quickly activates and releases the brakes, and slows your vehicle down to low speeds while maintaining steering control.
If your vehicle slows down and you resume control, a message appears to prompt you to press the accelerator pedal to allow the system to resume.
Note: The system disables until the next key cycle if repeated inactivity is detected.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
When an external condition cancels active drive assist, for example, no lane markings available, a tone sounds and a message appears in the instrument cluster.
If your vehicle starts to slow
E308130 down, you must take control of steering and press and release the button to reactivate active drive assist.
System cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane markings.
• Lane markings are crossed.
• Your eyes are not on the road or your hands are not the steering wheel.
If you have your hands on the steering wheel and your eyes are on the road when the feature is active and a cancellation occurs, the system sounds a tone and displays a cancelled graphic in the instrument cluster.
If you are not paying attention to the road or your hands are not on the steering wheel and a cancellation occurs, the system will display a message and a tone sounds until you resume control. If you do not resume control in time, active drive assist quickly activates and releases the brakes, and slows your vehicle down to low speeds while maintaining steering control. If your vehicle slows down and you resume control, a message appears to prompt you to press the accelerator pedal to allow the system to resume.
Note: The system disables until the next key cycle if repeated inactivity is detected.
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST
INDICATORS
E297977
When on, the color of the indicator changes to indicate the status.
Gray indicates active drive assist is on but inactive.
Green indicates active drive assist is active and applying continuous steering support.
Hands-On Driving Support
Available
E310620
When this indicator is present, you must keep your hands on the steering wheel.
293
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Drive Assist
(If Equipped)
ACTIVE DRIVE ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Message
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
Resume Control
Watch the Road
Active Drive Assist Not Available
Press Accelerator Pedal to Resume
Active Drive Assist – Information
Messages
Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all messages display or are available.
Action
Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and provide steering input.
The system is going to cancel and you must take control.
Return your attention to the road.
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available. If the message continues to display, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Press the accelerator pedal and follow the prompts.
Note: Certain messages could be abbreviated or shortened depending on which cluster type you have.
294
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering
Precautions
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the vehicle off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the vehicle on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control.
Adapt your speed and driving behavior according to reduced steering assist.
Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and damage to the steering system. If this occurs, you will not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually nor will it cause damage to the system. Normal steering and driving allows the system to cool down and steering assist returns to normal.
Note: There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
Electric Power Steering Adaptive
Steering
(If Equipped)
Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS)
The adaptive steering system changes the steering ratio with changes to vehicle speed, optimizing the steering response in all conditions. The system also changes when you switch on the transmission tow/haul feature. When you select the tow/haul button, the adaptive steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds, while maintaining the ease of parking and maneuverability at low speeds.
Note: The adaptive steering system continuously monitors for faults. If the system detects a fault, a message appears in the information display. If a red warning message displays, stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. The message could clear if the fault is no longer present. If an adaptive steering system warning message appears each time you start your vehicle, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Note: The system is designed with a locking device. It remains mechanically locked at a fixed steering ratio with the lock engaged.
You may notice a click when you turn your vehicle on or off.
Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power or detects a fault when you are driving, the system shuts down and you retain a normal steering function with a fixed steering ratio.
During this time it is possible that the steering wheel could not be straight when the vehicle is driving straight ahead. In addition, you could notice that the steering wheel angle required to steer your vehicle could be different.
295
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering
Note: During parking maneuvers, the adaptive steering system balances the driver work load for various steering wheel inputs and vehicle loading conditions. Under extreme operating conditions the system locking device could engage. This strategy prevents overheating and permanent damage to the adaptive steering system.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation.
Adaptive Learning
(If Equipped)
Adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and crash avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems.
STEERING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Steering – Warning Indicators
The adaptive steering system indicator illuminates if the
E223375 system detects a fault during the continuous diagnostic checks.
Note: If a red warning message displays, stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Steering – Information Messages
Message
Steering Fault Service Now
Steering Loss Stop Safely
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now
Action
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The power steering system is not working.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
296
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
(If Equipped)
PARKING AID PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb reflection. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system. This may cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not detect small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: The parking aid system can only assist you to detect objects when your vehicle is moving at parking speeds. To help avoid personal injury you must take care when using the parking aid system.
WARNING: The system may not function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle, the rear parking aid detects the trailer and provides an alert. Disable the parking aid when you connect a trailer to prevent the alert.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed around the bumper or fascia may create false alerts, for example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that could block the normal detection zone of the parking aid system. Aftermarket spare tires or spare tire covers mounted to the rear tailgate could cause false alerts from the park aid system. Remove the add-on device to prevent false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system's accuracy can be affected.
Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: When using a programmed MyKey
you cannot switch this off. See MyKey™
REAR PARKING AID (If
Equipped)
What is the Rear Parking Aid
Reverse Sensing System
Rear parking sensors detect objects behind your vehicle when in reverse (R).
Rear Parking Aid Limitations
There is a decreased coverage area at the outer corners.
When using a programmed MyKey, you cannot switch the rear parking aid off.
297
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
(If Equipped)
The rear parking aid sensors are active when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 71 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
The rear parking aid detects large objects when you shift into reverse (R) and any of the following occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a low speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a low speed and an object is moving towards your vehicle, for example another vehicle at a low speed.
Locating the Rear Parking Aid
Sensors
E231381
The rear parking aid sensors are in the rear bumper.
Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle approaches an object. As your vehicle moves closer to an object, the rate of the tone increases. The warning tone continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the rear bumper.
If your vehicle remains stationary for a few seconds, the audible warning turns off. If your vehicle moves backward the tone sounds again.
Note: When the parking aid system sounds a tone, the audio system could reduce the set volume.
FRONT PARKING AID (If
Equipped)
What is the Front Parking Aid
Front parking sensors detect objects in front of your vehicle.
Front Parking Aid Limitations
The front parking aid sensors are active when your vehicle is in any position other than park (P) and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 27.6 in
(70 cm) from the bumper.
If your vehicle is in reverse (R), the front parking aid detects objects when your vehicle is moving at a low speed or an object is moving toward your vehicle and provides an audio warning, for example another vehicle at a low speed. Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the audio warning stops after a few seconds. Visual indication is always active in reverse (R).
If your vehicle is in any forward gear, the front parking aid provides audible warnings and visual indication when your vehicle is moving at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or below and the system detects an object within the detection zone. Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the visual indication and audio warning stops after a few seconds.
298
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the front and rear sensors provide visual indication only when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and obstacles are detected inside the detection areas.
Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the visual indication and audio warning stops after a few seconds.
Locating the Front Parking Aid
Sensors
E310332
The front parking aid sensors are in the front bumper.
Front Parking Aid Audible
Warnings
A warning tone sounds when there is an object within 27.6 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. As your vehicle moves closer to an object, the rate of the tone increases.
The warning tone continuously sounds when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from your vehicle, visual indication remains on.
SIDE PARKING AID (If
Equipped)
What is the Side Parking Aid
The front and rear outermost parking aid sensors map objects that are near to the sides of your vehicle.
Side Parking Aid Limitations
The sensor coverage is up to 24 in (60 cm) from the sides of your vehicle.
The side parking aid may not function if:
• You switch your vehicle on, off and back on within a few seconds.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system activates.
• The traction control system activates.
Note: If you switch traction control off, the side sensing system also turns off.
To reinitialize the system, drive the length of your vehicle.
The side parking aid does not detect an object that is moving toward the side of your vehicle, for example another vehicle moving at a low speed, if it does not pass a front or rear parking aid sensor.
If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the side sensing system provides visual indication only when your vehicle is moving below
7 mph (12 km/h) and there is a front or rear park aid obstacle detected, and the side obstacle is within 24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the visual indication stops after a few seconds.
299
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
(If Equipped)
Locating the Side Parking Aid
Sensors
PARKING AID INDICATORS
E310321
The side parking sensors are in the front and rear bumpers.
Side Parking Aid Audible Warnings
When the side parking aid detects an object within the coverage area and the driving path of your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. As your vehicle moves closer to the object, the rate of the tone increases.
E310320
The system provides object distance indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object decreases, the indicator blocks illuminate and move toward the vehicle icon.
• If there is no object detected, the distance indicator blocks are grey.
Visual indication remains on when the transmission is in reverse (R). When you stop your vehicle, visual indication turns off after four seconds.
If the parking aids are not available, the side distance indicator blocks do not display.
300
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
(If Equipped)
PARKING AIDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Parking Aids – Information
Messages
Message
Check Front Park Aid
If a fault is present in the parking aids, a warning message appears in the instrument cluster or the information and entertainment display.
Check Rear Park Aid
Front Park Aid On Off
Rear Park Aid On Off
Action
The system detects a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The system detects a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Displays the park aid status.
Displays the park aid status.
301
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear View Camera
WHAT IS THE REAR VIEW
CAMERA
The rear view camera provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle when the transmission is in reverse (R).
E332186
The rear view camera button is on the instrument panel.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing. This might not provide adequate coverage and you might not see some objects. In some vehicles, the guide lines may disappear when you connect the trailer tow connector.
LOCATING THE REAR VIEW
CAMERA
The rear view camera is on the tailgate. It provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle.
REAR VIEW CAMERA GUIDE
LINES
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image could be incorrect. All guide lines disappear when the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving.
E306774
A. Active guide lines.
B. Centerline.
302
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear View Camera
C. Fixed guide line: Green zone.
D. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.
E. Fixed guide line: Red zone.
F. Rear bumper.
Active guide lines only show with fixed guide lines. To use active guide lines, turn the steering wheel to point the guide lines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position changes while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the intended path.
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight.
Use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects get closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle.
Note: Active guide lines and fixed guide lines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if the active or fixed guide lines are on.
Note: Not all camera modes work properly without an auxiliary camera.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
SETTINGS
Zooming the Rear View Camera In and Out
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature.
Selectable settings for this feature are zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the symbol on the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is zoom off.
This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Note: Zooming in also engages park hold which applies the electric park brake when you shift to park (P). When you press the zoom button, the electronic park hold
button illuminates on the touchscreen. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you enable manual zoom.
Switching Rear View Camera Delay
On and Off
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Rear View Camera .
4. Switch Rear View Camera Delay on or off.
303
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear View Camera
When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
304
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA
The 360 degree camera system consists of front, side and rear cameras which provide visibility around your vehicle.
HOW DOES THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA WORK
The 360 Degree Camera system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in front of or behind your vehicle.
• Helps you when parallel parking and centering in a parking space.
• Provides a cross traffic view in front of and behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of the area outside your vehicle, including the blind spots and obstacles near your vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The 360 degree camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of the windows, and checking the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving.
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
LIMITATIONS
Note: Use caution if a door is ajar. The 360 degree camera could be out of position and the image could be incorrect.
LOCATING THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERAS
Cargo Bed Camera
Rear View Camera
The rear view camera is on the tailgate. It provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle.
Front View Camera
The front view camera is in the grille. It provides a video image of the area in front of your vehicle.
Side View Camera
The side view camera is on the outside mirror. It provides a video image of the area on the sides of your vehicle to aid you when parking or when backing up a trailer.
305
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera
(If Equipped)
Bed Camera
The bed camera is mounted within the high-mount stop lamp. It displays the contents of your truck bed. The camera contains a dynamic guideline to help locate the center of your vehicle. This view can be accessed while in drive (D) or reverse
(R).
Auxiliary Camera
The auxiliary camera is a variant of the rear view camera and is accessed by pressing the AUX button on the display screen when moving in reverse (R) or in drive (D). It displays a rear view image from the back of a trailer while in reverse.
360 DEGREE CAMERA GUIDE
LINES
Note: Active guide lines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R).
E306774
A. Active guide lines.
B. Centerline.
C. Fixed guide line: Green zone.
D. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.
E. Fixed guide line: Red zone.
F. Rear bumper.
Active guide lines only show with fixed guide lines. Turn the steering wheel to point the guide lines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position changes when reversing, your vehicle could deviate from the intended path.
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight.
306
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera
(If Equipped)
Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects get closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle.
Keep Out Zone
E310341
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the yellow dotted lines running parallel to your vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
SETTINGS
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
On and Off
E332186
The 360 degree camera system button is on the instrument panel. The front and rear cameras have multiple screens which consist of:
• Normal view.
• Normal view with 360.
• Split view.
• Bed camera.
• Auxiliary camera.
Note: The rear view camera activates when you switch into reverse (R). Additional views are then accessible on the touchscreen.
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), the front images display when the button is pressed. When in reverse (R), only the rear images display when the button is pressed.
Note: Not all cameras are available.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns off when your vehicle is in motion at low speed, except when in reverse (R).
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
View
Press to access the different camera views.
E337002
E336516
E336517
E310996
Front normal view provides an image of what is directly in front of your vehicle.
Front split view provides an extended view of what is in front of your vehicle.
Normal + 360 view contains the normal camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
E310967
Rear normal view provides an image of what is directly behind your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view provides an extended view of what is behind your vehicle.
Bed camera shows the truck bed.
E310995
E311776
Trailer AUX camera shows a rear view camera image of what is behind your trailer. This camera needs to be purchased and installed separately.
307
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
360 Degree Camera
(If Equipped)
Trailer reverse guidance shows
E310965
the sides of your truck and trailer.
E224485
Zooms in on the image and park
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
Zooms in on the 360 degree image.
E337359
308
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST
Assists you with parking in and out of parking spaces.
HOW DOES ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST WORK
Active park assist uses sensors to detect parking spaces. Active park assist controls steering, acceleration, braking and shifting as required to maneuver into or out of a parking space when activate.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system with accessories that extend beyond the front or rear of your vehicle, for example a trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is not able to make corrections for the additional length of the accessories.
SWITCHING ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST ON AND OFF
Press the active park assist button, then press the active park assist icon on the touchscreen to bring up full screen notifications.
Press the soft keys on the touchscreen to switch between the parallel park in, perpendicular park in, or parallel park out parking modes.
Cancelling Active Park Assist
To cancel parking assistance at any time, shift out of neutral (N).
Pausing Active Park Assist
To pause parking assistance at any time, release the active park assist button.
If you open the passenger or rear doors, active park assist pauses.
To resume parking, press and hold the button again.
ENTERING A PARALLEL
PARKING SPACE
1.
Press the active park assist button.
Note: The system detects other vehicles and curbs to find a parking space.
309
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist
(If Equipped)
2. Use the turn signal lever to search for a parking space on the driver or passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not use the turn signal lever, the system searches for a parking space on the passenger side of your vehicle.
3. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft
(1 m) away from and parallel to the other parked vehicles when searching for a parking space.
Note: A tone sounds and a message appears in the information and entertainment display when active park assist finds a suitable parking space.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Release the steering wheel and shift into neutral (N).
6. Press and hold the active park assist button.
7.
Release the brake pedal to allow your vehicle to park.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: When parallel parking between objects, the system parks closer to the object in front of your vehicle to allow easier access to the luggage compartment.
Note: When parking is complete, your vehicle shifts into park (P).
ENTERING A PERPENDICULAR
PARKING SPACE
1.
Press the active park assist button.
Note: Active park assist does not recognize parking space lines and centers your vehicle between objects.
2. Press the active park assist icon on the touchscreen.
3. Select perpendicular parking.
4. Use the turn signal lever to search for a parking space on the driver or passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not use the turn signal lever, the system searches for a parking space on the passenger side of your vehicle.
5. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft
(1 m) away from and perpendicular to the other parked vehicles when searching for a parking space.
Note: A tone sounds and a message appears in the information and entertainment display when active park assist finds a parking space.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7.
Release the steering wheel and shift into neutral (N).
8. Press and hold the active park assist button.
9. Release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to park.
Note: Active park assist backs your vehicle into parking spaces.
Note: Active park assist aligns the front end of your vehicle with the lane side of the object next to it.
Note: When the system detects only one object, it allows enough distance to open the door on either side.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: When parking is complete, your vehicle shifts into park (P).
EXITING A PARKING SPACE
Active park assist only assists leaving parallel parking spaces.
1.
Press the active park assist button.
2. Press the active park assist icon on the touchscreen.
310
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist
(If Equipped)
3. Select parallel park exit.
4. Use the turn signal to choose the direction to exit the parking space.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Release the steering wheel and shift into neutral (N).
7.
Release the parking brake.
8. Press and hold the active park assist button.
9. Release the brake pedal to allow your vehicle to move.
Note: After active park assist drives your vehicle to a position where you can exit the parking space in a forward movement, a message appears instructing you to take full control of your vehicle.
10.
Take control of your vehicle.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at any time by pressing the brake pedal.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Active Park Assist – Information
Messages
Message
Active Park Fault
Action
The system requires service.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Active Park Assist – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does active park assist not operate correctly?
The system is unable to detect a vehicle, curb or object to park next to or in between. The system needs boundary objects to operate correctly.
Why does active park assist not search for a parking space?
You have switched traction control off.
Why does active park assist not search for a parking space?
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
The sensors could be blocked. For example, snow, ice or large accumulations of dirt. Blocked sensors can affect how the system functions.
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
The sensors in the front or rear bumper could be damaged.
311
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Active Park Assist
(If Equipped)
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
The parking space is more than 5 ft
(1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away from your vehicle.
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
Your vehicle's speed is greater than
22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
Why does active park assist not offer a parking space?
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle on a straight road for a short period of time.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from correctly aligning your vehicle.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
Vehicles or objects bordering the space could not be correctly parked.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
The tires are not correctly installed or maintained. For example, using a spare tire, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
A repair or alteration changed the detection capabilities.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
The parking space length, or position of parked objects, changes after your vehicle passes the space.
Why does active park assist not correctly position the vehicle into a parking space?
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes. For example, driving from a heated garage into a cold outside temperature, or after leaving a car wash.
312
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Requirements
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph in imperial units and
20 km/h in metric units.
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed could increase above the set speed. The system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either the Set+ or Setbuttons to set the current speed.
WARNING: Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press the button to activate the system. When the system
E332905 activates, the set speed is equal to whichever is greater, the current vehicle speed, or 15 mph when in imperial units or
20 km/h when in metric units. If the speed is too low, or other conditions are not correct for cruise control activation, the system will instead enter standby mode.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E332905
Press the button when the system is active or switch the ignition off.
Note: When you switch cruise control off, the set speed clears.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press the Set+ button to increase the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the
Set+ button to accelerate. Release the button when you have reached your preferred speed.
Press the Set- button to decrease the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the
Set- button to decelerate. Release the button when you have reached your preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed does not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set.
313
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E308130
Press the button, or tap the brake pedal to cancel the set speed.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
E308130
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
Illuminates when you switch the system on.
E71340
314
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
WORK
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go uses radar and camera sensors to maintain a set gap between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you while following it to a complete stop. Stop and go can also be set to follow a vehicle directly in front of you and adjust the set speed, while you are at a complete stop.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer that has aftermarket electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use the system with a snow plow blade installed.
WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
When Following a Vehicle
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use adaptive cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to changing road conditions such as entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts, roads without visible lanes of travel, roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes.
WARNING: The system is not a crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: When following a vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does not always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes, for example in mountainous areas.
315
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
Sensor Limitations
WARNING: On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning.
E328125
1
2
Camera.
Radar sensor.
The camera is on the windshield behind the interior mirror.
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind a fascia panel.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front protectors, aftermarket lights, additional paint or plastic coatings could also degrade sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs the camera or the sensor. When something blocks the sensor, the system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control
– Information Messages (page 325).
316
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle image does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you.
Detection Issues Can Occur:
E71621
A
B
C
When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front.
With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane.
There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a clear view of the road by the windshield camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Visual Search (page 30).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press the button to activate the system. When the system
E144529 activates, the set speed is equal to whichever is greater, the current vehicle speed, or 15 mph when in imperial units or
20 km/h when in metric units. If the speed is too low, or other conditions are not correct for adaptive cruise control activation, the system enters standby mode. When you are below 15 mph when in imperial units or 20 km/h when in metric units, adaptive cruise control does not activate unless you are following another vehicle.
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the instrument cluster display.
317
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E144529
Press the button when the system is in standby mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: When you switch the system off, the set speed clears.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
The system may cancel and set the parking brake if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the driver door after you stop your vehicle.
• Your vehicle is at a stop continuously for more than three minutes.
The system may deactivate or prevent activating when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
• The brake temperature is too high.
• There is a failure in the system or a related system.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL SPEED
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the Set+ or Set- buttons to set the current speed.
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display.
E337576
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed from a Complete Stop
Press the Set+ or Set- buttons while keeping the brake pedal fully depressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 km/h when in metric units or 15 mph when in imperial units.
The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display.
Note: The system will activate from a complete stop only when it detects a lead vehicle in close proximity.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
318
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Manually Changing the Set Speed
Press the Set+ button to increase the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the
Set+ button to accelerate. Release the button when you have reached your preferred speed.
Press the Set- button to decrease the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the
Set- button to decelerate. Release the button when you have reached your preferred speed.
You can also press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the speed you prefer.
Press the Set+ or Set- button to select the current speed as the set speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed continuously displays in the information display when the system is active.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL GAP
Press the button to cycle through the four gap settings.
E337576
The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore, the distance adjusts with your vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Graphic
Display,
Bars Indicated
Between
Vehicles
3
4
1
2
Gap Distance
Closest.
Close.
Medium.
Far.
Dynamic
Behavior
Sport.
Normal.
Normal.
Comfort.
Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting.
319
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain the gap setting.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive cruise control may provide a small, temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from the vehicle in front of you.
The system only applies limited braking.
You can override the system by applying the brakes.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system.
If the system determines that its maximum braking level is not sufficient, an audible warning sounds, a message appears in the information display and an indicator flashes when the system continues to brake. Take immediate action.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
Press the button or tap the brake pedal.
E308130
The set speed does not erase.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
E308130
Your vehicle speed returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it.
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for less than a few seconds, your vehicle accelerates from a stationary position to follow the vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for more than a few seconds, an indicator and message displays.
E335548
320
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Message
Stopped
Press button to resume
Auto-Resume
Action
Cruise control does not resume automatically when this display is active.
If the lead vehicle begins to move, you are prompted to press the resume button.
Press and release the button or use the accelerator pedal to resume following the lead vehicle.
Displays when on a limited access highway after following a vehicle to a complete stop.
In this situation, the vehicle resumes following the lead vehicle without a button press or pressing the accelerator pedal. The system can remain in auto-resume state for approximately 30 seconds, after which it no longer automatically resumes.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
WARNING: If you override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you override the set speed and gap distance.
Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon does not appear in the instrument cluster display.
The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
Illuminates when you switch
E144529 adaptive cruise control on. The color of the indicator changes to indicate the system status.
White indicates the system is on but inactive.
Green indicates that you set the speed and the system is active.
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake when your vehicle is approaching slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary.
321
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Cruise Control .
4. Press Normal Cruise Control .
The cruise control indicator
E332905 replaces the adaptive cruise control indicator if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, and the system does not respond to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains active to maintain set speed. The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle.
LANE CENTERING
How Does Lane Centering Work
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering uses radar and camera sensors to help keep your vehicle in the lane by applying continuous assistance steering torque input toward the lane center on highways.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap setting operates normally.
Lane Centering Precautions
WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system if any changes or modifications to the steering wheel have been made. Any changes or modifications to the steering wheel could affect the functionality or performance of the system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply to lane centering unless stated otherwise or contradicted by a lane centering
precaution. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Lane Centering Requirements
You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times.
The system only activates when all of the following occur:
• You have adaptive cruise control with stop and go on.
• Lane centering assist is enabled in your
information and entertainment screen.
See Switching Lane Centering On and Off (page 323).
• You have your hands on the steering wheel.
• The system detects both lane markings.
Note: If it does not detect valid lane markings, the system stays inactive until valid markings are available.
Lane Centering Limitations
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply to lane centering unless stated otherwise or contradicted by a lane centering
limitation. See Adaptive Cruise Control
322
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Lane Centering may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least one lane marking or when lanes merge or split.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Areas under construction or new infrastructure.
• When modifications to the steering system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
• In high wind conditions.
Note: The driving assistance torque is limited and may not be sufficient for all driving situations such as driving through tight curves or driving through curves at high speeds.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system may deviate from the center line.
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off
You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Press the button.
E308131
The indicator appears in the information display. When the system is on, the color of the indicator changes to indicate the system status.
You can override the system at any time by steering your vehicle.
Note: The correct requirements must be
met before you can switch the system on.
See Lane Centering Requirements (page
Enabling and Disabling Lane
Centering
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Cruise Control .
4. Press Lane Centering Assist .
Lane Centering Alerts
You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times.
When the system is active and detects no steering activity for a period of time, the system alerts you to put your hands on the steering wheel. If you do not react to the warnings the system cancels and slows your vehicle down to idle speeds while maintaining steering control.
The system also alerts you if your vehicle crosses lane markings without detected steering activity.
Note: The system may detect a light grip or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off driving.
When an external condition cancels the system, for example, no lane markings available, a tone sounds and a message appears in the instrument cluster display.
If your vehicle starts to slow
E308130 down, provide steering input to the wheel and press and release the button to regain full system performance.
Note: The system disables until the next key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
323
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Lane Centering Automatic
Cancellation
When an external condition cancels the system, for example, no lane markings available, a tone sounds and a message appears in the instrument cluster display.
If your vehicle starts to slow down, you must provide steering
E308130 input to the wheel and press and release the button to regain full system performance.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too wide or too narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane markings.
• Lane markings cross over one another.
Note: The system disables until the next key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
Lane Centering Indicators
Illuminates when you switch lane centering on. The color of
E297977 the indicator changes to indicate the system status.
Gray indicates the system is on but inactive.
Green indicates the system is active and applying steering torque assistance input to keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.
Amber with an audible tone and then gray indicates a system automatic cancellation.
INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL (If
Equipped)
How Does Intelligent Adaptive
Cruise Control Work
Intelligent adaptive cruise control combines speed sign recognition with adaptive cruise control to adjust the cruise set speed to the speed limit detected by the speed sign recognition system. As the system detects new speed signs, the set speed updates.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap setting operates normally.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Requirements
Traffic sign recognition must be enabled for intelligent adaptive cruise control to be active.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations
The speed limit information provided by the navigation map data could be inaccurate or out of date.
324
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
The system may not detect and read speed limit signs with conditional information, for example, when a sign is flashing, during specific time ranges, or when children are present.
Note: The system does not set the vehicle speed to speed limits shown with a supplementary traffic sign.
Under certain conditions, the system may not adjust the vehicle speed until after your vehicle passes the speed limit.
Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Off
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Cruise Control .
4. Press Intelligent .
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Cruise Control .
4. Press Adaptive Cruise Control .
5. Press Speed Sign Recognition .
6. Press Tolerance .
7.
Use + and to set the tolerance.
Note: You cannot set the tolerance more than 19 mph (30 km/h) above or below the recognized speed.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Alerts
If you increase the set speed beyond the speed limit or speed limit plus a positive tolerance value, the set speed indicator flashes.
The warning does not occur if:
• You override the set speed using the accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle speed exceeds the set speed due to being on a downhill slope.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators
E337564
The set speed limit displays next to the detected speed limit in the instrument cluster.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
– TROUBLESHOOTING
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages - Vehicles
With: Lane Centering
Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all messages display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or shorten certain messages depending upon which cluster type you have.
325
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Message
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Lane Centering Assist
Not Available
Resume Control
Press Accelerator Pedal to Resume
Action
Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and provide steering input.
Lane centering assist conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
The system is going to cancel and you must take control.
Press the accelerator and follow the prompts.
326
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control
(If Equipped)
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages - Vehicles
With: Stop and Go
Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all messages display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or shorten certain messages depending upon which cluster type you have.
Message
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Action
A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due to inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
You have selected normal cruise control. The system does not brake or react to traffic.
Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel and you must take control.
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range.
327
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE
CONTROL
Your vehicle has various drive modes that you can select for different driving conditions. Depending on the drive mode that you select, the system adjusts various vehicle settings.
HOW DOES DRIVE MODE
CONTROL WORK
Drive mode control adjusts your vehicle configuration for each mode you select.
Changing the drive mode changes the functionality of the steering system to adjust the steering effort and feel.
The stability and traction control assist your vehicle control in adverse conditions or high-performance driving.
Throttle control enhances the powertrain response, transmission controls become optimized with shift schedules, and four-wheel drive settings are optimized and tuned to each mode.
Changing the drive mode engages or disengages the electronic locking differential.
Changing the drive mode changes the four-wheel drive modes to be the default, available or not available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system for proper operation. If a mode is unavailable due to a system fault, the mode defaults to normal.
Note: The system reverts to the normal mode each time you start your vehicle. At startup the system also displays a prompt on the instrument cluster display that gives you the option to return to the previously selected drive mode during the last ignition cycle. If you select yes, the system returns to the last selected drive mode and the driveline setting associated with that mode.
If you select no, the system remains in normal mode and the driveline setting associated with that mode. If you do not select yes or no, the system stays in normal mode and the driveline stays in the last used setting.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE
E308146
Rotate the drive mode control on the center console to select or change a drive mode.
Note: Button icons vary depending on the vehicle.
328
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
DRIVE MODES
Deep Snow/Sand - 4x4
For off-road driving on soft, dry sand or deep snow. This mode
E295420 optimizes accelerator pedal response, traction and stability controls to help maintain forward momentum. If your vehicle becomes stuck in deep conditions, use this mode to help get unstuck.
Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is selectable in deep snow/sand mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving on pavement or packed snow. This could cause driveline bind up and damage the system depending on the four-wheel drive
mode selection. See Four-Wheel Drive
Eco - 4x4
For efficient driving. This mode helps deliver maximum fuel
E295413 efficiency and helps to increase driving range.
Two-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is not available in eco mode.
Eco - 4x2
For efficient driving. This mode
E295413 helps deliver maximum fuel efficiency and helps to increase driving range.
Mud/Ruts - 4x4
E296606 For off-road driving. This mode enhances vehicle performance to traverse muddy, rutted or uneven terrains.
Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is selectable in mud/rut mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving on pavement or packed snow. This could cause driveline bind up and damage the system depending on the four-wheel drive
mode selection. See Four-Wheel Drive
Normal - 4x4
For everyday driving. This mode is the perfect balance of
E225310 excitement, comfort and convenience. This is the default mode after each ignition cycle.
Two-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive modes are selectable when in normal mode.
Normal - 4x2
E225310
For everyday driving. This mode is the perfect balance of excitement, comfort and convenience. This is the default mode after each ignition cycle.
Rock Crawl - 4x4
For off-road driving and
E225315 optimum rock-climbing. Rock crawl mode engages the electronic locking differential. Rock crawl mode optimizes the throttle and transmission response to provide you additional control of your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive low is the only four-wheel drive mode available in rock crawl mode.
329
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Slippery - 4x2
For less than ideal road conditions such as snow or ice
E295414 covered roads. This mode can be used for crossing terrain where a firm surface is covered with loose, wet or slippery material. Slippery mode lowers throttle response and optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving on dry pavement. This could cause driveline bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 260).
Slippery - 4x4, Vehicles With: 2-
Speed Torque On Demand
For less than ideal road
E295414 conditions such as snow or ice covered roads. This mode can be used for crossing terrain where a firm surface is covered with loose, wet or slippery material. Slippery mode lowers throttle response and optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces.
Four-wheel drive auto is the default four-wheel drive mode. Two-wheel drive high is not available in slippery mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving on dry pavement. This could cause driveline bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 260).
Slippery - 4x4, Vehicles With:
Electronic Shift-On-The-Fly
For less than ideal road
E295414 conditions such as snow or ice covered roads. This mode can be used for crossing terrain where a firm surface is covered with loose, wet or slippery material. Slippery mode lowers throttle response and optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces.
Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive modes are selectable in slippery mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving on dry pavement. This could cause driveline bind up and damage the system depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 260).
Sport - 4x2
E246593
For sporty driving with improved performance handling and response. This mode increases accelerator pedal response and provides a sportier steering feel. The powertrain system holds onto lower gears longer, helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Sport - 4x4, Vehicles With: 2-
Speed Torque On Demand
For sporty driving with improved
E246593 performance handling and response. This mode increases accelerator pedal response and provides a sportier steering feel. The powertrain system holds onto lower gears longer, helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Four-wheel drive auto is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is not available in sport mode.
330
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Sport - 4x4, Vehicles With:
Electronic Shift-On-The-Fly
For sporty driving with improved
E246593 performance handling and response. This mode increases accelerator pedal response and provides a sportier steering feel. The powertrain system holds onto lower gears longer, helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Two-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is not available in sport mode.
Tow/Haul - 4x2
For improved transmission operation when towing a trailer
E246592 or a heavy load. This mode moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to reduce the frequency of transmission shifting. This mode also provides engine braking in all forward gears, which slows your vehicle and assists you in controlling your vehicle when descending a grade. The amount of downshift braking provided varies based on the amount you press the brake pedal.
Tow/Haul - 4x4
For improved transmission operation when towing a trailer
E246592 or a heavy load. This mode moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to reduce the frequency of transmission shifting. This mode also provides engine braking in all forward gears, which slows your vehicle and assists you in controlling your vehicle when descending a grade. The amount of downshift braking provided varies based on the amount you press the brake pedal.
All four-wheel drive modes are selectable in tow/haul mode. This mode does not default to a certain four-wheel drive mode.
Trail - 4x2
Trail mode is for off-road driving on muddy, rutted, soft or uneven
E295419 terrain. This mode lowers throttle response to increase wheel spin to keep the tires clear and to prevent getting stuck.
DRIVE MODE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Drive Mode Control – Warning
Lamps
E130458
Some drive modes reduce traction and stability control performance and the indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Drive Mode Control – Information Messages
Message Action
Selected 4x4 Mode Not Available in Current
Drive Mode
You have selected a four-wheel drive mode that is not available in the current drive mode. Select an available four-wheel drive mode.
331
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Drive Mode Control – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why did the system default to normal mode?
If a mode is unavailable due to a system fault, it defaults to normal mode.
332
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE LANE KEEPING
SYSTEM
The lane keeping system alerts you by providing temporary steering assistance or steering wheel vibration when it detects an unintended lane departure.
HOW DOES THE LANE
KEEPING SYSTEM WORK
The lane keeping system uses a forward looking camera mounted on the windshield to monitor vehicle movement within the travel lane.
When the camera detects a drift out of the travel lane, the lane keeping system alerts the driver by vibrating the steering wheel, or aids the driver by providing a small steering input to move the vehicle back into the travel lane.
The driver can select one of three modes:
• Alert (If Equipped)
• Aid
• Alert + Aid
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The lane keeping system only operates when the vehicle speed is greater than
40 mph (64 km/h).
The system works when the camera can detect at least one lane marking.
The lane keeping system may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions:
• The lane keeping system does not detect at least one lane marking.
• You switch the turn signal on.
• You apply direct steering, accelerate fast or brake hard.
• The vehicle speed is less than 40 mph
(64 km/h).
333
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
• The anti-lock brake, stability control or traction control system activates.
• The lane is too narrow.
• Something is obscuring the camera or it is unable to detect the lane markings due to environment, traffic or vehicle conditions.
• Entering or exiting a tight curve when driving at high speeds.
The lane keeping system may not correct lane positioning in any of the following conditions:
• High winds.
• Uneven road surfaces.
• Heavy or uneven loads.
• Incorrect tire pressure.
SWITCHING THE LANE
KEEPING SYSTEM ON AND
OFF
E334922
To activate the lane keeping system, press the button on the steering wheel.
To deactivate the lane keeping system, press the button again.
Note: When switching the system on or off a message appears in the information and entertainment display to show the status.
Note: The system stores the on or off setting until manually changed, unless it detects a MyKey™. If the system detects a
MyKey™, it defaults to the last setting for that MyKey™.
Note: If the system detects a MyKey™, pressing the button does not affect the on or off status of the system. You can only change the mode and intensity settings.
SWITCHING THE LANE
KEEPING SYSTEM MODE
The lane keeping system has different settings that you can view or adjust using the information display.
The system stores the last known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you switch on the system.
To change the lane keeping system mode, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Lane-Keeping System .
4. Press Lane-Keeping Mode .
5. Select a mode.
Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. If the system detects a MyKey™, it defaults to the last setting for that MyKey™.
ALERT MODE
What Is Alert Mode
Alert mode vibrates the steering wheel when it detects an unintended lane departure.
334
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
How Does Alert Mode Work How Does Aid Mode Work
E165515
When in alert mode, the lane keeping system alerts you by vibrating the steering wheel. The intensity of the vibration is set through the lane keeping system menu.
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Vibration Intensity
To change the steering wheel vibration intensity, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Lane-Keeping System .
4. Press Lane-Keeping Intensity .
5. Select an intensity setting.
AID MODE
What Is Aid Mode
Aid mode provides temporary steering assistance toward the center of the lane.
E165516
The lane keeping system aids you when an unintentional lane departure occurs.
The system provides a small steering input to move the vehicle towards the center of the lane.
ALERT AND AID MODE
What Is Alert and Aid Mode
Alert and aid mode uses multiple features to keep you in your lane. The system first provides a small steering input to bring your vehicle back towards the center of the lane. If your vehicle moves too far out of the center of the lane the system alerts you with vibration in the steering wheel.
335
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
INDICATORS
E165517
A
B
Alert.
Aid.
The lane keeping system detects a lane departure and provides aid when the vehicles enters B and applies the additional alert warning if A is entered.
E335296
If you switch the lane keeping system on, a graphic with lane markings appears in the information display.
When you switch the system off, the lane marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still display if adaptive cruise control is enabled.
While the lane keeping system is on, the color of the lane markings change to indicate the system status.
Gray Green
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side.
Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side.
Yellow
Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping aid intervention.
Red
Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning.
336
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
Lane Keeping System – Information Messages
Message
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
Action
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.
The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel The system requests that you keep your hands on the steering wheel.
337
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked Questions
Why is the feature not available (lane markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings for an extended interval of time.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example, in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings, or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example, partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
You have not calibrated the camera after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight or on uneven roads.
338
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lane Keeping System
(If Equipped)
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid, or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy, uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
You changed the tires or modified the suspension.
339
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
Blind spot information system detects vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone.
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM WORK
Blind spot information system uses sensors on both sides of your vehicle, detecting rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The detection area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) to alert you of faster approaching vehicles.
E255695
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot information system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The blind spot information system is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
Note: Blind spot information system does not prevent contact with other vehicles. It does not detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals or other infrastructure.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Blind spot information system does not operate in park (P) or reverse (R).
The system may not alert you if a vehicle quickly passes through the detection zone.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Blind spot information system turns on when all the following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
SWITCHING BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
To switch blind spot information system on or off, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Blind Spot Information System .
4. Switch the feature on or off.
340
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System
(If Equipped)
When you switch blind spot information system off, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. When you switch the system on or off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle.
To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer.
LOCATING THE BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
SENSORS
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM WITH TRAILER
COVERAGE (If Equipped)
What Is Blind Spot Information
System with Trailer Coverage
E310325
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system accuracy.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
See Blind Spot Information System –
Information Messages (page 343). The
alert indicators illuminate but the system does not alert you.
E225007
Blind spot information system detects vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone.
Blind Spot Information System
With Trailer Coverage Limitations
Trailer coverage only supports conventional trailers. The system turns off if you select a fifth wheel trailer type.
Make sure the trailer width is less than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) and the length is less than
33 ft (10.1 m). If you input values higher, the system turns off.
341
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System
(If Equipped)
Some trailers could cause a slight change in system performance:
• Large box trailers could cause false alerts to occur when driving next to infrastructures or near parked cars. A false alert could also occur while making a 90-degree turn.
• Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a total length greater than 20 ft (6 m) could cause delayed alerts when a vehicle is passing at high speeds.
• Box trailers that have a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front could cause early alerts when you pass a vehicle.
• Clam shell or v-nose box trailers with a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front could cause delayed alerts when a vehicle traveling the same speed as your vehicle merges lanes.
Setting a Trailer Length
You can set-up a trailer to work with the blind spot information system through the touchscreen. When setting up a trailer, a sequence of screens appear asking for trailer information.
1.
Select type of trailer screen conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.
Note: The system only supports conventional trailers.
2. Do you want to set up blind spot with trailer screen? If no, the system turns off. If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
3. Is the width less than 9 ft (2.6 m) and length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)? If no, the system turns off. If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
4. Trailer width measurement. Measure the width at the front of the trailer. It is not measured at the widest point of the trailer. The maximum width at the front of the trailer the system can support is 9 ft (2.6 m).
Note: You do not need to enter an exact trailer width measurement. You only need to confirm that the width of the trailer is 9 ft
(2.6 m) or less.
5. Trailer length measurement. The trailer length is the distance between the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the trailer. The maximum length that the system can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
6. Enter the length of trailer. The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m). Toggling up or down using the menu buttons increases or decreases the measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select a length that is equal to or within 3 ft
(1 m) of the actual measured length.
For example, if the actual measure length is 25 ft (7.5 m), toggle the length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). The system setup saves when you enter the length of the trailer.
Note: If the trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack with electrical lighting, enter a length of 3 ft (1 m). Cross traffic alert remains on for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or less.
Note: The system requires proper measurement and measure entry to function properly.
Selecting a Trailer
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle, the trailer set up menu appears in the touchscreen. This menu allows you to set up a new trailer or choose from a previously set up trailer. A warning message appears and the system turns off if you do not choose or add a new trailer.
342
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Blind Spot Information System
(If Equipped)
Note: The warning message may not appear until your vehicle reaches 22 mph
(35 km/h).
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM INDICATORS
When blind spot information system detects a vehicle, an alert indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. If you turn the turn signal on for that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator flashes.
E309137
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
Blind Spot Information System – Information Messages
Message
Blind Spot System Fault
Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
Action
A fault with the system has occurred. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Something is blocking the sensors. Clean the sensors.
The system automatically turns off and displays this message when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off through the touchscreen.
343
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cross Traffic Alert
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT
The system alerts you of vehicles approaching from the sides behind your vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT WORK
Cross Traffic Alert detects vehicles that approach at a speed between 4–37 mph
(6–60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully obstructed.
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only partially obstructed and zone coverage on the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage on that side is severely reduced.
Note: Slowly reversing helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before reversing out of a parking space. The cross traffic alert system is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
LIMITATIONS
Cross Traffic Alert may not correctly operate when any of the following occur:
• Something is blocking the sensors.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Your vehicle speed is greater than
7 mph (12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking space.
SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT ON AND OFF
To switch cross traffic alert on or off use the touchscreen.
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
344
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cross Traffic Alert
(If Equipped)
3. Switch Cross Traffic Alert on or off.
Note: The system switches on every time you switch the ignition on. To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer.
LOCATING THE CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT SENSORS
E310325
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system accuracy.
If something is blocking the sensors, a message may appear in the information display when you shift into reverse (R).
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT WITH
TRAILER COVERAGE (If
Equipped)
What Is Cross Traffic Alert With
Trailer Coverage
Cross traffic alert with trailer coverage allows the system to continue operating with a trailer or trailer hitch attachment.
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage Limitations
Cross traffic alert remains on when you attach a trailer in vehicles that come with blind spot information system with trailer tow under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m) in the information display.
Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an approved trailer tow module and tow bar, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
INDICATORS
E268294
When the cross traffic alert detects an approaching vehicle, a tone sounds, a warning lamp illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror and arrows appear in the information display to show which side the vehicle is approaching from.
345
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cross Traffic Alert
(If Equipped)
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp illuminates in the instrument cluster and a message appears in the information display. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: If arrows do not display, a message appears in the information display.
Note: In some conditions, the system could alert you, even when there is nothing in the detection zone, for example a vehicle passing further away from your vehicle.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
Cross Traffic Alert – Information Messages
Message
Cross Traffic Alert
Action
Displays instead of indication arrows when the system detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.
346
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
WHAT IS PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST
Pre-Collision Assist with Pedestrian
Detection
Pre-collision assist detects and warns of approaching hazards in the roadway. If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours, or a pedestrian within your driving path, the system provides multiple levels of assistance to help avoid a collision.
HOW DOES PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST WORK
The system warns the driver of potential hazards by providing three levels of assistance.
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching potential hazards the system provides the following levels of functionality:
1.
Alert.
2. Brake Support.
3. Automatic Emergency Braking.
E329466
Alert : When active, a flashing visual warning appears and an audible warning tone sounds.
Brake Support : The system is designed to help reduce the impact speed by preparing the brakes for rapid braking. The system does not automatically apply the brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the system could apply additional braking up to maximum braking force, even if you lightly press the brake pedal.
Automatic Emergency Braking :
Automatic emergency braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent.
Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, although the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Each system has various levels of
detection capabilities. See Pre-Collision
Assist Limitations (page 348).
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not detect vehicles that are driving in a different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or operate with reduced function during cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
347
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
WARNING: Take additional care if your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are towing a trailer. These conditions could result in reduced performance of this system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system cannot help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain a safe distance and speed.
WARNING: In situations where the vehicle camera has limited detection capability, this may reduce system performance. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex backgrounds, running pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians that the system cannot distinguish from a group.
Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Pre-collision assist depends on the detection ability of its camera and sensors.
Any obstructions or damage to these areas can limit detection or prevent the system
from functioning. See Locating the
Pre-Collision Assist Sensors (page 349).
The system is active at speeds above
3 mph (5 km/h)
Note: The pre-collision assist system automatically disables when you select four-wheel drive low, manually disable
AdvanceTrac™, or select rock crawl mode.
E309750
Note: Brake support and automatic emergency braking are active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h). If the vehicle has a radar sensor included with adaptive cruise control, then brake support and automatic emergency braking are active up to the maximum speed of the vehicle.
Pedestrian Detection Limitations
Pedestrian detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Pedestrian detection operates optimally when detected hazards are clearly identifiable. System performance may reduce in situations where pedestrians are running, partly obscured, have a complex background, or cannot be distinguished from a group.
Intersection Assist
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle comes with a radar sensor included in adaptive cruise control, the pre-collision assist system may operate in a scenario where you are turning across an oncoming vehicle's path. Detection of vehicles driving in an oncoming direction is active if your vehicle is driving at speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h).
348
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
SWITCHING PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST ON AND OFF
To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist .
4. Switch the feature on or off.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by using the touchscreen controls in the pre-collision assist menu:
• Change alert and distance alert sensitivity to one of three possible settings.
• Switch distance indication and alert on or off.
• If required, switch automatic emergency braking on or off.
• If required, switch the entire pre-collision assist feature on or off.
• If required, switch evasive steering assist on or off.
Note: Automatic emergency braking and evasive steering turn on every time you switch the ignition on.
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we recommend that you switch the system off if you install a snow plow or similar object in such a way that it may block the radar sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected setting across key cycles.
Note: If you switch automatic emergency braking off, evasive steering assist switches off.
LOCATING THE PRE-
COLLISION ASSIST SENSORS
E328125
1
2
Camera.
Radar sensor (if equipped).
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or camera appears in the information display, something is obstructing the radar signals or camera images. The radar sensor is behind the fascia cover in the center of the lower grille. With a blocked sensor or camera, the system may not function, or
Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Note: Proper system operation requires a clear view of the road by the camera. Have any windshield damage in the area of the camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone could change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. Have your vehicle serviced to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.
349
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat at the camera or a potential misalignment condition, a message could display in the information display indicating temporary sensor unavailability. When operational conditions are correct, the message deactivates. For example, when the ambient temperature around the sensor decreases or the sensor recalibrates successfully.
DISTANCE INDICATION (If
Equipped)
What Is Distance Indication
Distance indication displays the gap between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.
Note: The graphic does not display if you switch on cruise control or adaptive cruise control.
Vehicle Speed
62 mph
(100 km/h).
System Sensitivity
Normal.
Distance Indicator Color
Gray.
Yellow.
Red.
Distance Gap Time Gap
Greater than
82 ft (25 m).
56–82 ft
(17–25 m).
Less than 56 ft
(17 m).
Greater than 0.9
seconds.
0.6-0.9
seconds.
Less than 0.6
seconds.
350
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Switching Distance Indication On and Off
To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist .
4. Switch Distance Indication on or off.
Distance Indication Indicator
The indicator displays the time gap between your vehicle and vehicles traveling in the same direction ahead of you.
E254791
DISTANCE ALERT (If
Equipped)
What Is Distance Alert
The system alerts you with a warning lamp if the distance to the vehicle ahead is small.
Note: The warning lamp does not illuminate if cruise control or adaptive cruise control is active.
Adjusting the Sensitivity of
Distance Alert
To adjust the sensitivity of the system, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist .
4. Press Alert Sensitivity .
5. Select a setting.
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY
BRAKING
What Is Automatic Emergency
Braking
Automatic emergency braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent. The system may help reduce impact damage to avoid the crash completely.
Automatic emergency braking is only
available up to certain speeds. See
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations (page
351
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Switching Automatic Emergency
Braking On and Off
To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist .
4. Press Auto Emergency Braking .
5. Switch the feature on or off.
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
(If Equipped)
What Is Evasive Steering Assist
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road user, evasive steering assist helps you steer around the road user.
After you turn the steering wheel in an attempt to avoid a crash with the road user, the system applies additional steering torque to help you steer around the road user. After you pass the road user, the system applies steering torque when you turn the steering wheel to steer back into the lane. The system deactivates after you fully pass the road user.
Note: Road users are defined as obstacles encountered on the road that the system is
able to detect. See Pre-Collision Assist
Evasive Steering Assist
Limitations
Evasive steering assist only activates when all the following occur:
• Automatic emergency braking and evasive steering assist are on.
• The system detects a road user ahead and starts to apply the brakes.
• You significantly turn the steering wheel to steer around a road user.
Note: The system does not automatically steer around a road user. If you do not turn the steering wheel, the system does not activate.
Note: The system does not activate if the distance to the road user ahead is too small and the system cannot avoid a crash.
Switching Evasive Steering Assist
On and Off
To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen:
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist .
4. Switch Evasive Steering on or off.
Note: If you switch automatic emergency braking off, evasive steering assist turns off.
Note: Automatic emergency braking and evasive steering assist turn on every time you switch the ignition on.
352
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning
Lamps
E335612
A telltale illuminates in the cluster to indicate if the system is disabled or unavailable.
Pre-Collision Assist – Information Messages
Message
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor
Blocked
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
Action
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
A fault with the system has occurred. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
353
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pre-Collision Assist
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently
Asked Questions
Camera Troubleshooting
The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is clean, but the message remains in the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several minutes for the camera to detect that there is no obstruction.
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently
Asked Questions - Vehicles With:
Intersection Assist
Camera Troubleshooting
The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is clean, but the message remains in the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several minutes for the camera to detect that there is no obstruction.
Radar Troubleshooting
(If Equipped)
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean, but the message remains in the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several minutes for the radar to detect that there is no obstruction.
Heavy rain, spray or fog is interfering with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactivates a short time after the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road could interfere with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactivates a short time after the weather conditions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact.
Have your vehicle serviced to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.
354
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driver Alert
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS DRIVER ALERT
Driver alert alerts you if it determines that you are becoming drowsy or if your driving deteriorates.
HOW DOES DRIVER ALERT
WORK
Driver Alert calculates your alertness level based on your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings and other factors through use of the front camera sensor behind the interior mirror.
E309385
DRIVER ALERT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may result in the system warning you even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
Note: If something is blocking the camera or damaged the windshield, Driver Alert may not function.
DRIVER ALERT LIMITATIONS
Driver alert may not function correctly if:
• The sensor cannot track the road lane markings.
• Your vehicle's speed is less than approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
SWITCHING DRIVER ALERT ON
AND OFF
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
355
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driver Alert
(If Equipped)
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Switch Driver Alert on or off.
Note: The system remains on or off depending on how it was last set.
Resetting Driver Alert
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver door.
DRIVER ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
Driver Alert – Information Messages
Message
Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
Action
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Take a rest soon.
356
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Speed Sign Recognition
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION
Speed sign recognition detects speed limit signs to inform you of the current speed limit. Detected speed signs appear in the information display.
HOW DOES SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION WORK
Speed sign recognition uses a sensor behind the interior mirror to detect speed signs.
If your vehicle has speed sign recognition with navigation, stored speed sign data may influence the indicated speed limit value.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
PRECAUTIONS
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor.
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit not approved by us, the system may not correctly function.
Note: The system may not detect all speed signs and may incorrectly read signs.
Note: Always fit our original parts when replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may reduce system performance.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
LIMITATIONS
Speed sign recognition may not operate correctly due to:
• Outdated map data.
• Incorrect recognition of speed limits by the sensor of signs on parallel roads or exit ramps.
• Missed recognition of faded, dirty, or distorted signs.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
INDICATORS
WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
E317824
When the system detects a speed limit sign, it appears in the information display.
357
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Speed Sign Recognition
(If Equipped)
SETTING THE SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION SPEED
WARNING
To set the speed warning, use the touchscreen.
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition .
4. Switch the feature on or off.
SETTING THE SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION SPEED
TOLERANCE
To set the tolerance of the speed warning, use the touchscreen.
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Driver Assistance .
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition .
4. Press Tolerance .
5. Use the + and - buttons to select the required level.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION – TROUBLESHOOTING
Speed Sign Recognition – Information Messages
Message
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See
Manual
Action
The traffic sign data provided by the navigation system is unavailable due to weak or no signal. Wait for a short period of time for the signal to improve. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked as soon as possible.
358
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Speed Sign Recognition
(If Equipped)
Speed Sign Recognition –
Frequently Asked Questions
Why does the speed limit change without any sign on the road?
The speed limit changes due to the speed limit data stored in the map data.
Why does speed sign recognition show a wrong speed limit?
The system shows a wrong speed limit due to incorrect and outdated map data or due to incorrect recognition of the speed limits by the camera.
359
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
LOAD CARRYING
PRECAUTIONS
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WARNING:
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
WARNING:
Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight limits can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING:
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING:
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
WARNING:
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING:
When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may
360
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
USING A SLIDE-IN CAMPER
For information regarding the use of slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with your vehicle.
Note: We do not recommend using a slide-in camper on an F-150 SuperCrew cab.
LOCATING THE SAFETY
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
LABELS
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
The Safety Compliance Certification label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position.
WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE
WEIGHT RATING
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE
WEIGHT RATING
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS
COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
361
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer, or online at the website that follows.
Website
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides
362
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
CALCULATING PAYLOAD
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload.
CALCULATING THE LOAD
LIMIT
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
363
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
364
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
365
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
PICKUP BED PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not allow people or animals in truck beds that have modifications, such as bed covers or slide-in campers, when the engine is running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.
PICKUP BED ANCHOR POINTS
Pickup Bed Anchor Point
Precautions
the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.
Locating the Pickup Bed Anchor
Points
The pickup bed anchor points are located at each corner of the pickup bed.
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached
E327579
366
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
Installing and Removing the
Pickup Bed Tie-Down Cleats
(If
Equipped)
Installing the Cleats
1.
Insert the key into the lock and turn clockwise to unlock.
2. Insert the cleat into the pickup bed anchor point and slide upward.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
Pickup Bed Anchor Point Load
Capacities
E327575
Note: Leave the key in the lock when removing or installing the cleats. The key cannot be removed unless it is in the locked position.
Removing the Cleats
To remove, reverse the installation procedure.
E327576
A
Maximum force between directly opposed cleats
276 lb (125 kg).
B
Maximum force between diagonally opposed cleats
600 lb (272 kg).
Note: You could damage the pickup bed walls if you overload the tie downs.
Note: Make sure that you properly balance and secure the cargo load. Failure to do this can cause cargo instability and damage to the box.
Note: Do not secure cargo with tie downs connected from the tie down brackets to the cargo box tie downs. This could cause the tailgate to detach.
367
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
TAILGATE ANCHOR POINTS
Locating the Tailgate Anchor
Points
The tailgate anchor points are located at each side of the tailgate.
A
The maximum force between the tailgate anchor points 400 lb (181 kg).
Note: Do not secure cargo from a pickup bed anchor point to a tailgate anchor point.
This could cause the tailgate to detach.
PICKUP BED RAMPS
Pickup Bed Ramp Precautions
E327594
Note: You could damage the tailgate if you overload the tie downs.
Tailgate Anchor Point Load
Capacities
E327790
WARNING: When sliding the ramp up or down, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Make sure that you correctly install the ramp to the tailgate plate. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not step or sit on the ramp when it is in the stowed position. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Only install the ramp within the prescribed ramp angles.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Note: Each pickup bed ramp has a maximum capacity of 400 lb (181.4 kg).
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground before usage.
Note: For loading and unloading equipment, your ramp should be set between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees downward to avoid damage to the ramp claw and tailgate plate.
368
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road operation, remove the bed ramps from the vehicle and store them in a safe location away from your vehicle.
Installing and Removing the
Pickup Bed Ramp Holder
Installing the Ramp Holder
Installing and Removing the
Pickup Bed Ramps
Note: You cannot use the pickup bed ramps with the tailgate work surface or tailgate step.
Installing the Bed Ramp
1.
Remove the front and rear cables.
E194387
1.
Hook the top of the ramp holder over the mounting plate and rotate the ramp holder into position.
E194380
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp holder.
E194388
2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
Removing the Ramp Holder
Remove in the reverse order.
E211150
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool to rotate the stops.
369
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pickup Bed
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate plate.
Removing the Ramp
Remove in the reverse order.
Storing the Pickup Bed Ramps
Storing the Bed Ramp
1.
Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of the ramp to the closed position.
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and extend the ramp until the pin is seated in the usage position, then set the ramp on even ground.
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.
6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam lever arms.
7.
Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the locking cable. If the locking cable is unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.
370
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
CONNECTING A TRAILER
PRECAUTIONS
HITCHES
Hooking Up a Trailer Using a
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury.
Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10-15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the trailer coupler.
Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Service your vehicle more frequently if you
tow a trailer. See Normal Scheduled
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you.
When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions.
Account for the trailer coupler weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Do not exceed the load limits. See
Calculating the Load Limit (page 363).
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch
1.
Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
A
E328252
2. Measure the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening from the wheel to the fender.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars connected.
E328314
4. Measure the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening from the wheel to the fender a second time.
Note: The second measurement should be greater than the first.
371
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening is between the first and second measurements.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer coupler securely attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer.
CONNECTING A TRAILER
Smart Trailer Tow Connector
Recognizing a Trailer
1.
Attach the trailer and wiring connector to your vehicle.
2. Switch on your vehicle.
3. Set up a profile for the trailer using the touchscreen.
Note: If your vehicle does not recognize the trailer, press and hold the brake pedal for a few seconds.
Note: Trailer profiles store trailer types, dimensions, preferences, trailer specific mileage and fuel economy.
Note: Disabling the trailer detection notification makes the default trailer profile active when a connection is detected.
E193232
When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions.
Safety Chains
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer hitch as recommended by the manufacturer. Cross the chains under the trailer coupler and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Always connect the safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer hitch.
372
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch, make sure the latch is fully closed.
Trailer Brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
Trailer Connection Checklist
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing .
3. Press Connection Checklist .
Trailer Light Check
Perform a trailer light illumination sequence to confirm that all lights are functioning by using the FordPass app.
Note: The FordPass app allows one person to confirm that all lights are functioning.
Electronic Park Hold
E337016
Applies the electronic parking brake when you shift to park (P).
The electronic park hold button illuminates when activated.
The feature prevents your vehicle from moving in any direction when you are aligned with your trailer coupler and shift to park (P).
Note: The feature is active for the current key cycle.
You can also press a zoom button when using the camera views to switch the feature on.
Trailer Connection Alarm
The alarm is set when the following occur:
• Your vehicle detects the trailer.
• Your vehicle is locked.
• The alarm is armed.
When the trailer is disconnected in this state, the vehicle alarm sounds and an alert is sent to your FordPass app.
Note: For reliable trailer detection, the trailer’s lamps must be SAE certified for each intended purpose.
Note: If the trailer is not compatible with the feature, the turn signals flash twice.
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required.
373
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connecting a Trailer
CONNECTING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
Connecting a Trailer – Information Messages
Message
Trailer Disconnected
Trailer Wiring Fault
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
Description
The system senses a trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally, during a given ignition cycle.
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer wiring or brake system.
There is a fault with your trailer battery, or your trailer battery voltage is very low.
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure.
Displays when one or more tires on the trailer is above the recommended temperature.
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as possible.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Capability Not
Detected
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not Setup
See Manual
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
374
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER
PRECAUTIONS
TRAILER BRAKE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
WARNING:
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
WARNING:
Do not exceed the lowest rating capacity for your vehicle or trailer hitch.
Overloading your vehicle or trailer hitch can impair your vehicle stability and handling.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING:
Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
WARNING:
The anti-lock brake system does not control the trailer brakes.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating.
Trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded require separate functioning brake systems.
TOWING A TRAILER
LIMITATIONS
The vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Note: Your vehicle could have reduced performance when operating at high altitudes and when heavily loaded or towing a trailer. When driving at elevation, to match driving performance as perceived at sea level, reduce gross vehicle weight and gross combination weight by 2% per
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation.
375
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
LOADING YOUR TRAILER
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. The trailer tongue weight should never exceed 10% of the maximum towing capacity.
• Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
TRAILER TOWING HINTS
Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Periodically inspect these components during and after any towing operation.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight.
Your vehicle may have a temporary or conventional spare tire. A temporary spare tire is different in diameter or width, tread-type, or is from a different manufacturer than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using.
When towing a trailer:
• Obey country specific regulations for towing a trailer.
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the transmission in park (P) to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off when you are towing on long, steep slopes.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not continuously apply the brakes, as they may overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission has Grade Assist or Tow/Haul, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle has AdvanceTrac with roll stability control, this system may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed when towing may reduce this tendency.
376
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
• If you are frequently towing a trailer in hot weather, hilly conditions, at the gross combined weight rating or any combination of these factors, consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if the axle is not already filled with it.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and gradually brake.
• Avoid parking on a slope. However, if you must park on a slope, turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow, set the parking brake, place the transmission in park (P) and place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
Note: Chocks are not included with your vehicle.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as your vehicle's electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes.
LAUNCHING OR RETRIEVING
A BOAT OR PERSONAL
WATERCRAFT
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding 6 in (15 cm) could allow water to enter vehicle components, causing internal damage to the components and affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Note: Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Note: Disconnect the trailer wiring connector before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the trailer wiring connector after removing the trailer from the water.
377
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
TOWING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
Recommended Towing Weights - 2.7L EcoBoost™
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
- L
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD
RWD
4WD
RWD
4WD
3.15
3.55
3.55
3.73
3.73
12,200 lb
(5,533 kg)
12,200 lb
(5,533 kg)
12,500 lb
(5,669 kg)
13,200 lb
(5,987 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
8,600 lb
(3,900 kg)
8,500 lb
(3,855 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
378
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- L
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- H
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD
RWD
4WD
RWD
4WD
RWD
3.15
3.55
3.55
3.73
3.73
3.73
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,493 kg)
8,600 lb
(3,900 kg)
8,400 lb
(3,810 kg)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
379
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
- H
Regular
Cab –
163 in
(4,140 mm)
- H
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD
RWD
RWD
RWD
4WD
RWD
RWD
3.73
3.73
3.31
3.55
3.55
3.73
3.73
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
15,000 lb
(6,803 kg)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
8,400 lb
(3,810 kg)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
380
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
- L
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD
4WD
RWD
RWD
RWD
RWD
RWD
3.73
3.73
3.15
3.55
3.73
3.15
3.55
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
15,300 lb
(6,939 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
8,100 lb
(3,674 kg)
10,100 lb
(4,581 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
7,600 lb
(3,447 kg)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
381
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
- H
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- L
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD
RWD
RWD
4WD
4WD
RWD
3.55
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.15
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
15,400 lb
(6,985 kg)
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
7,700 lb
(3,492 kg)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
8,100 lb
(3,674 kg)
10,100 lb
(4,581 kg)
7,800 lb
(3,538 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
382
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- L
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
- H
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD
RWD
RWD
3.55
3.73
3.73
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
15,100 lb
(6,849 kg)
7,800 lb
(3,538 kg)
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
10,000 lb
(4,535 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Values shown for low, L, or high, H, capacity trailer tow packages.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 6,000 lb (2,721 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy.
383
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.0L Diesel
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
RWD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
3.31
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,800 lb
(4,898 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.55
17,700 lb
(8,028 kg)
2
12,200 lb
(5,533 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.31
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.55
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.55
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.31
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,700 lb
(4,853 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.55
17,700 lb
(8,028 kg)
2
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.31
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,400 lb
1
(4,717 kg)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
384
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
4WD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
3.55
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.55
18,000 lb
(8,164 kg)
2
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.31
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,600 lb
(4,808 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.55
17,800 lb
(8,073 kg)
2
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.31
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.55
16,300 lb
(7,393 kg)
1
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.55
1 Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2 Max duty trailer tow package.
18,000 lb
(8,164 kg)
2
12,100 lb
(5,488 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only.
385
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.3L
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy.
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD 3.55
9,400 lb
(4,263 kg)
1
5,000 lb
(2,267 kg)
1
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
4WD
RWD
4WD
RWD
3.55
3.73
3.73
3.55
9,700 lb
(4,400 kg)
2
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
2
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
2
9,500 lb
(4,309 kg)
1
5,100 lb
(2,313 kg)
2
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
5,000 lb
(2,267 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
386
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD 3.73
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
2
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
4WD
RWD
3.73
3.55
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
5,000 lb
(2,267 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD
4WD
3.73
3.73
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
13,100 lb
(5,942 kg)
2
8,100 lb
(3,674 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.55
9,900 lb
(4,491 kg)
1
5,100 lb
(2,313 kg)
1
36 ft² (3.4
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.73
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.73
1 Medium duty trailer tow package.
2 Heavy duty trailer tow package.
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg)
2
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
387
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 6,000 lb (2,721 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy.
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.5L Ecoboost™
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD 3.15
16,100 lb
(7,302 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
4WD
RWD
RWD
3.31
3.55
3.55
16,400 lb
(7,438 kg)
1
16,100 lb
(7,302 kg)
1
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
388
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD 3.55
16,400 lb
(7,438 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
4WD
RWD
4WD
RWD
3.55
3.73
3.73
3.31
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
1
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
2
13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
2
13,100 lb
(5,942 kg)
2
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.31
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
11,100 lb
(5,034 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.55
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
1
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
389
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
RWD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
3.55
17,500 lb
(7,937 kg)
2
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.55
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
11,100 lb
(5,034 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.55
17,700 lb
(8,028 kg)
2
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
RWD 3.15
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
4WD 3.31
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
RWD 3.55
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
RWD 3.55
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
4WD 3.55
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
4WD 3.55
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
390
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD
4WD
RWD
4WD
RWD
RWD
4WD
3.73
3.73
3.31
3.31
3.55
3.55
3.55
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
1
19,300 lb
(8,754 kg)
2
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
391
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
4WD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
3.55
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
13,900 lb
(6,304 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.31
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
1
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.31
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.55
16,600 lb
(7,529 kg)
1
11,300 lb
(5,125 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.55
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.55
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.55
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
392
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
RWD 3.73
19,400 lb
(8,799 kg)
2
14,000 lb
(6,350 kg)
2
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
4WD 3.73
19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)
2
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
1 Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2 Max duty trailer tow package.
Note: All values calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4
m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy.
393
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Recommended Towing Weights - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
RWD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
3.55
16,700 lb
(7,574 kg)
1
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
RWD 3.55
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
12,700 lb
(5,760 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.73
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
1
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
4WD 3.73
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
12,400 lb
(5,624 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.55
16,800 lb
(7,620 kg)
1
11,100 lb
(5,035 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.55
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
394
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Driveline
4WD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
3.73
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
1
11,000 lb
(4,989 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.73
1 Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2 Max duty trailer tow package.
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
12,400 lb
(5,624 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Note: All values calculated with
SAE J2807 method.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy.
395
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Recommended Towing Weights - 5.0L
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
122.4 in
(3,110 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
RWD 3.15
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
1
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
RWD
4WD
RWD
4WD
RWD
RWD
3.31
3.31
3.73
3.73
3.15
3.31
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
1
13,200 lb
(5,987 kg)
1
13,800 lb
(6,259 kg)
1
14,600 lb
(6,622 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
8,300 lb
(3,764 kg)
1
8,200 lb
(3,719 kg)
1
9,100 lb
(4,127 kg)
1
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
9,900 lb
(4,490 kg)
1
9,900 lb
(4,490 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
396
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD 3.31
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
RWD
RWD
RWD
4WD
4WD
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.73
15,300 lb
(6,940 kg)
1
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
18,000 lb
(8,164 kg)
2
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
17,900 lb
(8,119 kg)
2
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
12,800 lb
(5,806 kg)
2
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
397
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Regular
Cab –
141 in
(3,581 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Super Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD
RWD
RWD
4WD
RWD
RWD
4WD
4WD
3.73
3.15
3.31
3.31
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.73
18,300 lb
(8,300 kg)
2
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
15,500 lb
(7,030 kg)
1
17,800 lb
(8,073 kg)
2
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
17,600 lb
(7,983 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
9,800 lb
(4,445 kg)
1
9,800 lb
(4,445 kg)
1
9,500 lb
(4,309 kg)
1
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
12,800 lb
(5,805 kg)
2
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
398
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Driveline
RWD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
3.15
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
RWD 3.31
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
4WD 3.31
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
9,400 lb
(4,263 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
RWD 3.73
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg) 1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
RWD 3.73
18,200 lb
(8,255 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
RWD
4WD
3.73
3.73
18,300 lb
(8,300 kg)
2
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
4WD 3.73
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
399
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Super Cab
– 163 in
(4,140 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Crew Cab
– 145 in
(3,675 mm)
Driveline
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
4WD
RWD
RWD
4WD
RWD
RWD
4WD
4WD
3.73
3.15
3.31
3.31
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.73
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
2
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
18,100 lb
(8,210 kg)
2
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
9,700 lb
(4,399 kg)
1
9,400 lb
(4,263 kg)
1
10,500 lb
(4,762 kg)
1
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg)
1
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
400
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Driveline
RWD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
3.15
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.31
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
9,600 lb
(4,354 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
4WD 3.31
14,800 lb
(6,713 kg)
1
9,300 lb
(4,218 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD 3.73
15,600 lb
(7,076 kg)
1
10,400 lb
(4,717 kg) 1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
RWD 3.73
18,200 lb
(8,255 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
RWD
4WD
3.73
3.73
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
1
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
2
10,300 lb
(4,672 kg)
1
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
401
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
Cab –
Wheelbase in
(mm)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Driveline
4WD
Rear Axle
Ratio
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight
Rating
3.73
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg)
2
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum
Trailer
Frontal
Area
12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Crew Cab
– 157 in
(3,989 mm)
Heavy
Payload
Package
4WD 3.73
18,600 lb
(8,436 kg)
2
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
1 Heavy duty trailer tow package.
2 Max duty trailer tow package.
Note: All values calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2
60 ft² (5.6
m²)
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) or 36 ft² (3.4
m²) trailer frontal area with the medium duty trailer tow package.
Note: Exceeding these limitations could significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy.
402
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
What Is the Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight
The maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow.
For additional information, visit
www.fleet.ford.com/ towing-guides
.
Calculating the Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model and axle ratio.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, for example a draw bar, ball, locks or weight distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is considered part of the payload for your vehicle. Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
403
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
Towing a Trailer – Information Messages
Message
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See
Manual
Description
The left-hand trailer turn lamp requires service.
The right-hand trailer turn lamp requires service.
The trailer battery requires service.
The trailer lighting module requires service.
Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
The trailer stoplamps require service.
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not
Setup See Manual
The trailer sway control detects trailer sway. Reduce the vehicle's speed.
Displays when one or more tires on the trailer is above the recommended temperature.
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A trailer tire pressure sensor requires service. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as possible.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system requires service. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as possible.
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
404
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
The trailer brake controller assists in smooth and effective trailer braking based on the towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE
CONTROLLER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Use the integrated trailer brake controller to properly adjust the trailer brakes and check all connections before towing a trailer.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
• Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation.
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
USING THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
1.
Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. Your vehicle warranty does not cover issues with your trailer.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions.
Note: Select default mode if the trailer has surge brakes, or no brakes at all. The system has no effect on the braking performance of the trailer in either of these cases.
Note: If a trailer is connected by a four-pin connector, the trailer braking function will not be supported.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a message confirming connection appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment to find the desired starting point. A gain setting of
6.0 is a good starting point for heavier loads.
Note: Use the following steps to adjust the gain setting whenever road, weather and trailer, or vehicle loading conditions, change from when you initially set the gain.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface and squeeze the manual control lever completely.
405
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Note: Only perform this procedure at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
Note: The trailer brake controller reduces output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph
(18 km/h) so that trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available when applying the brakes using your vehicle's brake pedal, not the controller.
Note: Your vehicle's brake system and the trailer brake system work independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle's brakes whether you attach a trailer or not.
Note: With the proper electrical connection, pressing your vehicle brake pedal or using the manual control lever illuminates both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Note: When you switch the engine off, the controller output is disabled and the display and module shut down. The controller module and display turn on when you switch the ignition on.
Adjusting the Trailer Brake Gain
E333154
A
B
Increase or decrease the amount of gain in set increments.
Slide the control to engage the trailer brakes.
Note: Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the first time.
Note: The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes. Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: Setting adjustments are saved when a trailer profile is selected.
ADJUSTING THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
MODE
Select the correct integrated trailer brake controller mode option using the touchscreen.
Note: Trailer brake gain settings are saved to the active trailer profile.
406
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
Selecting the Trailer Brake Type
1.
Press Default for trailers with electromagnetic drum brake systems or press Electric over Hydraulic for trailers with electrically actuated hydraulic brake systems.
2. Press Save .
Selecting the Trailer Brake Effort
1.
Select a setting for your trailer.
Note: The default value is Low and is the recommended setting for most trailers.
Select a different setting if your trailer's brakes require more initial voltage, or you prefer more aggressive trailer braking.
2. Press Save .
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller – Information Messages
Message
Trailer Connected
Trailer Disconnected
Trailer Wiring Fault
Action
The system detects a correct trailer connection during a given ignition cycle.
The system detects the trailer wiring connection is disconnected, during a given ignition cycle.
The system detects an electrical fault in the trailer brake circuit. If this message appears without a trailer attached, see your authorized dealer. If a trailer is attached, inspect and repair the trailer wiring.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0}
No Trailer
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake when you do not have a trailer connected.
407
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
– Frequently Asked Questions
How do I determine if there is an issue with the wiring on my vehicle?
A message displays accompanied by a single tone, when no trailer is connected. This indicates that the issue is between the trailer brake controller and the 7-pin connector at the bumper.
How do I determine if there is an issue with the wiring on my trailer?
A message only displays with a trailer connected. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance.
408
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Sway Control
HOW DOES TRAILER SWAY
CONTROL WORK
Trailer Sway Control
The system applies the brakes to the individual wheels and reduces engine torque to aid vehicle stability.
If the trailer begins to sway, the stability control lamp flashes and the message
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed appears in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Check the vertical weight on the tow ball and trailer load distribution.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may activate multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
SWITCHING TRAILER SWAY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing .
3. Switch Trailer Sway Control on or off.
The system turns on each time you start your vehicle.
409
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
WHAT IS THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID
The Pro Trailer Backup Assist utilizes the control knob on the instrument panel to help you steer a trailer. Turn the control knob in the direction you want the trailer to go and the system steers the vehicle.
HOW DOES THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID WORK
The trailer reversing aid uses a sensor attached to the trailer to detect the trailer angle relative to the towing vehicle and provides instructions, graphics and camera views on the touchscreen.
TRAILER REVERSING AID
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra driving aid. It does not replace your attention and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake pedal when necessary, you may collide with another vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always be aware of your vehicle and trailer combination, and the surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or prevent your vehicle or trailer from making contact with obstacles in the surrounding environment.
Note: The front end of your vehicle swings out when changing the direction of the trailer.
Note: In certain conditions, the trailer could turn faster or the trailer angle could increase more than anticipated. Always monitor the clearance between the trailer and vehicle and the surroundings.
SETTING UP THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID FOR A
CONVENTIONAL TRAILER
Configuring the Trailer
You must configure a trailer in the system to use the trailer reversing aids. This is a one-time setup process and the trailer information is saved in the system for the next time you use that trailer.
The system only works with conventional trailers. It does not work with other types including goose neck and fifth wheel. The following illustration shows examples of conventional trailers on the left-hand side.
410
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Configuring the Trailer in the
Touchscreen
E209766
Positioning the Trailer
Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect the electrical wiring harness. Check to
make sure that the wiring is working. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. See Connecting a Trailer
E310335
1.
Press the button to switch the system on.
2. Press Add Trailer on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the directions on the touchscreen to enter the trailer name and trailer type, then proceed to the sensor setup.
E209760
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle are in line with each other. You can do this by putting the transmission in drive (D) and pulling straight forward.
411
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Trailer Sensor Installation
E315959
E335221
Refer to the instructions included with your trailer sensor for detailed information regarding installation.
Note: Make sure the arrows on the sensor housing are facing up. Mount the sensor to a vertical part of the trailer that pivots when you turn your vehicle. Do not mount to a stationary surface such as the truck side of the trailer hitch.
Calibrating the System
Calibrating the system requires driving forward and turning left or right. Follow the instructions on the touchscreen to complete the calibration process.
Note: To calibrate the system, you need an area where you can safely drive forward and turn left or right. An open parking lot is an ideal place to perform the calibration.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight when instructed to by the touchscreen. If the steering wheel is in a turned position during this instruction, the calibration pauses.
Note: During calibration, the system determines the trailer length. The system supports trailer lengths of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m) distance from the hitch point to the center of the axle or axles. The system is designed to work with drawbars that have a license plate to hitch ball center measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars or trailers that have a length outside of this range as the system performance degrades and could cause improper system function.
Note: The touchscreen shows if you are going too slow or fast. Calibration pauses if the speed is outside the required range of
2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Note: You need to turn approximately 90° to calibrate the system. Some trailers could require you to drive straight then turn multiple times before calibration is complete. The touchscreen provides instructions and notifies you when calibration is complete.
412
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
SWITCHING THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID ON AND OFF
USING THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID CONTROLLER
Use the control knob to steer the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and turn the control knob instead. The control knob acts as the steering control for the trailer.
E313025
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make the trailer go left.
E310335
Press the button and use the touchscreen to select the connected trailer.
Note: A trailer must be configured to use
Pro Trailer Backup Assist. See Configuring the Trailer (page 410).
Note: If you use the steering wheel when using Pro Trailer Backup Assist, the system turns off and a message displays in the touchscreen.
Note: If the trailer was connected just prior to turning the system on, you may need to drive forward to initialize the system. Follow the instructions on the touchscreen to activate the system.
E313026
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer go right.
413
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
E313027
Release the knob when the trailer is moving in the direction you want.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the sharper the trailer turns.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the knob results in a jerky movement of the vehicle.
Note: You may have to use the knob to correct the trailer direction when attempting to move the trailer straight back under some conditions.
USING THE TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE VIEWS
Up to seven camera views could be available when using the trailer reversing aid. Use the view that helps you the most when reversing your vehicle and trailer.
360° camera view. Shows a
360° view on the right-hand side
E310996 of the touchscreen with a rear camera view on the left-hand side of the touchscreen.
E310967
Rear view camera view. Shows your trailer hitch or what is directly behind your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view camera view.
Shows a 180° degree view of what is behind your vehicle.
Bed camera view. Shows the truck bed.
E310995
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm) touchscreen, this view provides a picture-in-picture view.
E311776
Trailer AUX camera view. Shows a rear view camera image of what is behind your trailer. You need to separately purchase this camera and have it installed.
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm) touchscreen, this view provides a picture-in-picture view.
Trailer reverse guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
E310965 your truck and the trailer. In auto mode, this view moves as the trailer moves so that you do not have to adjust the camera as you turn. Left and right arrows let you see other camera views.
Auto. Press to return to auto view.
E315644
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
Hitch Angle Graphic
The hitch angle graphic shows a small representation of your truck and trailer with visual feedback to help you monitor the trailer. The graphic shows two different colored lines for the trailer hitch angle. A black line shows you where your trailer is in relation to your vehicle. The white line represents the amount the trailer can turn based on knob input.
The graphic shows a yellow and red zone for the hitch angle to warn you of a high angle condition that could require you to pull forward to reduce the hitch angle. The angle limits for each zone vary based on the trailer length.
414
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
The yellow zone indicates you are approaching the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system. When the trailer enters this zone, it is more difficult to reduce the trailer turn when backing up.
It may be necessary to put your vehicle back into drive (D) and pull forward to get the truck and trailer back to an in-line position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system. Immediately stop reversing.
Put your vehicle into drive (D) and pull forward until the trailer is no longer in the red zone.
Setting the Trailer Angle Limit
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing .
3. Press Manage trailers .
4. Press Pro Trailer Backup Assist .
5. Press Trailer Angle Limit .
6. Press a setting.
Normal Control Angle
Default setting. This provides a balanced limit that returns from a turn to straight backing with minimal change to the trailer direction.
Max Control Angle
Increases the trailer angle limit close to the maximum controllable angle to allow sharper turns but also causes more change in the trailer direction when straightening out from a turn.
415
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
TRAILER REVERSING AID - TROUBLESHOOTING
Trailer Reversing Aid – Information Messages
Message
Detecting Trailer Please Wait…
Description
Displays when the system turns on and is initializing.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not
Available
Trailer Reverse Guidance System is Not
Available
A condition exists that prevents the system from turning on. If the message continues to display, visit your authorized dealer to have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving Required to Initialize Steering Press Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving Required to Initialize Steering Press OK to Exit
The steering system needs to learn internal parameters to fully enable the feature.
Drive your vehicle straight forward above
25 mph (40 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now
Maximum trailer angle Press Knob to Exit
Stop now. Deactivated by trailer angle.
Displays when you reach the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get the truck and trailer back to an in-line position.
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the trailer calibration.
Delete the trailer from the system and repeat the setup and calibration process.
Displays when you exceed the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get your vehicle and trailer back to an in-line position, then activate the system by selecting the connected trailer and following the instructions on the touchscreen.
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the trailer setup and calibration. Delete the trailer from the system and repeat the setup and calibration process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take
Control of Steering Wheel
Displays when the system can no longer steer the vehicle and you must take over steering.
416
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Message
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
OK to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit
Description
Displays when the system does not detect the sensor. Check the sensor connection, that there is no damaged wiring between the connector and sensor and that there is only one sensor connected.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
OK to Exit
These messages display when the system does not detect the trailer. Check that the sensor is correctly installed and the trailer length is within the allowed range.
If these messages continue to display, visit your authorized dealer to have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
OK to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now
System Not Active Press Knob to Exit
These messages display when your vehicle has not moved after the trailer sensor is connected or extended operation below
1 mph (1 km/h). Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) to initialize the system.
Displays when your vehicle is backing up but the system is not activated. Select the connected trailer on the touchscreen and follow the instructions to activate the system.
This message also displays when you back up during the calibration process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Backup Slowly
Turn Knob to Steer Press Knob to Exit
Displays when the system turns on and is available to use.
417
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Trailer Reversing Aid – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does the trailer not reverse straight?
Verify the sensor is correctly installed.
Other factors such as the hitch connection, road camber, road slope and trailer suspension could influence how straight the system can reverse the trailer when the control knob is not turned. You can compensate for the trailer drifting to the right or left by slowly turning the knob until the trailer is following your desired path and then holding the knob in that position.
Why does the system not detect a sensor?
There could be an issue with the connection, the wiring harness could be damaged, you could have multiple sensors connected or the sensor could be incorrectly installed. Check that the
12-way connector is fully inserted into the 12-way socket. The red rubber seal is not visible when the connector is fully inserted. Also check that the wiring harness sensor connection is fully inserted at the trailer sensor, and check for damaged wiring between the 12-way connector and the trailer sensor. Also, check that the sensor is installed on a vertical surface with the arrows pointing straight up.
What does it mean if the system pauses during calibration?
There could be steering input or trailer movement during the straight drive portion of the calibration process.
What does it mean if the system remains on one message for an extended time during calibration?
The sensor could be incorrectly installed, the trailer length could be outside the allowed range or the road surface could be too rough or bumpy.
What does it mean if the system displays that it is not available?
There could be a sub-system that the system uses that is not correctly operating or there could be a battery voltage issue. If the system continues to display it is not available, visit your authorized dealer to have your vehicle checked.
What does it mean if the system displays that driving is required to initialize steering?
The steering system needs to learn internal parameters to fully turn on the feature. Drive your vehicle straight forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes. This could also occur when your vehicle is new, there is a battery voltage issue or if the steering system has been serviced.
What does it mean if the system does not detect a trailer when configured with a sensor?
Verify that the sensor is properly
Installation (page 412). Repeat
calibration on a different route if you have verified sensor installation.
418
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
What does it mean if the system requires you to pull forward to initialize?
This occurs when the vehicle has not moved during the current key cycle after you connect and select the trailer in the touchscreen or you operate the system at speeds below 1 mph
(1 km/h) for an extended period of time. Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) and the system indicates when it initializes.
What does it mean if the trailer is at its maximum angle or the system deactivated by trailer angle?
You are at the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system. Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get the truck and trailer back to an in-line position. If this message consistently displays, this could indicate the sensor is incorrectly installed, the trailer needs to be recalibrated or the drawbar or the trailer dimensions are outside of the supported range. The system is designed to work with drawbars that have a license plate to hitch ball center measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when installed. The system is designed to work with trailers that have a hitch point to center of the axle or axles measurement of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m). Do not attempt to use drawbars or trailers that have a length outside of this range as the system performance degrades and could cause improper system function.
Check that the correct trailer is selected in the touchscreen. Verify the sensor is installed according to the instructions included in the sensor kit and check that the drawbar and the trailer dimensions are within the allowed range. Then, delete the trailer from the system and repeat the setup process to calibrate the trailer.
What does it mean when the system tells you to take control of the steering wheel?
The system is no longer steering the vehicle and you must take over steering. There are four reasons the system could display this message.
The first reason the system could display this message is that you have touched the steering wheel when the system is steering. The second reason the system could display this message is that you have exceeded the maximum speed for the feature. The third reason the system could display this message is that the trailer is not detected. The final reason the system could display this message is that an internal condition for system operation is not met that requires your vehicle to return to manual control of the steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used with the same trailer connection every time you choose the trailer from the touchscreen.
When using a different drawbar or a different pin hole on drawbars with more than one, connecting the drawbar to your vehicle affects the trailer position and you may need to repeat the trailer setup and calibration process.
419
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
WHAT IS THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID
ProTrailer Back-Up Assist with Trailer
Reverse Guidance
Trailer Reverse Guidance provides views and graphics on the touchscreen to help you steer your vehicle when you backup a trailer.
HOW DOES THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID WORK
The trailer reversing aid uses a sensor attached to the trailer to detect the trailer angle relative to the towing vehicle and provides instructions, graphics and camera views on the touchscreen.
TRAILER REVERSING AID
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra driving aid. It does not replace your attention and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake pedal when necessary, you may collide with another vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always be aware of your vehicle and trailer combination, and the surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or prevent your vehicle or trailer from making contact with obstacles in the surrounding environment.
Note: The front end of your vehicle swings out when changing the direction of the trailer.
Note: In certain conditions, the trailer could turn faster or the trailer angle could increase more than anticipated. Always monitor the clearance between the trailer and vehicle and the surroundings.
SETTING UP THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID FOR A
CONVENTIONAL TRAILER
Configuring the Trailer
You must configure a trailer in the system to use the trailer reversing aids. This is a one-time setup process and the trailer information is saved in the system for the next time you use that trailer.
The system only works with conventional trailers. It does not work with other types including goose neck and fifth wheel. The following illustration shows examples of conventional trailers on the left-hand side.
420
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
Note: Trailer Reverse Guidance camera views are available with no trailer setup.
However, complete functionality including graphics and automatic view switching is enabled by setup. Setup is required to enable the Trailer Backup Assist feature.
E209766
Positioning the Trailer
Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect the electrical wiring harness. Check to
make sure that the wiring is working. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 371).
E209760
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle are in line with each other. You can do this by putting the transmission in drive (D) and pulling straight forward.
Configuring the Trailer in the
Touchscreen
1.
Shift to reverse (R).
2. Press the camera view button.
3. Press the trailer view icon.
4. Press Add Trailer .
5. Follow the directions on the touchscreen to enter the trailer name and trailer type, then proceed to the sensor setup.
Trailer Sensor Installation
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. See Connecting a Trailer
E315959
421
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
E335221
Refer to the instructions included with your trailer sensor for detailed information regarding installation.
Note: Make sure the arrows on the sensor housing are facing up. Mount the sensor to a vertical part of the trailer that pivots when you turn your vehicle. Do not mount to a stationary surface such as the truck side of the trailer hitch.
Calibrating the System
Calibrating the system requires driving forward and turning left or right. Follow the instructions on the touchscreen to complete the calibration process.
Note: To calibrate the system, you need an area where you can safely drive forward and turn left or right. An open parking lot is an ideal place to perform the calibration.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight when instructed to by the touchscreen. If the steering wheel is in a turned position during this instruction, the calibration pauses.
Note: During calibration, the system determines the trailer length. The system supports trailer lengths of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m) distance from the hitch point to the center of the axle or axles. The system is designed to work with drawbars that have a license plate to hitch ball center measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars or trailers that have a length outside of this range as the system performance degrades and could cause improper system function.
Note: The touchscreen shows if you are going too slow or fast. Calibration pauses if the speed is outside the required range of
2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Note: You need to turn approximately 90° to calibrate the system. Some trailers could require you to drive straight then turn multiple times before calibration is complete. The touchscreen provides instructions and notifies you when calibration is complete.
SWITCHING THE TRAILER
REVERSING AID ON AND OFF
Shift into reverse (R), press the rear camera button to expand the menu, press the trailer icon and use the touchscreen to select the connected trailer.
Note: If the trailer was connected just prior to turning the system on, you may need to drive forward to initialize the system. Follow the instructions on the touchscreen to activate the system.
USING THE TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE VIEWS
Up to seven camera views could be available when using the trailer reversing aid. Use the view that helps you the most when reversing your vehicle and trailer.
422
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
360° camera view. Shows a
E310996
360° view on the right-hand side of the touchscreen with a rear camera view on the left-hand side of the touchscreen.
E310967
Rear view camera view. Shows your trailer hitch or what is directly behind your vehicle.
E310974
Rear split view camera view.
Shows a 180° degree view of what is behind your vehicle.
Bed camera view. Shows the truck bed.
E310995
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm) touchscreen, this view provides a picture-in-picture view.
E311776
Trailer AUX camera view. Shows a rear view camera image of what is behind your trailer. You need to separately purchase this camera and have it installed.
Note: If you have a 12 in (30 cm) touchscreen, this view provides a picture-in-picture view.
Trailer reverse guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
E310965 your truck and the trailer. In auto mode, this view moves as the trailer moves so that you do not have to adjust the camera as you turn. Left and right arrows let you see other camera views.
Straight backup mode. Shows which way to turn your steering
E224484 wheel to keep the trailer straight.
Use this view when you want to keep your trailer completely in line with your truck.
Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle into drive (D), pull forward and straighten out the vehicle and trailer before engaging straight backup mode.
E224486
This takes you back to the 360° camera system and out of the trailer reverse guidance feature.
Auto. Press to return to auto view.
E315644
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
Hitch Angle Graphic
The hitch angle graphic shows a small representation of your truck and trailer with visual feedback to help you monitor the trailer. The graphic shows two different colored lines for the trailer hitch angle. A black line shows you where your trailer is in relation to your vehicle. The white line represents the amount the trailer can turn based on steering wheel position.
The graphic shows a yellow and red zone for the hitch angle to warn you of a high angle condition that could require you to pull forward to reduce the hitch angle. The angle limits for each zone vary based on the trailer length.
The yellow zone indicates you are approaching the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system. When the trailer enters this zone, it is more difficult to reduce the trailer turn when backing up.
It may be necessary to put your vehicle back into drive (D) and pull forward to get the truck and trailer back to an in-line position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system. Immediately stop reversing.
Put your vehicle into drive (D) and pull forward until the trailer is no longer in the red zone.
423
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
TRAILER REVERSING AID - TROUBLESHOOTING
Trailer Reversing Aid – Information Messages
Message
Detecting Trailer Please Wait…
Description
Displays when the system turns on and is initializing.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not
Available
Trailer Reverse Guidance System is Not
Available
A condition exists that prevents the system from turning on. If the message continues to display, visit your authorized dealer to have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving Required to Initialize Steering Press Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving Required to Initialize Steering Press OK to Exit
The steering system needs to learn internal parameters to fully enable the feature.
Drive your vehicle straight forward above
25 mph (40 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now
Maximum trailer angle Press Knob to Exit
Stop now. Deactivated by trailer angle.
Displays when you reach the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get the truck and trailer back to an in-line position.
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the trailer calibration.
Delete the trailer from the system and repeat the setup and calibration process.
Displays when you exceed the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system.
Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get your vehicle and trailer back to an in-line position, then activate the system by selecting the connected trailer and following the instructions on the touchscreen.
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the trailer setup and calibration. Delete the trailer from the system and repeat the setup and calibration process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take
Control of Steering Wheel
Displays when the system can no longer steer the vehicle and you must take over steering.
424
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
Message
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Sensor Not
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
OK to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit
Description
Displays when the system does not detect the sensor. Check the sensor connection, that there is no damaged wiring between the connector and sensor and that there is only one sensor connected.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
OK to Exit
These messages display when the system does not detect the trailer. Check that the sensor is correctly installed and the trailer length is within the allowed range.
If these messages continue to display, visit your authorized dealer to have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
Knob to Exit
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press
OK to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now
System Not Active Press Knob to Exit
These messages display when your vehicle has not moved after the trailer sensor is connected or extended operation below
1 mph (1 km/h). Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) to initialize the system.
Displays when your vehicle is backing up but the system is not activated. Select the connected trailer on the touchscreen and follow the instructions to activate the system.
This message also displays when you back up during the calibration process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Backup Slowly
Turn Knob to Steer Press Knob to Exit
Displays when the system turns on and is available to use.
425
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
Trailer Reversing Aid – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why does the trailer not reverse straight?
Verify the sensor is correctly installed.
Other factors such as the hitch connection, road camber, road slope and trailer suspension could influence how straight the system can reverse the trailer when the control knob is not turned. You can compensate for the trailer drifting to the right or left by slowly turning the knob until the trailer is following your desired path and then holding the knob in that position.
Why does the system not detect a sensor?
There could be an issue with the connection, the wiring harness could be damaged, you could have multiple sensors connected or the sensor could be incorrectly installed. Check that the
12-way connector is fully inserted into the 12-way socket. The red rubber seal is not visible when the connector is fully inserted. Also check that the wiring harness sensor connection is fully inserted at the trailer sensor, and check for damaged wiring between the 12-way connector and the trailer sensor. Also, check that the sensor is installed on a vertical surface with the arrows pointing straight up.
What does it mean if the system pauses during calibration?
There could be steering input or trailer movement during the straight drive portion of the calibration process.
What does it mean if the system remains on one message for an extended time during calibration?
The sensor could be incorrectly installed, the trailer length could be outside the allowed range or the road surface could be too rough or bumpy.
What does it mean if the system displays that it is not available?
There could be a sub-system that the system uses that is not correctly operating or there could be a battery voltage issue. If the system continues to display it is not available, visit your authorized dealer to have your vehicle checked.
What does it mean if the system displays that driving is required to initialize steering?
The steering system needs to learn internal parameters to fully turn on the feature. Drive your vehicle straight forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes. This could also occur when your vehicle is new, there is a battery voltage issue or if the steering system has been serviced.
What does it mean if the system does not detect a trailer when configured with a sensor?
Verify that the sensor is properly
Installation (page 412). Repeat
calibration on a different route if you have verified sensor installation.
426
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trailer Reversing Aid - Vehicles With: Trailer Reverse
Guidance (TRG)
What does it mean if the system requires you to pull forward to initialize?
This occurs when the vehicle has not moved during the current key cycle after you connect and select the trailer in the touchscreen or you operate the system at speeds below 1 mph
(1 km/h) for an extended period of time. Drive forward above 2 mph
(3 km/h) and the system indicates when it initializes.
What does it mean if the trailer is at its maximum angle or the system deactivated by trailer angle?
You are at the maximum controllable trailer angle for the system. Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get the truck and trailer back to an in-line position. If this message consistently displays, this could indicate the sensor is incorrectly installed, the trailer needs to be recalibrated or the drawbar or the trailer dimensions are outside of the supported range. The system is designed to work with drawbars that have a license plate to hitch ball center measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when installed. The system is designed to work with trailers that have a hitch point to center of the axle or axles measurement of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m). Do not attempt to use drawbars or trailers that have a length outside of this range as the system performance degrades and could cause improper system function.
Check that the correct trailer is selected in the touchscreen. Verify the sensor is installed according to the instructions included in the sensor kit and check that the drawbar and the trailer dimensions are within the allowed range. Then, delete the trailer from the system and repeat the setup process to calibrate the trailer.
What does it mean when the system tells you to take control of the steering wheel?
The system is no longer steering the vehicle and you must take over steering. There are four reasons the system could display this message.
The first reason the system could display this message is that you have touched the steering wheel when the system is steering. The second reason the system could display this message is that you have exceeded the maximum speed for the feature. The third reason the system could display this message is that the trailer is not detected. The final reason the system could display this message is that an internal condition for system operation is not met that requires your vehicle to return to manual control of the steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used with the same trailer connection every time you choose the trailer from the touchscreen.
When using a different drawbar or a different pin hole on drawbars with more than one, connecting the drawbar to your vehicle affects the trailer position and you may need to repeat the trailer setup and calibration process.
427
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
OFF-ROAD DRIVING
What Is Off-Road Driving
Off-road driving is driving your vehicle on unsurfaced roads or trails, made from dirt, rocks, sand and mud.
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques
Off-road Driving Hints
Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a basic vehicle inspection should be done to make sure that the vehicle is in top working condition. It is always recommended that at least two vehicles are used while off-roading. The buddy system helps make sure that help is close at hand should a vehicle become stuck or damaged. It is also wise to take supplies such as a first aid kit, supply of water, tow strap, cell or satellite phone with you any time an off-road excursion is planned.
1.
Grip the steering wheel with thumbs on the outside of the rim. This will reduce the risk of injury due to abrupt steering wheel motions that occur when negotiating rough terrain.
2. Throttle, brake and steering inputs should be made in a smooth and controlled manner. Sudden inputs to the controls can cause loss of traction or upset the vehicle, especially while on loose terrain or while crossing obstacles such as rocks or logs.
3. Look ahead on your route noting upcoming obstacles, or any other factors which may indicate a change in available traction, and adjust the vehicle speed and route accordingly.
4. When driving off-road, if the front or rear suspension is bottoming out and/or excessive contact with the skid-plates is encountered, reduce vehicle speed to avoid potential damage to the vehicle.
5. When with other vehicles, it is recommended that communication is used, and the lead vehicle notify other vehicles of obstacles that could cause potential vehicle damage.
6. Always keep available ground clearance in mind and pick a route that minimizes the risk of catching the underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
7.
When negotiating low speed obstacles, applying light brake pressure in conjunction with the throttle will help prevent the vehicle from jerking and will allow you to negotiate the obstacle in a more controlled manner. Using 4L will also help with this.
8. Off-roading requires a high degree of concentration. Even if your local law does not prohibit alcohol use while driving off-road, Ford strongly recommends against drinking if you plan to off-road.
Crossing Obstacles
• Review the path ahead before attempting to cross any obstacle. It is best if the obstacle is reviewed from outside the vehicle so that there is a good understanding of terrain condition both in front of and behind the obstacle.
• Approach obstacles slowly.
428
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
• If a large obstacle such as a rock cannot be avoided, choose a path that places the rock directly under the tire rather than the undercarriage of the vehicle. This will help prevent damage to the vehicle.
• Ditches and washouts should be crossed at a 45° angle, allowing each wheel to independently cross the obstacle.
Hill Climbing
WARNING: Extreme care should be used when steering the vehicle in reverse down a slope so as not to cause the vehicle to swerve out of control.
• Always attempt to climb a steep hill along the fall line of the slope and not diagonally.
• If the vehicle is unable to make it up the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back down the slope. Place the vehicle in low range and slowly back down in reverse.
• When descending a steep slope, select low gear and engage hill descent control. Use the throttle and brake pedals to control your descent speed.
Note: Hill descent control is functional in reverse and should be used in this situation.
Water Wading
E310941
• Always determine the depth before attempting a water crossing. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs.
• Slowly proceed and avoid splashing water any more than is necessary.
• Be aware that obstacles and debris may be beneath the water’s surface.
• Keep the doors fully closed during the water crossing.
• After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so check the brakes, horn, lights, and steering wheel to confirm those systems are functioning properly.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-
Road
WARNING: Do not attempt to cross a deep, fast flowing body of water.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
As the water depth increases, you must reduce your vehicle speed to avoid potential vehicle damage.
WARNING: After off-road use, before returning to the road, check the wheels and tires for damage. Off-road use may cause damage to your wheels and tires that can lead to tire failure, loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
429
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Driving off-road places more stress on your vehicle than most on-road driving. After driving off-road check for damage to your vehicle and, if necessary, have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
Inspect the underbody of your vehicle by checking tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Check the radiator for mud and debris and clean as needed.
Remove accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard or hide damage to the fuel lines, brake hoses, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, inspect the underbody and clean your vehicle as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause vibrations while driving and wheel imbalance.
Remove the material to resolve the problem.
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some components and systems can be affected at temperatures below approximately
-13°F (-25°C).
BREAKING-IN
Tires
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics.
Brakes and Clutch
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch if possible for the first 100 mi (150 km) in town and for the first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) on freeways.
DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
The following helps to improve fuel consumption:
• There is no need to wait for your engine to warm up. The vehicle is ready to drive immediately after starting.
• Your fuel consumption should improve throughout your hybrid's break-in period.
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Moderate braking is particularly important since it allows you to maximize the energy captured by the regenerative braking system.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Driving on flat terrain.
• Drive at reasonable speeds and observe posted speed limits.
• Shut all windows when driving at high speeds.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Drive with the tonneau cover installed if your vehicle comes with one.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and carry out the recommended checks.
• Perform all scheduled maintenance.
430
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Note: Having your engine running is not always an indication of inefficiency. In some cases, it is actually more efficient than driving in electric mode.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel consumption:
• Revving the engine.
• Aggressive driving increases the amount of energy required to move your vehicle.
• Driving in lower temperatures during the first 5–10 mi (12–16 km) of driving.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle like bug deflectors, rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski racks or luggage racks.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Driving with the wheels out of alignment.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to both retention devices so that it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This could result in the floor mat interfering with the operation of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while your vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make sure they are secure.
431
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles Without: Snow Plow Mode
SNOW PLOWING
PRECAUTIONS
Your vehicle is not approved for snow plowing. Never snow plow with your vehicle.
432
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With: Snow Plow Mode
SNOW PLOWING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including hood, bumper system, frame, front end body structure, tow hooks and hood pins) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify or add equipment to the front end of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Look for an alterer’s label on your vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Note: Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Contact an authorized dealer for additional information.
Note: Do not remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so could cause damage to your vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible airbag deployment.
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
WITH A SNOWPLOW
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book. For additional information, visit www.fordbbas.com
.
A typical snowplow installation affects the following:
•
Front gross axle weight rating. See
•
Gross vehicle weight rating. See What
Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
• Braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe. See the Ford
Workshop Manual .
•
Headlight aim. See Adjusting the
•
Tire air pressure. See Information on the Tire Sidewall (page 495).
Note: Do not exceed the front gross axle weight rating or gross vehicle weight rating.
Note: Your vehicle may require rear ballast weight for proper braking and steering.
Your vehicle has a driver and passenger airbag supplemental restraint system. The supplemental restraint system activates in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
433
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With: Snow Plow Mode
When operating your vehicle with a snowplow:
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Your engine could run at a higher temperature than normal.
• If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide maximum airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you do not need to worry about blade position to provide maximum airflow.
• Shift to 4L when plowing in small areas at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift to 4H when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds above
5 mph (8 km/h). Do not exceed
15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to reverse (R) until the engine is at idle and the wheels have stopped.
Note: Careless or high-speed driving when snowplowing, which results in significant vehicle decelerations, can deploy the airbag.
Such driving also increases the risk of accidents.
Note: Drive your vehicle at least 500 mi
(800 km) before using your vehicle for snowplowing.
Note: Follow the severe duty schedule for engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance (page
SNOWPLOW MODE
What Is Snowplow Mode
Snowplow mode reduces vehicle electrical load to allow the electrical system to have sufficient power to support residential snowplow use.
Switching Snowplow Mode On and
Off
Vehicles receive a physical button in the instrument panel or an option in the SYNC menu to enable snowplow mode.
Snowplow mode does not remember the setting when you switch your vehicle off.
You must re-enable the mode every time you wish to use it.
The following features turn off and are disabled in snowplow mode and cannot be turned back on until snowplow mode is switched off:
• 120 V inverter.
• Fog lamps.
• Heated and cooled front seats.
The body module also activates the snowplow relay that provides power to aftermarket snowplow controls.
Note: The electrical system supports the addition of a residential snowplow of up to
60 A continuous, and snowplow lights of up to 20 A continuous using snowplow mode. The system does not support snowplow usage with additional electrical aftermarket accessories.
Push Button
(If Equipped)
Press the snowplow button on the instrument panel to switch on snowplow mode. The snowplow button illuminates and a message displays.
434
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Snow Plowing - Vehicles With: Snow Plow Mode
Press the snowplow button or switch off the vehicle to switch off snowplow mode.
Using SYNC
(If Equipped)
1.
Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Snow Plow Mode .
3. Switch Snow Plow Mode on or off.
435
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original receipts.
436
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca
.
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
VEHICLE PRECAUTIONS -
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
In the event of damage or fire involving an electric vehicle or hybrid-electric vehicle:
• Assume the high-voltage battery and associated components are energized and fully charged.
• Physical damage to the vehicle or high-voltage battery could result in immediate or delayed release of toxic, flammable gases and fire.
Crashes
A crash or impact significant enough to require an emergency response for conventional vehicles would also require the same response for an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle.
If possible:
1.
Move your vehicle to a safe, nearby location and remain on the scene.
2. Roll down the windows before you switch your vehicle off.
3. Place your vehicle in park (P), apply the parking brake, switch off the vehicle, turn on the hazard flashers and move the key at least 16 ft (5 m) away from the vehicle.
Always:
• Call emergency assistance if needed and advise that an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.
• Avoid contact with leaking fluids and gases, and remain out of the way of oncoming traffic until emergency responders arrive.
• When emergency responders arrive, tell them that the vehicle involved is an electric vehicle or hybrid-electric vehicle.
Fires
As with any vehicle, call emergency assistance immediately if you see sparks, smoke or flames coming from the vehicle.
Remain a safe distance from the vehicle and try to stay clear of the smoke.
1.
Exit the vehicle immediately.
2. Advise emergency assistance that an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.
3. As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle, as they may be hazardous.
437
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
Post-Incident
1.
Do not store a severely damaged vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside a structure or within 49 ft (15 m) of any structure or vehicle.
2. Make sure that passenger and luggage compartments remain ventilated.
3. As with any vehicle, call emergency assistance immediately if you see sparks, smoke or flames coming from the vehicle.
SWITCHING THE HAZARD
FLASHERS ON AND OFF
The hazard flasher button is on the instrument panel. Press the button to switch the hazard flashers on if your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other road users.
When you switch the hazard flashers on, all front and rear direction indicators flash.
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the ignition is in any position, or if the key is not in the ignition. The battery loses charge and could have insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
Press the button again to switch them off.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
Jump Starting Precautions
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps.
WARNING: Make sure that the cables are clear of any moving parts and fuel delivery system parts.
WARNING: Connect batteries with only the same nominal voltage.
Do not attempt to push-start an automatic transmission vehicle. This could cause transmission damage.
Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. This could damage your vehicle's electrical system.
Preparing the Vehicle
Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
438
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
Jump Starting the Vehicle
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the negative jumper cable to any other part of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: If you are using a jump pack or booster box, follow the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) jumper cable to an exposed metal part of the disabled vehicle's engine, as shown in the following illustration, away from the battery and fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) jumper cable to a ground connection point if available.
E281345
1.
Pull the red rubber boot backward.
Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
E309115
Starting the Engine
1.
Start the engine of the booster vehicle and moderately rev the engine, or gently press the accelerator to keep the engine speed between 2000 and
3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected.
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on when disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage could blow the bulbs.
439
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
What Is the Post-Crash Alert
System
The system helps draw attention to your vehicle in the event of a serious impact.
How Does the Post-Crash Alert
System Work
The system is designed to turn the hazard flashers on and to intermittently sound the horn in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag or the seatbelt pretensioners.
Post-Crash Alert System
Limitations
Depending on applicable laws in the country your vehicle was built for, the horn does not sound in the event of a serious impact.
Switching the Post-Crash Alert
System Off
Press the hazard flasher switch or the unlock button on the remote control to switch the system off.
Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle battery runs out of charge.
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff
The automatic crash shutoff is designed to stop the fuel going to the engine in the event of a moderate or severe crash.
Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff.
Automatic Crash Shutoff
Precautions
WARNING: If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the fuel system checked. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle
1.
Switch the ignition off.
2. Attempt to start your vehicle.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle does not start after the third attempt, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
RECOVERY TOWING
Accessing the Front Towing Point
WARNING: Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure or separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Slowly remove the slack from the recovery strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death.
440
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Never link two straps together with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap breaks and can cause serious injury or death.
Your vehicle has frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding the applied load.
• Do not use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two to three times the gross vehicle weight of the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible cuts, tears or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and place it over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event the strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded heavier than its gross vehicle weight rating specified on the certification label.
• Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line, within 10 degrees.
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching into their path.
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a professional towing service or your roadside assistance service provider.
Your manufacturer produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Vehicle damage could occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Front-wheel and rear-wheel drive vehicles must have their designated drive wheels off the ground regardless of towing direction. Use tow dollies to prevent damage to the transmission.
441
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Crash and Breakdown Information
All-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicles require that all wheels be off the ground using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission and drive system.
442
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing Your Vehicle
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
PRECAUTIONS
Use the following guidelines when towing your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
RECREATIONALLY TOWING
YOUR VEHICLE - 4X4
WARNING: Do not disconnect the battery during recreational towing. It prevents the transfer case from shifting properly and may cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer case to its neutral position for recreational towing may cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park (P). It may injure the driver and others. Make sure you press the foot brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe position when you shift to neutral (N).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are to make sure that you do not damage the transmission.
You can only tow your vehicle with all wheels on the ground by placing the transfer case in its neutral position and engaging the recreational tow feature.
Perform the following steps after positioning your vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly securing them together.
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle.
Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its neutral position can damage vehicle components.
Note: You can check the towing status at any time by opening the driver door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on position. A message appears in the instrument cluster display confirming
Neutral Tow is on.
Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft alarm, make sure you switch perimeter
sensing on when towing. See Setting the
Alarm Security Level (page 112).
Switching Neutral Tow On
1.
Start your vehicle.
2. Press the 2H button on the four-wheel drive mode control.
3. Place your vehicle in temporary neutral
4. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the push button ignition switch once or turning the key as far toward the off position as possible. A message appears in the instrument cluster display.
5. Switch your vehicle to accessory mode by pressing the push button ignition switch once without pressing the brake pedal or by turning the key to the on position.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
443
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing Your Vehicle
7.
Using the instrument cluster controls on the steering wheel, select Settings .
8. Select Neutral Tow .
9. Press and hold the OK button until a confirmation message appears in the information display.
Note: If completed successfully, the information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral .
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see a confirmation message in the instrument cluster display, you must perform the procedure again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear noise as the transfer case shifts into its neutral position. This is normal.
10.
Release the brake pedal.
11.
Leave the transmission in neutral (N) and switch your vehicle off by pressing the push button ignition switch once without pressing the brake pedal or turning the key as far toward the off position.
Note: Vehicles with keys do not turn to the off position when the transmission is in neutral (N). You must leave the key in the ignition when towing. Use the keyless entry keypad or an extra set of keys to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Switching Neutral Tow Off
1.
With your vehicle properly secured to the tow vehicle, press the brake pedal and start the engine.
2. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the push button ignition switch once or turning the key as far towards the off position.
3. Place your vehicle in accessory mode by pressing the push button ignition switch once without pressing the brake pedal or by turning the ignition key to the on position.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift into park (P).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled .
Note: You must perform the switching neutral tow on and switching neutral tow off procedures again from the beginning if the indicator light and message do not display.
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal.
7.
Apply the parking brake, then disconnect your vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Release the parking brake, start the engine, and shift into drive (D) to make sure the transfer case is out of the neutral tow position.
9. If the transfer case does not successfully shift out of its neutral position, set the parking brake. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive
Forward Message
1.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start your vehicle.
3. Shift into neutral (N).
4. With the vehicle running, shift into drive
(D) and let the vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft (1 m).
444
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing Your Vehicle
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal.
5. Make sure the instrument cluster displays Neutral Tow Disabled .
RECREATIONALLY TOWING
YOUR VEHICLE - 4X2
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle with all wheels on the ground because vehicle or transmission damage could occur. You must recreational tow your vehicle with all four wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOWING
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without access to wheel dollies or a vehicle transport trailer, it can be flat-towed with all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration, under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
• Use the manual park release
procedure. See Using Manual Park
Release (page 257). Failure to do so
may result in damage to the transmission.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Towing Your Vehicle – Information Messages
Message
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
Shift Delayed Drive
Forward
Neutral Tow Disabled
Description
The transfer case is in the neutral position and your vehicle is safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground.
There is a transfer case gear tooth blockage present. With your vehicle on, shift the transmission into drive (D) and let the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
The transfer case is not in the neutral position and your vehicle is not safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground.
445
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
FUSE PRECAUTIONS UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
E311329
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse
Box
E322941
446
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood Fuse Box
E312324
Fuse
Location
1
3
4
5
Fuse Rating
40 A
40 A
30 A
5 A
6
7
8
25 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
Protected Component
Body control module - battery power in feed 1.
Body control module - battery power in feed 2.
Fuel pump.
Keep-alive power.
Powertrain control module (hybrid).
Powertrain control module power.
Powertrain control module power.
Powertrain control module power (hybrid).
Powertrain control module power (gas, diesel).
447
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
21
22
23
24
Fuse
Location
9
10
11
13
15
19
Fuse Rating
20 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
25 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
25 10 A
31
32
33
28
29
30
34
37
38
50 A
50 A
40 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
Fuses
Protected Component
Powertrain control module power.
Powertrain control module power (diesel).
Starter motor.
Blower motor.
Horn.
Snow plow switch.
Rear heated seats (gas).
Headlamp run/start feed.
Electronic power assist steering.
Electric brake boost.
Powertrain control module (gas, hybrid).
Transmission control module (diesel).
Glow plug control module (diesel).
Center high-mounted stop lamp camera.
Trailer camera.
2 kW inverter.
24 V alternator - run/start feed.
Analog rear video camera.
Electric brake boost.
Electric brake boost.
Driver power seat.
Passenger power seat.
Auxiliary power point.
Auxiliary power point.
USB smart charger.
Auxiliary power point.
Tailgate module.
Climate controlled seat module.
Power running boards.
448
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
83
84
85
67
69
80
82
86
91
95
98
58
64
65
49
50
55
56
Fuse
Location
41
42
47
48
Fuse Rating
10 A
25 A
15 A
20 A
30 A
15 A
25 A
25 A
30 A
50 A
20 A
50 A
40 A
30 A
20 A
50 A
50 A
50 A
25 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
100
101
105
15 A
15 A
50 A
449
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected Component
Power sliding back window.
Trailer brake control module.
Cooling fan.
Rear heated seats (diesel, hybrid)
Cooling fan.
Heated backlight (gas, hybrid).
Trailer tow park lamps.
Trailer tow stop and turn lamps.
Trailer tow backup lamps.
Four-wheel drive.
Transmission control module (diesel).
Transmission run/start.
Left-hand windshield wiper.
Not used (spare).
Four-wheel drive.
Supplemental heater (diesel).
Supplemental heater (diesel).
Supplemental heater (diesel).
Selective catalytic reduction system.
Trailer tow light module.
Powertrain control module power (hybrid).
Powertrain control module power (hybrid).
Coolant pumps (hybrid).
Left-hand headlamps.
Right-hand headlamps.
Active front steering.
134
138
139
146
159
160
162
Fuse
Location
107
121
124
125
168
169
170
Fuse Rating
5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
30 A
30 A
5 A
10 A
25 A
10 A
5 A
15 A
202
210
Relay
Number
R04
R06
R35
R36
60 A
30 A
Fuses
Protected Component
Trailer tow battery charge.
Fuel filter heater (diesel).
Rain sensor module.
USB smart charger.
Multi-contour seats relay.
Tailgate release.
USB smart charger.
Traction battery control module.
DC/DC power (hybrid).
Smart data link control.
Not used (spare).
Traction battery control module (hybrid).
Motor electric cool pump (hybrid).
Pedestrian alert control module (hybrid).
Traction battery control module (hybrid).
Electric motor cool pump (hybrid).
Body control module B+.
Body control module start stop.
Protected Component
Electronic fan relay 1.
Electronic fan relay 3.
Supplemental heater.
Supplemental heater.
450
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
BODY CONTROL MODULE
FUSE BOX
Locating the Body Control Module
Fuse Box
Accessing the Body Control
Module Fuse Box
E322804
E322874
Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control Module Fuse Box
E145984
451
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
Fuse
Location
1
2
3
4
Fuse Rating
—
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
—
10 A
10 A
5 A
5 A
—
—
7.5 A
13 7.5 A
15 A
15 A
—
7.5 A
7.5 A
5 A
5 A
21
22
5 A
5 A
Protected Component
Not used.
Delayed accessory feed.
Wireless charger.
Not used.
Not used.
Driver power window switch.
Gear shift module.
Cell phone passport module.
Combined sensor module.
Not used.
Not used.
Enhanced central gateway.
Climate control.
Instrument cluster.
Steering column control module.
Not used (spare).
Integrated control panel.
SYNC.
Not used.
Headlamp control module.
Not used.
Headlamp switch.
Passive start.
Ignition switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
Trailer brake switch.
Not used.
452
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
32
33
34
35
36
Fuse
Location
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Fuse Rating
30 A
30 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
15 A
30
31
5 A
10 A
37
38
20 A
—
30 A
5 A
15 A
20 A
30 A circuit breaker.
Protected Component
Driver door control module.
Moonroof.
Not used.
Passenger door control module.
Not used.
Amplifier.
12 inch display.
Adjustable pedals.
Not used.
RF receiver.
Driver monitor.
Terrain management switch.
Audio control module.
Not used.
Run/start relay.
400 watt inverter run/start.
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Rear heat seat run/start.
Adaptive front steering run/start.
Heated wheel (vehicles without adaptive front steering).
Advanced driver-assistance systems.
Rear power windows.
453
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES
Fuses
E267379
F
G
D
E
H
A
B
C
Micro 2.
Micro 3.
Maxi.
Mini.
M Case.
J Case.
J Case Low Profile.
Slotted M Case.
FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuses – Frequently Asked
Questions
When do I need to check a fuse?
If electrical components in the vehicle are not working.
When do I need to replace a fuse?
If a fuse has blown.
How do I identify a blown fuse?
You can identify a blown fuse by a broken wire within the fuse.
454
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Service your vehicle regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. See Capacities and
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material, such as cigarettes, away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Set the parking brake, shift the transmission to park (P) and block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
WARNING: Make sure that you fully latch the hood before driving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
E337831
1.
Pull the hood release handle under the left hand side of the instrument panel.
E338104
2. Pull the secondary release lever under the front of the hood near the center of your vehicle.
455
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make sure that it fully latches.
E338089
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
E337516
A.
B.
C.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).
456
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 468).
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.0L DIESEL
E337515
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 468).
457
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
G.
H.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.3L
E337514
E.
F.
G.
H.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 468).
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
458
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E313722
E.
F.
G.
H.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).
Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 462).
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brakes (page 273).
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 469).
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
459
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
E333718
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 462).
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 469).
Secondary coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
460
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L
E313297
E.
F.
G.
H.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 446).
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 462).
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 273).
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 469).
Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 463).
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 471).
461
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E249448
A
B
C
Minimum.
Nominal.
Maximum.
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview -
Gasoline
E270482
A
B
C
Minimum.
Nominal.
Maximum.
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview -
Diesel
Checking the Engine Oil Level
1.
Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the engine, or switch the engine off after warming up and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the oil level.
Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil.
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, immediately add oil.
7.
Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is fully seated.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
WARNING: Do not add engine oil when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that the vehicle warranty may not cover.
1.
Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
462
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage with an absorbent cloth.
Resetting the Engine Oil Change
Reminder - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen
1.
Press the Menu button on the steering wheel to enter the information display main menu.
2. Select Truck Info .
3. Select Oil Life .
4. Select Reset Oil Life .
5. Press and hold the OK button until the system reset confirmation appears.
Resetting the Engine Oil Change
Reminder - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen
Depending on your cluster, there are two paths to reset the engine oil change reminder.
Path 1
1.
Press the Menu button on the steering wheel to enter the information display main menu.
2. Select Settings .
3. Select Vehicle Maintenance .
4. Select Oil Life .
5. Press and hold the OK button until the system reset confirmation appears.
Path 2
1.
Press the Menu button on the steering wheel to enter the information display main menu.
2. Select Truck Info .
3. Select Engine Information .
4. Press and hold the OK button until the system reset confirmation appears.
Engine Oil Capacity and
Specification
For filling information, please refer to the
Capacities and Specifications section of
your owner's manual. See Engine Oil
Capacity and Specification (page 463).
CHECKING THE COOLANT
When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the minimum and maximum marks on the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration.
463
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable.
It is very important to use prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling
Specifications (page 524). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and could void the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 524).
Using water that has not been deionized may contribute to deposit formation, corrosion and plugging of the small cooling system passageways.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level.
Note: We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant.
3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn the cap clockwise until it contacts the hard stop.
4. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. If necessary, repeat step
2.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of engine coolant per month, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location.
Service your vehicle as soon as possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant substitute, as they can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
464
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates, you may need to increase the coolant concentration above 50%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection.
Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and could cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates, you may need to decrease the coolant concentration to 40%.
Note: Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and could cause engine damage.
Coolant Change
Change the coolant at specific mileage intervals. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information. See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 605).
Note: Dispose of used coolant in the appropriate manner.
Follow your community's regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury.
465
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management
(If Equipped) WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine could operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation:
1.
Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short period of time for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach a higher temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power in order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to stop your vehicle. You can continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following:
466
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
1.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. If the temperature does not drop after several minutes, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue.
ENGINE AIR FILTER
Checking the Engine Air Filter
Restriction Gauge - Diesel
467
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E254173
The air filter restriction gauge is in the upper housing of the air filter assembly.
Check the air filter restriction gauge whenever you open the hood to carry out general engine maintenance. Change the air filter element when the restriction gauge reads near the change filter line and the gauge is yellow. Allowing the restriction gauge to reach maximum affects engine performance and fuel economy.
Maintenance
After operating your vehicle during heavy snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and clear any snow and ice from the air filter housing inlet and reset the air filter restriction gauge.
• Extreme rain: The air filter element dries out after approximately 15–30 minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and reset the air filter restriction gauge.
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Diesel
E254171
1.
Release the clips that secure the air filter housing cover. Lift and rotate the air filter housing cover.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E254172
2. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. After installing a new air filter element, reset the air filter restriction gauge by
pressing the reset button. See
Checking the Engine Air Filter
468
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Gasoline
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Change the air filter element at the proper
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element could result in severe engine damage that the vehicle Warranty may not cover.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not allow foreign material to enter the air induction system. The engine is susceptible to damage from even small particles.
E191820
1.
Release the clips that secure the air filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
469
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine Air Filter - Information Messages - Diesel
Message
Filter OK
Action
Indicates the engine air filter is performing as expected.
Check Filter See Manual Indicates that there is a higher than expected restriction across the engine air filter, which could represent an air filter at full useful life or a filter with an obstruction.
When this displays, inspect the engine air filter and replace if necessary.
After the inspection or engine air filter replacement, you must reset the system in order to change the status from Check
Filter to Filter OK.
System Fault See Manual Indicates that there is an error within the electronic air filter maintenance minder system requiring service.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP - DIESEL
The fuel water trap is above the frame rail under the driver side of the vehicle.
Make sure the ignition is off before performing the following steps.
WARNING: Do not drain the water-in-fuel separator while the engine is running. Failure to follow this warning may result in fire, serious injury, death or property damage.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
Your vehicle's fuel system has a fuel filter and water separator to remove water from the fuel.
If the water in fuel indicator illuminates when the engine is running, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off the engine, then drain the fuel and water separator.
Note: Allowing water to stay in the fuel system after the water in fuel indicator illuminates could result in extensive damage or failure of the fuel injection system.
E254226
A Front of Vehicle.
1.
Loosen the drain plug approximately one and a half turns.
2. Allow the water to drain.
3. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a strong resistance.
4. Switch the ignition on for 30 seconds, then switch the ignition off. Repeat twice.
470
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
5. Start the engine.
6. Check for leaks.
Note: The water in fuel warning lamp turns off after approximately two seconds with the engine running.
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER
- DIESEL
Your fuel filters must be changed at the correct service interval or when you see the low fuel pressure message appear. Refer to scheduled maintenance for the correct service interval.
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER
- GASOLINE
Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that integrates with the fuel tank. It does not need regular maintenance or replacement.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling .
WARNING: This vehicle may have more than one battery. Removing the battery cables from only one battery does not disconnect your vehicle electrical system. Make sure you disconnect the battery cables from all batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage.
The battery is in the engine compartment.
See Under Hood Overview (page 456).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free battery. It does not require additional water during service.
471
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry and the battery cables tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If any corrosion is present on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
We recommend that you disconnect the negative battery cable terminal from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative battery cable terminal, make sure it is isolated or placed away from the battery terminal to avoid unintended connection or arcing.
To maintain correct operation of the battery management system, if you add any electrical devices to your vehicle, do not connect the ground connection directly to the negative battery terminal. A connection at the negative battery terminal can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to your vehicle this may adversely affect battery performance, durability and the performance of other electrical systems on your vehicle.
If you replace the battery make sure it matches the electrical requirements of your vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery and your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it must relearn its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the transmission may shift firmly when first driven. This is normal operation while the transmission fully updates its operation to optimum shift feel.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
To disconnect or remove the battery, do the following:
1.
Apply the parking brake and switch the ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has a power hold function and remains powered for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting the battery without waiting can cause damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable terminal.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable terminal.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7.
Remove the battery.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery, make sure the ignition remains switched off.
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals are fully tightened.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery, make sure you reinstall the battery cover or shield.
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle battery, you must reset the following features:
•
Window bounce-back. See Windows
• Clock Settings.
• Pre-set radio stations.
• Steering Angle Sensor.
472
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: To calibrate the steering angle sensor, drive the vehicle above 30 mph
(50 km/h) for a minimum of 1.2 mi (2 km).
Make sure to drive straight ahead for a minimum of 30 seconds. Several vehicle functions are disabled and a warning light could appear until the sensor is calibrated.
Battery Management System
The battery management system monitors battery conditions and takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is detected, the system temporarily disables some of the following features:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information display to alert you that battery protection actions are active.
After battery replacement, or in some cases after charging the battery with an external charger, the battery management system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain fully locked with the ignition off.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to the vehicle, it may adversely affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Battery Disposal
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, contact an authorized dealer to check and realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
A
B
C
D
8 feet (2.4 m).
Center height of lamp to ground.
25 feet (7.6 m).
Horizontal reference line.
1.
Park your vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp, indicated by a 3 millimeter circle on the lens, to the ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height, a piece of masking tape works well.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
473
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E167358
4. On the wall or screen, observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge toward the right. If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line, adjust the beam so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise or clockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the other headlamp.
7.
Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable.
EXTERIOR BULBS
Exterior Bulb Specification Chart
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time.
E163806
Lamp
Central high mounted stop lamp.
Central high mounted cargo lamp.
Vehicles with cargo box.
Daytime running lamp (XLT optional,
Lariat, Platinum, King Ranch, Limited).
Daytime running lamp (XLT optional,
XL).
Specification
912
LED
LED
H11
Power (Watt)
16
LED
LED
55
474
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Lamp
Front turn signal and parking lamp
(XLT optional, Lariat, Platinum, King
Ranch, Limited).
Front turn signal and parking lamp
(XLT optional, XL).
Front fog lamp (XLT optional, Lariat,
Platinum, King Ranch, Limited).
Front fog lamp (XL and XLT optional).
Front side marker lamp (Lariat optional, Platinum, King Ranch,
Limited).
Front side marker lamp (Lariat optional, XL, XLT).
Headlamp (XLT optional, Lariat, Platinum, King Ranch, Limited).
Headlamp low beam (XLT optional,
XL).
Headlamp high beam (XLT optional,
XL).
Specification
LED
4257NA
LED
9140
LED
W5W
LED
H11
9005
Power (Watt)
License plate lamp.
Puddle lamp.
Rear cargo box lamp.
Rear turn signal (XL optional).
Rear lamp, stop lamp (XL optional).
Rear lamp, stop lamp, rear turn signal and rear side marker lamp (XL optional, XLT).
W5W
LED
LED
WTY21W
WT21W/7W
WT21W/7W
Reversing lamp (XL optional).
Reversing lamp (XL optional, XLT).
WT21W
LED
Side turn signal lamp.
LED
Taillamp-all functions (Lariat, Platinum, King Ranch, Limited).
LED
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
LED
21/5
LED
55
LED
5
LED
55
65
5
LED
LED
21
21/7
21/7
21
LED
LED
LED
475
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly
1.
Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Open the tailgate to access the rear lamp assemblies.
E187288
3. Remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly. Then, carefully pull the lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar by releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Changing a Headlamp Bulb
E183762
2. Remove the screws and push pins from the front of the wheel liner.
3. Pull the wheel liner back towards the tire to gain access to the bulbs.
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs have cooled down before removing them. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury.
Accessing the Halogen High Beam and Low Beam Bulbs
1.
Rotate the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb needing replacement.
476
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Replacing the Halogen High Beam and Low Beam Bulbs
E183500
A.
B.
C.
Low beam headlamp bulb.
Turn signal lamp bulb.
High beam headlamp bulb.
477
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E183763
1.
Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs, remove the rubber cap to access the bulbs.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Maintenance
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, clean it with rubbing alcohol before installing it.
Changing a Front Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs have cooled down before removing them. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury.
1.
Rotate the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb needing replacement.
E183500
A.
B.
C.
Low beam headlamp bulb.
Turn signal lamp bulb.
High beam headlamp bulb.
E183762
2. Remove the screws and push pins from the front of the wheel liner.
3. Pull the wheel liner back toward the tire to gain access to the bulb.
478
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E183763
1.
Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Changing a Front Side Marker
Lamp Bulb
1.
Rotate the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb needing replacement.
E183762
2. Remove the screws and push pins from the front of the wheel liner.
3. Pull the wheel liner back toward the tire to gain access to the bulb.
479
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb
E338050
4. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Changing a Front Fog Lamp Bulb
E187289
A.
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal bulb.
Reversing lamp bulb.
B.
1.
Remove the rear lamp assembly.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
E163826
1.
Make sure the fog lamps are off.
480
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Stoplamp Bulb
Maintenance
Changing a Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb
E187289
A.
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal bulb.
Reversing lamp bulb.
B.
1.
Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
E187289
A.
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal bulb.
Reversing lamp bulb.
B.
1.
Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
481
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Changing a Reversing Lamp Bulb
E187289
A.
Stoplamp, rear and turn signal bulb.
Reversing lamp bulb.
B.
1.
Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the rear lamp assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Changing a High Mounted
Stoplamp Bulb
1.
Make sure the lamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and move the lamp assembly away from the vehicle to expose the bulb sockets.
E187290
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Changing a License Plate Lamp
Bulb
The license plate bulbs are behind the rear bumper.
E187794
1.
Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull to remove it from the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
482
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
INTERIOR BULBS
Interior Bulb Specification Chart
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not serviceable items. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: DUAL GENERATORS
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: SINGLE GENERATOR
E176088
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.0L
DIESEL
E312231
E249449
483
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.3L
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: DUAL GENERATORS
E167467
Note: The short drive belt is on the inner groove closest to the engine. The long drive belt is on the outer groove farthest from the engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™, VEHICLES
WITH: SINGLE GENERATOR
E313075
Note: The short drive belt is on the inner groove closest to the engine. The long drive belt is on the outer groove farthest from the engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 3.5L,
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
E318007
Note: The long drive belt is on the inner groove closest to the engine. The short drive belt is on the outer groove farthest from the engine.
E312206
484
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: The generator drive belt is on the inner groove closest to the engine. The water pump belt is on the outer groove farthest from the engine.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 5.0L,
VEHICLES WITH: SINGLE
GENERATOR
E249450
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 5.0L,
VEHICLES WITH: DUAL
GENERATORS
E312204
485
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
Name
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Specification
ESR-M5B194-B
ESR-M14P4-A
ESR-M14P3-A
WSS-M14P19-A
WSS-M14P19-A
ESR-M14P5-A
ESR-M14P5-A
Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash.
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear
Lamps
We recommend that you only use cold or lukewarm water containing car shampoo to clean the headlamps and the rear lamps.
486
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Do not scrape the lamps.
Do not wipe lamps when they are dry.
Cleaning Windows and Wiper
Blades
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner.
Note: When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels.
Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window.
This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or
Stainless Steel
We recommend that you only use a car shampoo, a soft cloth and water on bumpers and other chrome, aluminium or stainless steel parts.
Note: For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
Note: Rinse the area well after cleaning.
Note: Do not use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads, as they can scratch these surfaces.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Cleaning Wheels
Only use a recommended wheel and tire cleaner to clean the wheels weekly. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
1.
Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust.
2. Rinse well after cleaning.
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before parking your vehicle.
This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel cleaners or abrasive materials could damage wheel rims and covers.
Cleaning the Engine Compartment
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove debris from the screen area below windshield.
Note: If you are not familiar with the parts around the engine do not wash the engine compartment. Avoid frequent engine washes.
When washing the engine compartment:
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage.
487
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover remove the cover before application of shampoo and degreaser.
• Spray an approved engine shampoo and degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and rinse with water.
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics
It is recommended to wash your vehicle by hand however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions:
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface.
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Cleaning Camera Lenses and
Sensors
We recommend that you only use lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens and sensors.
Note: Do not pressure wash camera lens and sensors.
Cleaning the Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Rear suspension components may require regular cleaning with a power washer or a thorough rinse with a strong stream of water if the vehicle is operated in dusty or muddy environments. Rear leaf springs or other suspension components may emit squeaking or popping noises while operating the vehicle if particles, such as dirt, rocks, or other debris, are present in the components.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Cleaning the Instrument Panel
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system.
We recommend that you only clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a damp soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
Note: Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection.
Cleaning Plastic
We recommend that you only use a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth.
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
488
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Displays and Screens
We recommend that you only use a microfiber cloth in a circular motion to clean off the fingerprint or dust.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Cleaning Seats and the Headliner
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash.
Cleaning Fabric Seats and the
Headliner
We recommend that you only clean the fabric seats and headliners in the following way:
1.
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a ring forms on the fabric, immediately clean the entire area, but do not oversaturate or the ring could set.
Cleaning Vinyl and Leather
We recommend that you only clean the leather and vinyl surfaces in the following way:
1.
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in premium, top-grain leather that is extremely durable, but still requires special care and maintenance in order to preserve longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning maintains the appearance of the leather.
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides, there may be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and are considered to be proof of a genuine leather product.
To lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks, apply conditioner on the affected area.
489
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Conditioning
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the cleaning leather and vinyl section.
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather until it disappears. Allow the conditioner to dry, then repeat the process for the entire interior. If a film appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean cloth.
For additional information, visit: www.krsaddleshop.com
Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats
We recommend that you only clean your carpets in the following way:
1.
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire area immediately, but do not oversaturate or the ring could set.
We recommend that you only clean your floor mats in the following way:
1.
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
2. Wash rubber floor mats using mild soap and lukewarm or cold water.
3. Completely dry the floor mat before placing them back in your vehicle.
Cleaning Seatbelts
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
1.
Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
Cleaning Moonroof Tracks
1.
Remove debris from the tracks with a vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the bulb seal and mating painted roof metal surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning products.
WAXING YOUR VEHICLE
Wax the high-gloss painted surface of your prewashed vehicle once or twice a year.
490
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
We recommend that you only use an approved quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer's instructions to apply and remove the wax. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Note: Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss black colored parts, they discolor over time.
491
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storing Your Vehicle
PREPARING YOUR VEHICLE
FOR STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, the following maintenance recommendations ensures your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve your vehicle.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and weather damage.
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion.
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminants which may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housings and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Hybrid Battery Systems
We recommend the following actions for your vehicle:
• When storing your vehicle for greater than 30 days the state of charge should be approximately 50%.
Additionally we recommend disconnecting the 12V battery which will reduce system loads on the HV battery.
12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if you disconnect the battery cables.
Brakes
Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully.
492
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storing Your Vehicle
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so to reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.
REMOVING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM STORAGE
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again.
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
493
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
LOCATING THE TIRE LABEL
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
Locating the Safety
Compliance Certification
Labels
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A
.
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality grades:
The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
494
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Traction AA A B C
WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
INFORMATION ON THE TIRE
SIDEWALL
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
495
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Information on P Type Tires
M
A
B
C D
E
F
G
H
J
I
L
K
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.)
A.
P:
Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B.
215:
Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.
C.
65:
Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D.
R:
Indicates a radial type tire.
E.
15:
Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.
F.
95:
Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.
G.
H:
Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
496
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.
Letter rating
M
N
Q
R
Speed rating
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
T
U
H
V
W
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN):
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I.
M+S or M/S:
Mud and Snow, or
AT:
All Terrain, or
AS:
All Season.
J.
Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used:
Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K.
Maximum Load:
Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L.
Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
497
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
*
Treadwear:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
*
Traction:
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
*
Temperature:
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M.
Maximum Inflation
Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire.
B
C
A
E142544
D
B
498
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below.
A.
LT:
Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks.
B.
Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits:
Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits.
C.
Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold:
Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D.
Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold:
Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below:
A.
T:
Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B.
145:
Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.
499
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
C.
80:
Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D.
D:
Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R:
Indicates a radial type tire.
E.
16:
Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.
GLOSSARY OF TIRE
TERMINOLOGY
*
Tire label:
A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN):
A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
*
Inflation pressure:
A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
*
Standard load:
A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability.
*
Extra load:
A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability.
*
kPa:
Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
*
PSI:
Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
*
Cold tire pressure:
The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*
Recommended inflation pressure:
The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
*
B-pillar:
The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*
Bead area of the tire:
Area of the tire next to the rim.
*
Sidewall of the tire:
Area between the bead area and the tread.
500
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
*
Tread area of the tire:
Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
*
Rim:
The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
TIRE REPLACEMENT
REQUIREMENTS
AGE
WARNING:
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability.
501
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
WARNING:
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver's door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING:
To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING:
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting.
WARNING:
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNING:
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
• Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
502
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear protection.
Important:
Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair if the worn tires still have usable depth.
To avoid potential Four-Wheel
Drive (4WD) malfunction or
(4WD) system damage, it is recommended to replace all four tires rather than mixing significantly worn tires with new tires.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, your system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains on snow-free roads.
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to specified tires.
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted with wheel trims, remove them before fitting snow chains.
WARNING: If you choose to install snow tires on your vehicle, they must be the same size, construction, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard, and they must be installed on all four wheels. Mixing tires of different size or construction on your vehicle can adversely affect your vehicle's handling and braking, and may lead to loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Wheels and tires must be the same size, load index and speed rating as those originally fitted on the vehicle. Use of any other tire or wheel can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels can cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
Follow the recommended tire inflation pressures found on the Safety
Compliance Certification label, or the
Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. Failure to follow this instruction could result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, or personal injury or death.
503
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheel and Tire Information
Only use snow chains on rear wheels.
Install snow chains in pairs. Do not use self-tensioning snow chains.
Only use snow chains on the following specified tire sizes. Only install chains that are 15mm or less (SAE Class S chains).
• 245/70R17
• 265/70R17
• LT265/70R17
• 265/60R18
• LT265/70R18
We recommend you use steel wheels of the same size and specification if snow chains are required because chains may chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Purchase snow chains from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions.
• When driving with snow chains do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow chains rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and tighten them. If this does not work, remove the snow chains to prevent vehicle damage.
• Remove the snow chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use snow chains on dry roads.
• If a temporary spare wheel is mounted on your vehicle, do not use snow chains on the axle with the temporary spare wheel.
E292547
Use snow chains that fit against the sidewall of the tire to prevent the chains from touching the wheel rims or suspension. Refer to the previous illustration.
If you have any questions regarding snow chains, please contact your authorized dealer.
504
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
CHECKING THE TIRE
PRESSURES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
INFLATING THE TIRES
WARNING:
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. You will find a
Tire Label containing the manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure by the tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
The recommended tire inflation pressure is also found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch on the B-pillar, or on the edge of the driver door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
505
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR
WEAR
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves.
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR
DAMAGE
Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire dismounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage, such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall.
If damage is observed or suspected, have the tire inspected by a tire professional.
Safety Practices
WARNING:
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING:
If your vehicle
Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
506
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that you could eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This could further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels could be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
INSPECTING THE WHEEL
VALVE STEMS
Check the valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that could permit air leakage.
TIRE ROTATION
WARNING:
If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring system, then you need to update the settings for the system sensors. Always perform the system reset procedure after tire rotation. If you do not reset the system, it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
Note: If your tires show any uneven wear have the alignment checked by an authorized dealer before rotating tires.
507
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Care
Note: If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Tire Rotation Diagram
Follow the diagram indicating the correct tire locations for rotating the tires.
E142548
508
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
WHAT IS THE TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
The tire pressure monitoring system measures the vehicle's tire pressures. A warning lamp illuminates if one or more tires are significantly underinflated or if there is a system malfunction.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
509
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
Note: The use of tire sealants can damage the tire pressure monitoring system.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
When the outside temperature drops significantly, the tire pressure could decrease and activate the low tire pressure warning lamp.
The warning lamp could also illuminate when you use a spare wheel, or tire sealant from the inflator kit.
Note: Regularly checking the vehicle tire pressures can reduce the possibility for the warning lamp to illuminate due to outside air temperature changes.
Note: After you inflate the tires to the recommended pressure it could take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph
(32 km/h) for the warning indicator to turn off.
510
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
VIEWING THE TIRE
PRESSURES
E224333
Using the information display arrow keys navigate to the truck info section where you can view the tire pressures.
RESETTING TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Reset Procedure
WARNING:
To determine the required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or the
Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
You must reset the tire pressure monitoring system after each tire rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Note: To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, perform the system reset procedure at least three feet, one meter, away from another vehicle undergoing the system reset procedure at the same time.
Note: Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system can time-out and you need to repeat the entire procedure on all four wheels.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and have access to an air pump.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Switch the ignition on but do not start the engine.
4. Switch the hazard flashers on then off three times.
Note: You must accomplish this within 10 seconds. If you successfully enter the reset mode, the horn sounds once, the system indicator flashes and a message shows in the information display.
511
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: If the system does not enter reset mode, try again starting at
Step 2. If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message shows in the information display, contact your authorized dealer.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position. If the horn sounds twice, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
7. Repeat the previous step on the right rear tire and then on the left rear tire.
8. Switch the ignition off.
Note: If the horn sounds twice again after switching the ignition off, and repeating the procedure, contact your authorized dealer and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
9. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Trailer Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
(If Equipped)
Note: Additional equipment may be required for your vehicle to support trailer tire pressure and temperature monitoring. See your authorized dealer for more information.
Note: The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance. It is your responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures at all times.
Note: If a trailer tire is repaired, replaced or broken down for service, the screw and valve on the trailer tire pressure sensor should be replaced. See your authorized dealer for details.
E235807
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is an added safety feature that allows you to view your trailer tire pressures and temperatures through the information display.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Information
Messages
512
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure sensors are mounted into each tire on your trailer. The sensors send a message to your vehicle indicating the current trailer tire pressure and temperature.
If the trailer tire pressure monitoring system detects that a tire is low, a warning message appears in the information display.
The trailer tire information screen in the information display highlights the tire with a low pressure.
If the trailer tire pressure monitoring system detects that a tire temperature is over temp, a warning message appears in the
Information display. The trailer tire information screen in the information display highlights the tire with a high temperature.
The main function of the trailer tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your trailer tires need air or if the tires are experiencing high temperatures.
It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Information
Messages
When a Temporary Spare or
New Tire is Installed
If you have replaced a trailer tire with a new or spare tire, a warning message appears and pressure readings are no longer displayed for that tire.
To restore the full function of the trailer tire pressure monitoring system:
• Have the damaged wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted to your trailer.
• Install the trailer tire pressure monitoring sensor into the new wheel and tire assembly.
• Perform the trailer tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure.
Trailer Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure after each tire rotation, or when a new trailer tire pressure sensor is installed into a trailer tire.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system can be reset through the
menu in the information display.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Information
Messages
the trailer setup process also resets the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.
513
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM –
TROUBLESHOOTING
The low tire pressure warning lamp has combined functions, as it warns you when your tires need air, and when the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
– Warning Lamps
Warning Lamp Possible Cause Action Required
Solid warning lamp
Solid warning lamp or flashing warning lamp
One or more tires are significantly under inflated
Tire rotation without sensor training
Temporary spare wheel in use
After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label, on the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system must be retrained following every tire rotation.
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and refit it to your vehicle to restore operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction
If the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressures and the temporary spare wheel is not in use, the system detected a fault that requires service.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
514
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Information Messages
Message
Tire Pressure Low
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Action
After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label, on the edge of the driver door or the B-Pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The system has detected a fault that requires service or a spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication
Not Setup See Manual
Action
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure.
Displays when one or more tires on your trailer is above the recommended temperature.
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 509).
515
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function.
Note: The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light illuminates when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer to prevent damage to the system
sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Precautions (page 510). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels.
Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, four-wheel drive functionality may be limited, especially when driving in a mechanically locked four-wheel drive mode. You may experience the following:
• Additional noise from the transfer case or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically locked four-wheel drive mode.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in four-wheel drive.
• Engage four-wheel drive unless the vehicle is stationary.
• Use four-wheel drive on dry pavement.
516
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: To help prevent your vehicle from moving when changing a wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an appropriate block or wheel chock to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. For example, when changing the front left wheel, place an appropriate block or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not work on your vehicle when the jack is the only support as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate, contact the authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not get under a vehicle that is only supported by a vehicle jack.
WARNING: The jack supplied with this vehicle is only intended for changing wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other than when you are changing a wheel in an emergency.
WARNING: The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible.
WARNING: Check that the vehicle jack is not damaged or deformed and the thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
WARNING: It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
517
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
WARNING: Switch off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under your vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended running board and your vehicle. A moving running board may cause injury.
Note: Only use the spare tire carrier to stow the tire and wheel combination provided with your vehicle. Other tire and wheel combinations can cause the tire carrier to fail.
Note: Do not use impact tools or power tools operating at over 200 RPM on the spare tire carrier, this could cause a winch malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
Override the winch at least three times, there's an audible click each time, to make sure the wheel and tire have been tightened securely.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard flashers and set the parking brake. Then, place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off.
Removing the Vehicle Jack and
Tool Bag
The vehicle jack and tool bag are on the rear passenger side of your vehicle, behind the passenger seat.
E323384
1.
Turn the wing bolt on the jack bracket counterclockwise to release the jack and tool bag from the jack bracket.
E327650
2. Remove the jack and tool bag from the jack bracket.
518
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E323386
3. Release the jack tool bag straps.
Changing a Road Wheel
E327651
4. Slide the jack tool bag through the jack load rest to remove for access to the jack tools.
E188735
2. Assemble the jack handle as shown in the illustration.
E323393
5. Remove the tools from the tool bag.
Note: Your jack does not require maintenance or additional lubrication over the service life of your vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire
Note: Remove the hook end from the assembled jack handle before continuing.
The spare tire is located under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper.
1.
Use your key to remove the lock cylinder from the access hole of the bumper to allow access to the guide tube.
E184020
3. Fully insert the jack handle through the bumper hole and into the guide tube through the access hole in the rear bumper. Turn the handle counterclockwise until the tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack to allow the tire to be slid rearward from under the vehicle.
4. Remove the retainer from the center of the wheel.
519
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
Front Jacking Points
E175447
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat, block the right rear wheel.
6. Obtain the spare tire and vehicle jack from their storage locations.
7.
Loosen each wheel nut on the affected flat tire one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them.
Jacking the Vehicle
E327652
Note: Use the frame rail as the front jacking location point, not the control arm. The frame rail is marked with an arrow.
Rear Jacking Points
E166722
520
E323397
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
1.
Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts with the lug wrench.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the wheel nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
5. Remove the vehicle jack and fully tighten the wheel nuts in the order shown.
6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing the
Flat or Spare Tire.
7.
Stow the vehicle jack and lug wrench.
Make sure the jack is securely fastened before you drive. See Stowing the
Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag.
8. Unblock the wheels.
3
1
5
4
2
6
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your ability, to the point where the ratchet or slip occurs, if possible. The spare tire carrier does not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort, contact your authorized dealer.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it does not move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire could result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure, every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance information, or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key and jack handle.
E166719
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow the spare tire stowage instructions could result in failure of the cable or loss of the spare tire.
1.
Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
521
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Changing a Road Wheel
Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag
3. Install the tool bag through the vehicle jack load rest.
E323394
1.
Turn the lead screw eyelet to adjust the jack up or down until the stowage markings on the upper channel align with the lower channel.
E323386
4. Secure the jack tool bag straps around the vehicle jack.
E323393
2. Place the tools inside of the tool bag.
E327654
5. Place the jack and tool bag back onto the jack bracket.
E327653
522
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E323384
Changing a Road Wheel
6. Turn the wing bolt on the jack bracket clockwise until the jack and tools are secured to the jack bracket.
WHEEL NUTS
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt Size
lb.ft (Nm)
1
M14 x 1.5
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)
1 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our recommended replacement wheel nuts and or wheel bolts.
Retighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
A Hub pilot bore.
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles.
523
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Engine
Compression ratio.
Displacement.
Firing order.
Ignition system.
Required fuel.
Spark plug gap.
Specification
10.0:1
165 in³ (2,700 cm³)
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
Minimum 87 octane
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
524
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L DIESEL
Engine
Compression ratio.
Displacement.
Firing order.
Required fuel.
Specification
16:1
183 in³ (3,000 cm³)
1-4-2-5-3-6
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
525
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L
Engine
Compression ratio.
Displacement.
Firing order.
Ignition system.
Required fuel.
Spark plug gap.
Specification
12:1
203.8 in³ (3,340 cm³)
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
Minimum 87 octane
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)
526
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine
Compression ratio.
Displacement.
Firing order.
Ignition system.
Required fuel.
Spark plug gap.
Specification
10.5:1
213.4 in³ (3,497 cm³)
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
Minimum 87 octane
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
527
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Engine
Compression ratio.
Displacement.
Firing order.
Ignition system.
Required fuel.
Spark plug gap.
Specification
10.5:1
213.4 in³ (3,497 cm³)
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
Minimum 87 octane
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
528
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L
Engine
Compression ratio.
Displacement.
Firing order.
Ignition system.
Required fuel.
Spark plug gap.
Specification
12:1
307 in³ (5,038 cm³)
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug, coil near plug
Minimum 87 octane
0.039 in (1 mm) - 0.043 in (1.1 mm)
529
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Component
Air filter element.
Battery.
Motorcraft Part Number
FA-1883
BAGM-48H6-760
Cabin air filter.
FP-79
FL-2062
Engine oil filter.
1
Spark plug.
SP-578
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
530
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.0L DIESEL
Component
Air filter element.
Battery.
Cabin air filter.
Motorcraft Part Number
FA-1883
BAGM-49H8
FP-79
FL-2081
Engine oil filter.
1
Fuel filter.
FD-4627
Glow plug.
ZD-22
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
531
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.3L
Component
Air filter element.
Battery.
Motorcraft Part Number
FA-1883
BAGM-48H6-760
Cabin air filter.
FP-79
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
Spark plug.
SP-520
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
532
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Component
Air filter element.
Battery-standard.
Motorcraft Part Number
FA-1883
BAGM-48H6-760
BAGM-94RH7-800 Battery-optional.
Cabin air filter.
FP-79
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
Spark plug.
SP-578
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
533
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Component
Air filter element.
Battery-standard.
Motorcraft Part Number
FA-1883
BAGM-94RH7-800
Cabin air filter.
FP-79
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
Spark plug.
SP-578
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
534
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 5.0L
Component
Air filter element.
Battery-standard.
Motorcraft Part Number
FA-1883
BAGM-48H6-760
BAGM-94RH7-800 Battery-optional.
Cabin air filter.
FP-79
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
1
Spark plug.
SP-588
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
535
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
All.
Variant Including the Oil Filter
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Specification
WSS-M2C961-A1
536
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
Materials
Name
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend use the following engine oil in climates where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Specification
WSS-M2C963-A1
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.0L DIESEL
Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E258300
The American Petroleum Institute (API) service symbol is used to identify the proper engine oil for your engine. The API service symbol will be displayed on the oil container you purchase. The API symbol displays the oil performance category in the top half of symbol and the viscosity grade in the center of the symbol.
537
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E276509
The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel engines is important for satisfactory operation. Determine which oil viscosity best suits the temperature range you expect to encounter for the next service interval from the following SAE viscosity grade chart.
Capacities
Variant
All.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
Note: We recommend an engine block heater at temperatures below -9°F (-23°C).
Including the Oil Filter
6.5 qt (6.15 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 F-150 Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 F-150 Diesel Motor Oil /
Huile moteur diesel F-150 SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-QFA(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M2C214-B1
538
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
Materials
Name
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-40 use the following engine oil in climates where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Specification
WSS-M2C171-F1
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel
Fuel Blends (B20 Max)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
Specification
WSS-M2C171-F1
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe
Duty Service
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.3L
Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
Specification
WSS-M2C171-F1
If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
539
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
Capacities
Variant
All.
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-20
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W20-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W20-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, use the following engine oil in climates where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
Including the Oil Filter
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Specification
WSS-M2C960-A1
540
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-Q1SP(U.S.)
Specification
WSS-M2C962-A1
E240522
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
541
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Capacities
Variant
All.
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
Including the Oil Filter
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, use the following engine oil in climates where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
Specification
WSS-M2C961-A1
Specification
WSS-M2C963-A1
542
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L, HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
543
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Variant
All.
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, use the following engine oil in climates where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
Including the Oil Filter
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Specification
WSS-M2C961-A1
Specification
WSS-M2C963-A1
544
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
545
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Variant
All.
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance, use the following engine oil in climates where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
Including the Oil Filter
7.75 qt (7.33 L)
Specification
WSS-M2C961-A1
Specification
WSS-M2C963-A1
546
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined specification.
Capacities
Variant
All.
If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
15.1 qt (14.3 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Specification
WSS-M97B57-A2
547
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.0L
DIESEL
Use coolant that meets the defined specification.
Capacities
Variant
All.
If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
13.7 qt (13 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.3L
Use coolant that meets the defined specification.
Capacities
Variant
All.
Specification
WSS-M97B57-A2
If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
12.7 qt (12 L)
548
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined specification.
Capacities
Variant
All.
Specification
WSS-M97B57-A2
If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
14.3 qt (13.5 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Specification
WSS-M97B57-A2
549
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 3.5L,
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Use coolant that meets the defined
Capacities
Variant
Low temperature cooling circuit.
High temperature cooling circuit.
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
7.2 qt (6.8 L)
15.3 qt (14.5 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
Use coolant that meets the defined specification.
Capacities
Variant
All.
Specification
WSS-M97B57-A2
If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
13.2 qt (12.5 L)
550
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
Specification
WSS-M97B57-A2
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - GASOLINE, EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
Capacities
Regular cab.
Super cab.
Crew cab.
Optional.
Variant Quantity
23.0 gal (87.1 L)
23.0 gal (87.1 L)
26.0 gal (98.4 L)
36.0 gal (136.3 L)
551
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - DIESEL
Capacities
Variant
All.
Quantity
26.0 gal (98.4 L)
552
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - GASOLINE, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)
Capacities
All.
Variant Quantity
30.6 gal (115.8 L)
553
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Capacities
Variant
All.
Refrigerant
29 oz (0.82 kg) the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Refrigerant Oil
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)
Materials
Name
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M17B21-A
WSS-M2C300-A2
554
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.0L DIESEL
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant
All.
Refrigerant
29 oz (0.82 kg)
Refrigerant Oil
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)
Materials
Name
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M17B21-A
WSS-M2C300-A2
555
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.3L
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Capacities
Variant
All.
Refrigerant
29 oz (0.82 kg) the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Refrigerant Oil
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)
Materials
Name
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M17B21-A
WSS-M2C300-A2
556
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Capacities
Variant
All.
Refrigerant
29 oz (0.82 kg) the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Refrigerant Oil
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)
Materials
Name
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M17B21-A
WSS-M2C300-A2
557
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 3.5L, HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Capacities
Variant
All.
Refrigerant
23 oz (0.65 kg) the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Refrigerant Oil
5.41 fl oz (160 ml)
Materials
Name
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil / Huile
POE pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-34(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M17B21-A
WSS-M2C31-B2
558
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 5.0L
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Capacities
Variant
All.
Refrigerant
29 oz (0.82 kg) the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Refrigerant Oil
2.71 fl oz (80 ml)
Materials
Name
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M17B21-A
WSS-M2C300-A2
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION
Capacities
Variant
All.
Quantity
Fill as required.
559
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motorcraft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
Specification
WSS-M14P19-A
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION
Capacities
All.
Variant Quantity
5.6 gal (21.3 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid / Fluide pour
échappement diesel Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-27-GAL,PM-27-JUG(U.S.)
CPM-27-J(Canada)
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced brake performance.
Specification
WSS-M99C130-A
Note: We recommend you use DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. If you use any fluid other than the recommended fluid, it could cause reduced brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials could result in brake system damage and possible failure.
560
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
All.
Variant Quantity
Fill as required.
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
Specification
WSS-M6C65-A2
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
Capacities
Variant
Four-wheel drive (Electronic shift on the
Fly).
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on demand).
Two-speed automatic four-wheel drive
(Mechanical lock).
Quantity
1.5 qt (1.4 L)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)
1.9 qt (1.8 L)
561
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Specification
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,
FRONT AXLE FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
Capacities
Four-wheel drive.
Variant
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Quantity
1.8 qt (1.7 L)
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade.
Specification
WSS-M2C942-A
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
562
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Variant
8.8 inch.
9.75 inch.
Materials
Name
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Quantity
2.0–2.1 qt (1.9–2 L)
2.2–2.3 qt (2.1–2.2 L)
Specification
WSS-M2C942-A
563
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number
The vehicle identification number is on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E311767
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview
The vehicle identification number contains the following information:
C
F
G
H
D
E
E142477
A
B
World manufacturer identifier.
Brake system, gross vehicle weight rating, restraint devices and their locations.
Make, vehicle line, series, body type.
Engine or motor type.
Check digit.
Model year.
Assembly plant.
Production sequence number.
564
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
WHAT IS A CONNECTED
VEHICLE
A connected vehicle has technology that allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile network and for you to access a range of features. When used in conjunction with the FordPass app, it could allow you to monitor and control your vehicle further, for example checking the tire pressures, the fuel level and the vehicle location. For additional information, refer to the local
Ford website.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature functionality requires a compatible vehicle network.
Some remote features require additional service activation. Log in to your Ford account for details. Some restrictions, third party terms and message or data rates may apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or regulations could affect functionality and availability, or continued provision of some features. These changes could even stop some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
What Is the Modem
The modem allows access to a range of features built into your vehicle.
Enabling and Disabling the Modem
1.
Press Settings .
2. Press Connectivity .
3. Press Connected Vehicle Features .
4. Switch vehicle connectivity on or off.
Connecting FordPass to the
Modem
1.
Make sure that the modem is enabled using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle if already added.
4. Select the option for vehicle details.
5. Select the option to activate your vehicle.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen matches the name shown in your
FordPass account.
7.
Confirm that FordPass account is connected to the modem.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A WI-FI NETWORK
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
E280315
1.
Press Connectivity .
2. Press Manage Wi-Fi Networks .
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Press View Available Networks .
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to connect to a secure network.
565
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked Questions - Vehicles With: Modem
Symptom
I cannot confirm the connection of my FordPass account to the modem.
Possible Cause and Resolution
– Modem is not enabled.
• Switch vehicle connectivity on.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
566
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked Questions - Vehicles With: SYNC
4
Symptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi network.
Possible Cause and Resolution
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same network name.
• Use a unique name for your network name. Do not use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection disconnects after successful connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot but the network signal strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows and the windshield, open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the garage door closed, open the garage door as it may block the signal.
I cannot see a network in the list of available networks that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again, or use the
Add Network Manually option in Wi-Fi settings menu.
– Unsupported security type.
• Some network security types are not supported, for example WEP.
567
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution
I cannot see the Wi-Fi hotspot name when I search for Wi-Fi networks on my cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
Software downloads take too long.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to connect to a Wi-Fi network and the signal strength is excellent but the software does not update.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the network requires a subscription or acceptance of terms and conditions, contact the network service provider.
568
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your vehicle and allow devices to connect to it for access to the Internet.
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
E280315
1.
Press Vehicle Hotspot .
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting is on.
2. Press Settings .
3. Press Wi-Fi visibility .
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and Password
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
E280315
1.
Press Vehicle Hotspot .
2. Press Settings .
Note: The network name is the hotspot name.
3. Press View Password .
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1.
On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and select the hotspot from the list of available Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1.
Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your device, open a website and it redirects to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
3. Follow the instructions on the carrier portal to purchase a plan.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system does not redirect to the vehicle network carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website to purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the system does not remove your vehicle from your vehicle network carrier’s account. To remove your vehicle from the account, contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-
FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
PASSWORD
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
E280315
1.
Press Vehicle Hotspot .
2. Press Settings .
3. Press Edit .
4. Press Change Network Name .
5. Enter your required network name.
6. Press Done .
7.
Press Change Password .
8. Enter your required password.
9. Press Done .
569
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Listening to loud audio for long periods of time could damage your hearing.
SWITCHING THE AUDIO UNIT
ON AND OFF
Press the button on the volume control.
PLAYING OR PAUSING THE
AUDIO SOURCE
Audio Unit
Press the button to pause playback. Press again to resume playback.
Touchscreen
Press the button to pause playback. Press again to resume playback.
Note: Not all sources can be paused.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
SELECTING THE AUDIO
SOURCE
Audio Unit
Press to open the media source menu.
E308143
You can press this multiple times to change the audio source or scroll through the media sources.
Touchscreen
Press Sources on the touchscreen to open the media source menu.
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Some vehicles may be able to adjust the volume using buttons on the steering wheel.
570
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
SWITCHING SHUFFLE MODE
ON AND OFF
Press the button on the touchscreen to switch shuffle mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode.
SWITCHING REPEAT MODE ON
AND OFF
Press the button on the touchscreen to switch repeat mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have repeat mode.
SETTING A MEMORY PRESET
1.
Select a station or channel.
2. Press and hold a memory preset button on the touchscreen.
Note: The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the preset and returns once it is stored.
Note: You can save presets from multiple sources to the memory preset bar.
MUTING THE AUDIO
Press to mute the signal. Press again to restore the signal.
ADJUSTING THE SOUND
SETTINGS
Balance and Fade
(If Equipped)
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings .
3. Press Balance / Fade .
4. Press the arrows to adjust the settings.
Tone Settings
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings .
3. Press Tone Settings .
4. Press the arrows or slider bar to adjust the settings.
Speed Compensated Volume
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings .
3. Press Speed Compensated Volume .
4. Press a setting.
Occupancy Mode
(If Equipped)
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings .
3. Press Occupancy Mode .
4. Press a setting.
Sound Mode
(If Equipped)
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings .
3. Press Sound Mode .
4. Press a setting.
SETTING THE CLOCK AND
DATE
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Clock Settings .
3. Set the time.
Note: The AM and PM options are not available if 24-hour mode is on.
571
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Switching Automatic Time
Updates On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Clock Settings .
3. Switch Automatic time zone update on or off.
AM/FM RADIO
AM/FM Radio Limitations
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting.
Selecting a Radio Station
Manually Selecting a Radio
Station
E270235
Turn to search through the radio frequency band.
Using Direct Tune
1.
Press Direct Tune to open the number pad.
2. Enter the station you prefer.
Note: You can only enter a valid station for the audio source you are currently listening to.
Using Seek
Press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
572
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Using the Station List
1.
Press Browse .
Note: Available on FM radio only.
2. Press a station.
Audio System
SWITCHING THE DISPLAY ON
AND OFF
Audio Unit
Press the button.
E272035
Touchscreen
To switch the display off:
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Display Settings .
3. Press Display Off .
Note: The display defaults to on each time you switch your vehicle on.
To switch the display on, press anywhere on the touchscreen.
DIGITAL RADIO (If Equipped)
What Is Digital Radio
HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.
For additional information, visit www.HDRadio.com
.
HD Radio Technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS. The vehicle manufacturer and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion.
How Does Digital Radio Work
Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts in addition to analog broadcasts.
HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in both analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations are only available digitally and could contain new or different content.
Note: When the system first receives an
HD1 station, it plays the station in the analog version until it verifies the station is an HD
Radio station. Then it shifts to the digital version.
Note: There is an audio mute delay when switching to an HD2 or HD3 station because the system has to reacquire and decode the digital signal.
Digital Radio Limitations
If you are outside the reception area, the system could not work.
If you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station could mute due to weak signal strength.
Note: If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. If you are listening to any other multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Depending on the station quality, you could hear a slight sound change when the station changes between analog and digital audio.
You cannot access a saved HD station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
Switching Digital Radio Reception
On and Off
1.
Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Radio Settings .
3. Switch AM HD Radio or FM HD Radio on or off.
573
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Digital Radio Indicators
HD Radio Indicator
The indicator appears when HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology.
E142616
The color of the indicator changes to indicate the system status.
Gray indicates the system is acquiring a digital station.
Orange indicates digital audio is playing.
Multicast Indicator
The multicast indicator appears if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers indicate additional digital channels available.
Note: For stations that have more than one
HD multicast, the HD indicator and radio text appears as a button. Press the button to cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency.
SATELLITE RADIO (If
Equipped)
What Is Satellite Radio
Your factory-installed SiriusXM radio system includes a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For additional information about extended subscription terms, visit www.SiriusXM.com
in the United States, www.SiriusXM.ca
in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be liable to you or any third party for any such modification, suspension or termination.
Satellite Radio Limitations
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and could result in the audio system muting.
Your display could show an error message to indicate the interference.
Locating the Satellite Radio
Identification Number
1.
Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
2. Tune to channel 0.
574
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Selecting a Channel
Manually Selecting a Channel
E328569
Press the button to find the previous or next available radio channel.
E328570
Linear Tuner
The linear tuner is displayed when manually selecting a channel. You can swipe left or right on the linear tuner carousel to navigate through the channel list. Tap on a channel title to listen to it.
Using Direct Tune
1.
Press the channel up or down button to open the linear tuner screen.
2. Press Direct Tune to open the number pad.
3. Enter the channel you prefer.
Using Browse
1.
Press Browse .
2. Select a channel.
Satellite Radio Settings
Subscription
Your subscription status is displayed. You can subscribe or manage your subscription directly from the touchscreen.
Listener Add/Switch
You can create up to five listener profiles per SiriusXM account. Each listener profile can be personalized with a name and profile image.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use.
Note: A default profile is available when no listener profiles are created.
SiriusXM Favorites
SiriusXM Favorites are shown for the active listener profile. While you are listening to
SiriusXM, you can save favorites by:
• Tapping the currently tuned channel or show logo on the SiriusXM audio screen. A favorite icon appears next to the logo when it is saved as a favorite.
• Tuning to a channel or show you want to save as a favorite. Navigate to the
SiriusXM Favorites screen and press the Add Current button. The currently tuned channel or show is saved as a favorite.
• Saving a radio preset. This saves the currently tuned SiriusXM channel or show as a favorite.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use.
Listening History
Listening history is a list of recently listened to SiriusXM content and is shown for the active listener profile. You can view, manage and reset the listening history using the controls on the touchscreen.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use.
Listener Settings
Listener settings apply to the active listener profile.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use.
Note: A default profile is available when no listener profiles are created.
575
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Help and Support
You can contact SiriusXM Customer Care directly from SYNC and view information required to manage your SiriusXM account.
576
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
Audio System – Information Messages
Satellite Radio Troubleshooting
Error Message
Connectivity Disabled
No Internet
Potential Effects
Audio system may mute.
"Switch to Satellite" button may be displayed on the
SiriusXM audio screen if the channel is also available via satellite.
Recommended Action
Internet streaming and On
Demand shows are unavailable and some SiriusXM features are disabled.
Internet connectivity is
SYNC will attempt to
connection for the current channel if the option is available.
No Satellite Signal
Slow Network Connection
Channel Unavailable
Episode Unavailable
Audio system may mute.
“Switch to Internet” button may be displayed on the
SiriusXM audio screen if the channel is also available via streaming.
Antenna may be obstructed or satellite reception is weak
in your location. See Satellite Radio Limitations
internet connection for the current channel if the option is available.
Audio system may mute while audio attempts to load.
Audio system may mute.
Radio may tune to a different channel.
Allow some time for audio to load or tune to a different channel.
Audio system may mute.
Radio may tune to a different channel.
A temporary update may be in progress. Allow some time before retrying to tune to the channel. If issue persists, the channel may no longer be available.
A temporary update may be in progress. Allow some time before retrying to play the episode. If issue persists, the episode may no longer be available.
577
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Something went wrong
Subscribe to Listen
Audio system may mute.
Radio may tune to a different channel.
Retry action after some time or tune to a different channel.
Cannot listen to selected content. Content may appear grayed out and some features may be disabled.
Your subscription has expired or you have not yet subscribed for access to the listed content. Navigate to
Subscription under the
Satellite Radio Settings menu. If you have an active subscription which includes the listed channel or content and you see this error, you may need to refresh your radio. To refresh your SiriusXM radio, visit www.siriusxm.com/refresh in the US, or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh in Canada.
You may need to provide your SiriusXM Radio identific-
578
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Upgrade to Listen
Location Restricted Content Audio may mute. “Not available in your location” or
“Unable to determine your location” may be displayed.
Content is not available in your location or SiriusXM is unable to determine your location. Tuning to a different channel may resolve the issue.
Channel Blocked
Cannot listen to selected content. Content may appear grayed out and some features may be disabled.
Your subscription does not include access to the listed content. You may need to upgrade your subscription.
Navigate to Subscription under the Satellite Radio
Settings menu. If you have an active subscription which includes the listed channel or content and you see this error, you may need to refresh your radio. To refresh your SiriusXM radio, visit www.siriusxm.com/refresh in the US, or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh in Canada.
You may need to provide your SiriusXM Radio identific-
Antenna Problem or Hardware Problem
Audio may mute. Radio may tune to a different channel.
The Block Explicit Content filter is turned on. Navigate to Listener Settings under the Satellite Radio Settings menu to access the Block
Explicit Content filter.
Navigate to Listener
Audio may mute. Access to
SiriusXM features may be unavailable.
If issue persists, you may need to visit an authorized dealer for service.
579
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
SiriusXM Updating...
Loading...
SiriusXM Loading...
Audio may mute.
Allow SiriusXM some time to complete updating.
Audio may mute. Content may be temporarily unavailable while loading.
No action necessary. If loading time is longer than
Audio may mute. Content and controls may be temporarily unavailable.
No action necessary. Allow
SiriusXM some time to finish loading.
IDENTIFYING THE AUDIO UNIT
E308144
Depending on your vehicle options, the controls may look different from what you see here.
580
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information and Entertainment Display Overview
INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT DISPLAY
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
INFORMATION AND
ENTERTAINMENT DISPLAY
LIMITATIONS
Speed-restricted Features
For your safety, some functions of the system are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with the system
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use when your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
See the following chart for more specific examples.
System Functionality
Wi-Fi
Restricted Features
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Wi-Fi connected.
STATUS BAR
The bar is on top of the display and indicates the status of your vehicle's features.
Cell phone microphone muted.
Cell phone roaming.
Audio system muted.
System update installed.
Text message received.
E335295
E335294
Automatic crash notification system on.
Automatic crash notification system off.
581
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information and Entertainment Display Overview
E335293
E335292
Cell phone battery status.
Wireless charger is active.
Cell phone network signal strength.
Vehicle data sharing on.
Vehicle data sharing off.
Vehicle location sharing on.
E327785
Vehicle data and vehicle location sharing on.
Vehicle system update activating.
Additional consent needed.
E327786
E327787
E327788
Vehicle system activation reminder.
Vehicle system update not successful.
Vehicle system update reminder.
E327789
FEATURE BAR
The bar is on the bottom of the display and allows you to access vehicle features.
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a media player or a Bluetooth device.
Select to adjust climate settings.
E283811
E329089
Select to make calls and access the phonebook on your cell phone.
Select to use the navigation system.
Select to view favorites.
Select to search for and use compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device.
Select to adjust system settings.
E280315
E282728
E335299
Select to view features.
E335300
Note: The icon may be different depending on your vehicle.
INFORMATION ON DEMAND
SCREEN - VEHICLES WITH: 12.3
INCH SCREEN
SYNC4 Basic Interactions
Press the button to view the next
Information on Demand screen.
E329408
E329410
E329409
Press the button to view the previous Information on Demand screen.
Press the button to view available cards.
582
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Voice Interaction
WHAT IS VOICE INTERACTION
Voice Interaction allows you to control vehicle features using conversational requests.
SETTING THE WAKE WORD
1.
Press the Settings option on the feature bar.
2. Press the Voice Control button.
3. Switch on Listen for Wake Word.
4. Press Preferred Wake Word
5. Select a wake word.
BEGINNING A VOICE
INTERACTION
Say the selected wake word.
Press the voice interaction button on the steering wheel.
E142599
VOICE INTERACTION
EXAMPLES
General Examples
Command
Start Over.
Cancel.
Next Page.
Previous Page.
Help.
Result
The system resets the current voice interaction.
The system ends the current voice interaction.
The system goes to the next page.
The system goes to the previous page.
The system displays a list of available commands you can use on the current screen.
Entertainment Examples
Command
Play The Beatles.
Show music by The
Beatles.
Set the station to
101.9 FM.
Set the station to
Sirius Channel 2.
Result
The system plays music by the selected artist.
The system shows music by the selected artist.
The system tunes the radio to 101.9
FM.
The system tunes the radio to Sirius
Channel 2.
583
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Voice Interaction
Climate Examples
Command
I am cold.
Set the temperature to 72°F
(22°C).
Result
The system prompts you to change the temperature.
The system sets the temperature to
72°F (22°C).
Phone Examples
Command
Call Henry.
Dial (phone number).
Send a text message to Henry.
Read my message from Henry.
Result
The system calls
Henry using your connected device.
The system dials the selected phone number.
The system begins a dictated text message.
The system reads you the most recent message from
Henry.
Apps Examples
Command
Mobile Apps.
List Mobile Apps.
Find Mobile Apps
Result
The system prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on the system.
The system will list all of the currently available Mobile
Apps.
The system will search and connect to compatible app running on your mobile device.
Navigation Examples
Command
Drive to 1 American
Road in Dearborn
Michigan.
Result
The system begins guided navigation to the address.
Show me directions to the Golden Gate
Bridge.
Show me directions to Oakwood
Boulevard and
Pelham Road.
Cancel route.
The system shows directions to the selected POI.
The system shows directions to the selected intersection.
The system ends guided navigation to the destination.
584
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
PHONE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
CONNECTING YOUR PHONE
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone and switch Bluetooth on.
Select the phone option on the feature bar.
1.
Select Add Phone .
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the PIN (personal identification number) on your cell phone matches the number on the touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone, use the phone settings to specify the primary phone. You can change this setting at any time.
PHONE MENU
This menu becomes available after pairing a phone.
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your contacts. Use the List button to alphabetically sort your contacts.
Favorites
Display the list of favorite contacts that are set up on your phone.
Phone List
Display the list of paired or connected devices that you can select.
Note: Up to 12 devices can be stored.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
585
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
MAKING AND RECEIVING A
PHONE CALL
Making Calls
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Menu Item
Contacts
Action and Description
You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call.
To call a number from your recent calls, select:
Menu Item
Recent Call
List
Action and Description
You can then select an entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
To call a number from your favorites, select:
Menu Item
Favorites
Action and Description
You can then select an entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select:
Menu Item Action and Description
Phone
Keypad
Call
Select the digits of the number you wish to call.
The system begins the call.
Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The system logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
You can select any of the following during an active phone call:
586
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
Item
End Call
Keypad
Immediately end a phone call. You can also press the button on the steering wheel.
Press this to access the phone keypad.
Mute
Item
Privacy
You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you.
Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to the touchscreen.
SENDING AND RECEIVING A TEXT MESSAGE
Hear It
Menu Item
View
Call
Reply
Description
Hear the text message.
View the text message.
Call the sender.
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.
587
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Phone
SWITCHING TEXT MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION ON AND OFF iOS
1.
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the information icon to the right of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on or off.
Android
1.
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on or off.
588
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Bluetooth®
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH®
DEVICE
1.
Make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your device.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Connectivity .
4. Press Bluetooth .
5. Press Add a Bluetooth Device .
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your vehicle on your device.
6. Select your vehicle on your device.
Note: A number appears on your device and on the touchscreen.
7.
Confirm that the number on your device matches the number on the touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you have successfully paired your device.
PLAYING MEDIA USING
BLUETOOTH®
Press the audio button on the feature bar.
E100027
Press Sources .
Press the Bluetooth option.
Press to play a track. Press again to pause the track.
Press to skip to the next track.
Press and hold to fast forward through the track.
Press once to return to the beginning of a track. Repeatedly press to return to previous tracks.
Press and hold to fast rewind through the track.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Connect your device.
589
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Apps
APP PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
APP REQUIREMENTS
When you start an app through the system for the first time, you could be asked to grant certain permissions. You can review and change the permissions that you have granted at any time when your vehicle is not moving. We recommend that you check your data plan before using your apps through the system. Using them could result in additional charges. We also recommend that you check the app provider's terms and conditions and privacy policy before using their app. Make sure that you have an active account for apps that you want to use through the system. Some apps will work with no setup. Others require you to configure some personal settings before you can use them.
ACCESSING APPS
Select the apps option on the feature bar.
ENABLING APPS ON AN IOS
DEVICE
Select the apps option on the feature bar.
1.
Select Mobile Apps Help.
2. Follow the instructions to pair and connect your device via Bluetooth or with a USB cable.
3. Start the apps on your device that you want to use.
4. Select the app that you want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: Some apps may run through Apple
CarPlay if it is enabled.
Note: Closing an app on your device will close it on the touchscreen.
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
Mobile Apps List under Mobile Apps Help.
ENABLING APPS ON AN
ANDROID DEVICE
Select the apps option on the feature bar.
1.
Select Mobile Apps Help.
2. Follow the instructions to pair and connect your device via Bluetooth or with a USB cable.
3. Start the apps on your device that you want to use.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps .
5. Select the app that you want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: Some devices may lose the ability to play music over USB when Mobile Apps are enabled.
Note: Some apps may run through Android
Auto if it is enabled.
590
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Apps
Note: Closing an app on your device will close it on the touchscreen.
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
Mobile Apps List under Mobile Apps Help.
SWITCHING APPLE CARPLAY
ON AND OFF
Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB
1.
Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on your device and the touchscreen.
Note: Selecting "Enable Wireless CarPlay" on your device will prepare the device for wireless carplay when you re-enter the vehicle.
Enabling Apple CarPlay with
Wireless
1.
Pair your device to Bluetooth.
2. Follow the instructions on your device and the touchscreen.
Disabling Apple CarPlay
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
1.
Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Disable.
Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
1.
Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Connect to Apple CarPlay.
SWITCHING ANDROID AUTO
ON AND OFF
Enabling Android Auto with USB
(If Equipped)
1.
Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are not available when you are using Android
Auto.
Enabling Android Auto with
Wireless
1.
Pair your device to Bluetooth.
2. Follow the instructions on your device and the touchscreen.
Note: Certain Android Devices do not support Android Auto Wireless. Please check your Android OS version for compatibility.
Disabling Android Auto
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
1.
Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Disable.
Re-Enabling Android Auto
Select the settings option on the feature bar.
1.
Press Phone List.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press Connect to Android Auto.
591
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Profiles
(If Equipped)
HOW DO PERSONAL PROFILES
WORK
This feature allows you to create multiple personal profiles enabling users to personalize vehicle’s settings such as seats and mirrors, as well as non-positional settings like radio, navigation, driver assist system settings. Positional settings are saved by holding a memory seat button.
Non-positional settings are saved you change a setting while a profile is active.
You can create one profile for each preset memory seat button along with a guest profile.
Recalling and Changing a Profile
You can recall a profile using the touchscreen or the preset button you selected when you created your profile.
You can also link a remote control and a mobile device to your profile, which are used to recall it.
ENABLING OR DISABLING
PERSONAL PROFILES
When you switch on the Personal Profiles feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control or mobile device that is not linked to a driver profile does not change the active profile, but remains in the last known profile. It does not change the positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is not linked to a driver profile or saved to a preset setting does not change the active profile, but remains in the last known profile. It does not change the positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is not linked to a driver profile but is saved to a preset setting does not change the active profile, but remains in the last known profile. It recalls the positional settings that you saved to that memory seat button.
When you switch off a Personal Profiles feature:
• Unlocking a door with a remote control or mobile device does not recall any non-positional settings but still recalls positional settings from the driver profile which the remote control or mobile device is linked to.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is not linked to a driver profile or saved to a preset setting recalls non-positional settings from the guest profile. It does not change the positional settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is linked to a driver profile or has saved to a preset setting recalls non-positional settings from the guest profile. It recalls the positional settings that you saved to that memory seat button.
592
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Profiles
(If Equipped)
CREATING A PERSONAL
PROFILE
Use the touchscreen to create a personal profile.
1.
Switch the vehicle on and leave the vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button under Settings.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
LINKING OR UNLINKING A
PERSONAL PROFILE TO A
REMOTE CONTROL
You can save preset memory positions for up to three remote controls by assigning a remote control to a personal profile using the touchscreen.
Use the touchscreen to link a remote control to a personal profile.
1.
Switch the vehicle on and leave the vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button under Settings.
3. Touch the arrow for the profile you wish to link to a remote control.
4. Select remote control.
5. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: If more than one linked remote control is in range, the memory function moves to the settings of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Note: The guest profile consists of existing settings when there is no driver profile created. After you create a driver profile, the guest profile serves as an additional driver profile.
Note: You cannot link a remote control to a guest profile.
593
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Navigation
(If Equipped)
ACCESSING NAVIGATION
Press the button to access
Navigation.
Note: As the driver, be aware of all local traffic regulations and road attributes, and operate your vehicle in a safe and legal manner.
NAVIGATION MAP UPDATES
To update your Map data over Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi access point. For USB updates and other details, contact dealers at
1-866-462-8837 in the United States and
Canada, or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
Note: If you find map data errors, you may report them by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
ADJUSTING THE MAP
Zooming the Map In and Out
You can use pinch gestures to zoom in and out. Place two fingers on the screen and move them apart to zoom in. Place two fingers on the screen and bring them together to zoom out.
Changing the Format of the Map
Press the Menu button.
E328845
1.
Press the Map Orientation tile.
2. Select a map orientation.
LIVE TRAFFIC
What Is Live Traffic
You can observe real-time road congestion when live traffic is on.
Switching Live Traffic On and Off
Press the Menu button.
E328845
1.
Press the Traffic on Map tile.
2. Press Traffic on or Traffic Off.
SETTING A DESTINATION
Setting a Destination Using the
Text Entry Screen
1.
Press the search bar at the top of the screen.
2. Enter your destination using the keyboard.
3. Press Search.
4. Select a destination from the list.
5. Press Start to begin navigation.
Setting a Destination Using the
Map Screen
Press and hold on the map to place a pin at that location. Information about the location of the pin appears on the screen.
Press the button to begin navigation to the pin.
E328844
594
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Navigation
(If Equipped)
Setting a Destination Using a
Predictive Destination
Press the predicted destination card on the screen to navigate to it. These appear when the navigation system has learned your driving habits.
Setting a Destination Using a
Recent Destination
Press the Menu button.
E328845
1.
Press the Recents tile.
2. Select a destination from the list.
Setting a Destination Using a Saved Destination
Press the Menu button.
E328845
1.
Press Saved Places.
2. Select a saved destination.
Note: Press the star icon next when viewing location details to save the location.
Setting a Destination Using a Point of Interest
Press and hold on a point of interest icon on the map. Information about the location of the point of interest appears on the screen.
E328844
Press the button to begin navigation to the point of interest.
WAYPOINTS
Adding a Waypoint
E328843
Press the Add Waypoint button when in an active navigation session.
1.
Enter your waypoint on the keyboard.
2. Press Search.
3. Select a waypoint from the list.
4. Press Add to Trip.
Editing Waypoints
1.
Press the waypoint you would like to edit.
2. Select an option to redorder or delete the waypoint.
ROUTE GUIDANCE
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Repeating an Instruction
Press the turn indicator to hear the last voice instruction.
Canceling Route Guidance
E280804
Press the button to cancel route guidance to the selected location.
595
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Navigation
(If Equipped)
TRAILER TOWING
NAVIGATION
When you have an active subscription and
Trailer Towing Navigation is switched on, the system will calculate the best route for trailer towing by avoiding dangerous road conditions based on the dimensions of your trailer.
Switching Trailer Towing
Navigation On and Off
1.
Press the Navigation button on the feature bar.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Press Trailer Routing .
4. Switch Trailer-optimized Routing on or off.
Entering Trailer Dimensions
1.
Press the Navigation button on the feature bar.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Press Trailer Routing .
4. Press Towing Menu .
5. Press Add Trailer .
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to enter the type and dimensions of the trailer into the system.
Navigation Alerts
Alerts will appear on the navigation map while driving. An orange alert triangle indicates you should proceed with caution.
When not following active guidance to a destination, a red alert triangle may appear and indicates you should avoid the road and find a detour.
596
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle System Updates
UPDATING THE VEHICLE
SYSTEMS WIRELESSLY
Over the Air Updates
System software updates allow you to update your vehicle
E327789 system software wirelessly. To make sure you receive all updates, set a recurring schedule and connect to Wi-Fi.
Updates may take longer if not connected to Wi-Fi, or may not download at all.
System Update Requirements
Before updating, reference this list to make sure your vehicle is ready be updated. If these requirements are not met during a scheduled update, the update will be canceled and you can reschedule.
• Your vehicle is not running.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your vehicle is parked.
• The hazard indicators are switched off.
• The alarm is not sounding.
• The doors are closed.
• The parking lights are switched off.
• You are not pressing the brake pedal.
• An emergency call is not in progress.
• Your vehicle is not in limp mode.
Scheduling an Update
Make sure Vehicle Connectivity and
Automatic Updates are switched on.
Using the Settings Menu
Press the settings option on the feature bar.
E280315
1.
Press the System Update tile.
2. Press Schedule Update .
3. Use the controls to set the time and day of the update.
4. Save the schedule.
Note: You can set the updates to occur every seven days.
Using the Status Bar Icon
E327785
When an update is available, tap the notification icon and follow the prompts on the screen.
Applying a Vehicle System
Software Update
You can schedule a convenient time for the update to complete. During scheduled updates you may not be able to use your vehicle.
Note: Updates may take up to 30 minutes to complete.
You can see the progress of the update on the touchscreen. An update cannot be canceled once it has been started.
During an update you will not be able to drive your vehicle, start the vehicle, use remote controls to lock and unlock the vehicle. The alarm, central locks, and door tones are disabled. The electronic door lock will not function during an update. You can open the doors using the mechanical latch if child locks are not on. Pull the handle until it stops to use the mechanical latch.
Note: Double locking is switched off and central locking is switched on during and after an update.
Note: If your vehicle is plugged in, charging will stop during an update and resume when the update is complete.
Viewing Update Details
If an update is successful, the touchscreen will provide additional details about the update. You can also access this information under the System Update tile.
597
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle System Updates
If an update is not successful, follow the prompt that appears on the touchscreen.
PERFORMING A MASTER
RESET
Press the settings option on the feature bar.
E280315
1.
Press the Reset tile.
2. Press Master Reset .
3. Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the reset.
598
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site:
Web Address (United States) www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Ford Licensed Accessories are the accessory manufacturer's designs. The manufacturer develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer’s limited warranty details, and request a copy of the
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile communication system specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
599
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Ford Protect
WHAT IS FORD PROTECT
Protect yourself from the rising cost of vehicle repairs with a Ford Protect extended service plan.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans - United States Only
Ford Protect extended service plans mean peace of mind. Extended service plans are backed by Ford Motor Company, and provide more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When you visit your Ford Dealer, insist on the Ford
Protect extended service plan.
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the service center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Protect extended service plan. With the Ford
Protect extended service plan, you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect extended service plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details.
1.
PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it is probably easier to list what is not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the United States, Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
First Day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we will give you a rental vehicle to use for the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, warranty repairs, and field service actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. This should give you and your potential buyer peace of mind.
600
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
The Ford Protect extended service plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) for electric vehicles only.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment provides you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford Protect extended service plan has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect extended service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (Canada Only)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect extended service plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Protect extended service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended service plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. Visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect extended service plan that is right for you.
601
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle.
It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes: first is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep the cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Our Genuine Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock our parts and our authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and could affect emissions compliance.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, a message appears in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km), hybrid vehicles could exceed
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make sure to reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change intervals.
You can drive high performance vehicles in such a way that may lead to higher oil consumption including extended time at high engine speeds, high loads, engine braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track and off-road usage. Under these conditions, oil consumption of approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter per 800 km) is possible. Check the engine oil level at every refueling and adjust to maintain proper levels to avoid engine damage.
602
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
It is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
We strongly recommend only using our genuine or our authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. Have discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination checked immediately.
Make sure to change the vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using our approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections.
Check Every Month
The air filter restriction gauge.
1
The engine oil level.
Function of all interior and the exterior lights.
The tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
The windshield washer fluid level.
The fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
1
The holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
1
1 Diesel vehicles only.
603
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Six Months
The battery connections. Clean if necessary.
The body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
The cooling system fluid level and the coolant system strength.
The door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
The hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
The parking brake for proper operation.
The seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt for operation.
The washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
It is important to have the systems on your vehicle regularly checked. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt or belts Hazard warning system operation
Battery performance
Engine air filter
Exhaust system
Horn operation
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses
Suspension components for leaks or damage
Exterior lamps operation
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Steering and linkage
Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure 2
604
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
For oil and fluid leaks
Half-shaft dust boots
Multi-Point Inspection
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Washer spray and wiper operation
1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2 If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Oil Change Reminder
Your vehicle comes with an oil change reminder that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how you use your vehicle.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval
1
Vehicle Use and Example
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Normal
Normal commuting with highway driving.
No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
Moderate to heavy load or towing.
Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling.
Extended hot or cold operation.
605
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval
1
Vehicle Use and Example
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.
1 Hybrid vehicles may achieve longer distances between oil changes, but do not exceed the 1 year max oil change interval. Remaining oil life can be accessed through the information display.
606
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level, if applicable with dipstick. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate grease fittings if applicable.
3
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and the Ujoints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
4
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
4
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary.
4
1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
3 Four-wheel drive vehicles only.
4 Diesel vehicles only.
607
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Every 3 Years
Change the brake fluid.
2
1 Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time for the interval.
2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Every 55,000 mi
(88,500 km)
Every 60,000 mi
(96,600 km)
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.
Replace the engine air filter.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
2
Replace the spark plugs.
3
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
3
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
3
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
4
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
5
Change the front axle fluid.
6
Change the rear axle fluid.
Change the transfer case fluid.
6
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Replace the fuel pump drive belt.
2
608
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the timing belt.
2
At 200,000 mi
(322,000 km)
Change the engine coolant.
7
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 Diesel vehicles only.
3 Only for vehicles with pickup bed power outlet.
4 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
5 Non-hybrid vehicles only.
6 Four-wheel drive vehicles only.
7 Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every five years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE - DIESEL
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the oil change required message appearing in the information display.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), for example, the oil change reminder was reset at
25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the engine air filter replacement.
As required
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-Top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart.
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
Inspect frequently, service as required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
609
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-Top Carrier
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentration and freeze-point protection.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent or Extended Idling - Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving or Frequent
Low-Speed Operation if you use your Vehicle for Stationary Operation
As required
Inspect frequently, service as required
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentration and freeze-point protection.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
610
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Frequent Low-Speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Long Rush-Hour Traffic
As required
Inspect frequently, service as required
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentration and freeze-point protection.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Sustained High-Speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating - Maximum Loaded Weight for Vehicle Operation
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentration and freeze-point protection.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
611
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C)
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions - Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km) Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary.
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km), six months or 300 engine hours
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), 6 months or
600 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the air inlet foam filter.
1
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
612
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-Road Operation
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
As required Inspect functional holes in exhaust tip to make sure they
are clean and clear of debris or foreign materials. See
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km), six months or 300 engine hours
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km) or 300 engine hours
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the air inlet foam filter.
1
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 463).
Using Biodiesel, Up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20)
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
300 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
613
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are not required unless a leak is suspected, or the assembly has been submerged in water. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
For vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an oil that meets our specification or has an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil, the normal oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter.
Diesel Particulate Filter
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds up in the diesel particulate filter, which is not removed during the regeneration process. The filter may need to be replaced with a new or remanufactured part at approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine and vehicle operating conditions.
In this case, the engine control system sets a service light, a wrench icon, to inform you to bring your vehicle to the dealer for service. If there are any issues with the oxidation catalyst or particulate filter system, the engine control system sets a service light, a wrench or engine icon, to inform you to bring your vehicle to the dealer for service.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE - GASOLINE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the oil change required message appearing in the information display.
614
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), for example, the oil change reminder was reset at
25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the engine air filter replacement.
As required
Inspect frequently, service as required
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace the spark plugs.
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use, such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Replace the engine air filter.
Inspect frequently, service as required
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
615
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions, such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, service as required
Replace the engine air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the tread depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) or six months
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
1
Inspect frequently, service as required
Off-road Operation
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints and the U-joints.
Lubricate grease fittings, if applicable.
Replace the engine air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) or six months
Change the engine oil and filter.
1
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and the measure the tread depth.
1
Exclusive Use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
616
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are not required unless a leak is suspected or the assembly has been submerged in water. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an oil that meets our specification or has an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil, the normal oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter.
617
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
ROLLOVER WARNING
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU AUTO LINE
PROGRAM - UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
618
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation.
THE MEDIATION AND
ARBITRATION PROGRAM -
CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca.
ORDERING A CANADIAN
FRENCH OWNER'S MANUAL
You can obtain a French owner's manual from an authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, LLC at:
619
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
HELM, LLC
47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
For additional information, visit www.helminc.com
.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE UNITED STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
Website
Website
Phone
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English) http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French)
1-800-333-0510
620
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Website
Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information www.ford.ca
1-800-565-3673
621
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Blind Spot Information System
Argentina
E338548
South Korea
E338319
Ukraine
R-C-1Ap-F5TR
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2CF5TR
IC: 3432A-F5TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Body Control Module
Argentina
E338320
622
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E338547
European Union EU
E310043
Taiwan
E338434
South Korea
Customer Information
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336
IC: 7812A-A2C766336
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Cruise Control Module
Argentina
E338433
E338549
623
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
United States and Canada Pakistan
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2CF3TR
IC: 3432A-F3TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Paraguay
E339843
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER37535/15
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER49357/16
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: N5F-A08TAA
FCC ID: N5F-A08TDA
IC: 3248A-A08TAA
E339812
NR: 2017-10-I-0000334
NR: 2018-07-I-000317
624
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Anti-Theft System
Argentina
Djibouti
E339936
Ghana
NCA APPROVED: NCA/TA/16/22
Indonesia
E339818
Brazil
E339848
625
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E339937
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA – OUC11545917
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2013/235
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Malaysia
Customer Information
Morocco
E339836
CIDF18000209
Mauritania
E339939
Pakistan
E339938
Moldova
E339843
Paraguay
E337971
626
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E339837
Serbia
Customer Information
South Korea
E269681
Singapore
E339940
South Africa
E269667
627
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E339847
E339675
MSIP-RRM-OAC-OUC11541917
Syria
SyTRA
REGISTERED No:
1510/4NK
Taiwan
Ukraine
Customer Information
Vietnam
E278262
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER49115/16
DEALER No: DA37380/15
United States and Canada
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Entry/Passive Start
Remote Control
European Union EU
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: OUC11545917
IC: 850K-11545917
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
E310043
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3N-A3C054338
628
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
FCC ID: M3N-A3C054339
IC: 7812A-A3C054338
IC: 7812A-A3C054339
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Key
Argentina
Brazil
E340120
Jamaica
E340215
E339844
E339842
629
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Pakistan
Customer Information
E337974
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
Taiwan
E340216
630
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E340217
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER47690/16
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER46754/16
DEALER No.: DA37380/15
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C931423
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
Customer Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Radio Transceiver Module
Argentina
Ghana
E340644
E340645
Morocco
E340648
South Africa
E339077
Djibouti
E340642
E340643
631
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E340649
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Zambia
E340647
E340218
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0082R
FCC ID: L2C0083TR
IC: 342A-0083TR
E340646
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC4
Argentina
E338546
632
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
European Union EU
Customer Information
Morocco
E310043
Ghana
E338082
India
E338083
Jordan
E338084
633
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E338088
E338085
Oman
E338086
South Korea
E338087
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
Customer Information
United States and Canada European Union EU
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC4 Low
Argentina
E310043
Ghana
E338203
India
E338083
Jordan
E338545
634
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E338204
Morocco
E338205
Oman
E338086
South Korea
Customer Information
E338206
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4L
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Telematics Control Unit
European Union EU
E338088
635
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E310043
Customer Information
United States and Canada Brazil
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: KMH-14H074-NA1
IC: 1422A-14H074NA1
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s) - FP3
Argentina
E338010
Jamaica
E338213
Mexico
E338008
636
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E338212
Paraguay
Customer Information
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s) - FP4
Argentina
E338214
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: MRXFP3
IC: 2546A-FP3
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
E338009
China
E338011
637
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Djibouti
Customer Information
Mauritania
E338012
Ghana
E338016
Jordan
E338017
638
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E337972
E337970
Moldova
E337971
Nigeria
Oman
E337973
Pakistan
Customer Information
Serbia
E337974
Paraguay
E338019
South Korea
E338023
Ukraine
E338018
639
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
E338024
United Arab Emirates
Customer Information
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Wireless Accessory Charging
Module
European Union EU
E338025
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Garage Door Opener
United States and Canada
E310043
South Korea
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: NZLSAHL5D
IC: 4112A-SAHL5D
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
E273475
640
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Taiwan
Customer Information
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
- UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
E338220
United States
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0066T
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle
.
WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling
.
641
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
For more information visit: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty.
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford parts.
For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
642
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
643
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional
644
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
645
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control : Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully.
646
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
647
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
648
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application.
This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute.
In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court.
You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration.
If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver.
Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure.
Any arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator
649
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year.
To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability.
If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
650
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d)
651
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
652
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or
653
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
654
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
655
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice:
656
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions: a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
657
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data,
Customer Information either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail.
658
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Territory
Argentina
Ecuador
Notice
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana and
Martinique
Mexico
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
IV. Middle East Territory
Customer Information
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Country
Jordan
Notice
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to terminate Client’s license with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services.
659
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client’s complying with the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
660 is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Country(ies) Notice
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Austria “© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia and/or
Ukraine
France
Germany
Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010”
Greece
“Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen”
Hungary
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Italy
“© EuroGeographics”
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
Norway
Portugal
“La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.”
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
“Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG”
“Based upon electronic data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie.
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
661
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
662
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i) view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues.
663
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Customer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
664
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide,
665
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management approach of low-power radio wave radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified low-power radiation motor models, companies, firms or users must not alter the frequency, increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power radio-frequency motors must not affect aviation safety and interfere with legal telecommunications. Should interference be detected, immediately stop using the device and only resume usage after ensuring that there is no longer any interference. For the legal telecommunication and wireless telecommunication of the telco, the low-power radio frequency motor must be able to tolerate legal limits of interference from telecommunication, industrial, scientific and radio wave equipment.
666
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products and/or Services ), you must accept certain terms and conditions. The following is a brief summary of the terms and conditions that apply to you. To view the full terms and conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, you will be deemed to have accepted and agreed to be bound by the terms and conditions fully detailed at:
Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your personal use. You may not record, or retransmit the content, nor use the content in association with any other traffic information or route guidance service or device not approved by Intelematics. You obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including copyright) in the data that is used to provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are intended as an aid to personal motoring and travel planning, and do not provide comprehensive or accurate information on all occasions. On occasions, you may experience additional delay as a result of using SUNA Products and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is not intended, or suitable, for use in applications where time of arrival or driving directions may impact the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and active, remain at all times responsible for observing all relevant laws and codes of safe driving. In particular, you agree to only actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable for technical reasons or for planned maintenance. We will try to perform maintenance at times when congestion is light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the manufacturer of your device (the
“ Suppliers ”)) shall be liable to you or to any third party for any damages either direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or otherwise arising out of the use of or inability to use SUNA Products and/or
667
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised of the possibility of such damages. You also acknowledge that the neither Intelematics nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any warranties that relate to the availability, accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which might otherwise be implied by any State or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this manual. Constant product development may mean that some information is not entirely up-to-date. The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
EMISSION LAW - UNITED
STATES OF AMERICA
WARNING: Do not remove or alter the original equipment floor covering or insulation between it and the metal floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation protect occupants of the vehicle from the engine and exhaust system heat and noise. On vehicles with no original equipment floor covering insulation, do not carry passengers in a manner that permits prolonged skin contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle modification without first determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions control systems including related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced engine power and the illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or element of the design incorporated into a new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person removes or renders inoperative any device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may presume to constitute tampering as follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron absorbers, fender apron barriers, underbody noise shields or acoustically absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the engine speed governor, to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water separator.
668
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Information
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct the concern, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation became effective governing the noise emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and maintenance, and the noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide, are applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for export.
Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required information and warnings.
669
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the front or rear seatbacks, or in areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic modules and airbags.
Car/SUV
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to meet electromagnetic compatibility legislation. It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment an authorized dealer installs on your vehicle complies with applicable local legislation and other requirements. Installation of some aftermarket electronic devices could degrade the performance of vehicle functions, which use radio frequency signals such as broadcast radio receiver, tire pressure monitoring system, push button start, Bluetooth connectivity or satellite navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular telephones and amateur radio transmitters) must keep to the parameters in the following illustrations and table. We do not provide any other special provisions or conditions for installations or use.
E239120
670
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Van
Appendices
E239122
Truck
E239121
671
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Frequency Band
MHz
Maximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
1-30 50
50-54
68-88
142-176
380-512
806-870
50
50
50
50
10
Antenna Positions
1
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
672
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
3
360 Degree Camera...................................305
360 Degree Camera Settings.......................307
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines..........306
Keep Out Zone....................................................307
360 Degree Camera Limitations...........305
360 Degree Camera Precautions.........305
360 Degree Camera Settings.................307
Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and
Off.......................................................................307
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
View...................................................................307
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive....................................260
9
911 Assist...........................................................68
A
A/C
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
About This Publication..................................21
Features and Options..........................................21
Illustrations..............................................................21
Location of Components....................................21
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................273
Accessing Apps............................................590
Accessing Navigation.................................594
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position..........................................................216
Accessories....................................................599
Active Drive Assist........................................291
Active Drive Assist –
Troubleshooting............................................294
Active Drive Assist Alerts..........................292
Active Drive Assist Automatic
Cancellation...............................................293
Active Drive Assist Indicators..................293
Hands-On Driving Support Available.........293
Active Drive Assist Limitations...............292
Active Drive Assist Precautions...............291
Active Drive Assist Requirements..........292
Active Drive Assist Settings.....................292
Enabling Active Drive Assist..........................292
Active Drive Assist –
Troubleshooting........................................294
Active Drive Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................294
Active Park Assist........................................309
Active Park Assist – Troubleshooting..........311
Active Park Assist Precautions..............309
Active Park Assist –
Troubleshooting..........................................311
Active Park Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................311
Active Park Assist – Information
Messages...........................................................311
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................315
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting............................................325
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control.............324
Lane Centering....................................................322
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic
Cancellation................................................318
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators........321
Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations...................................................316
Sensor Limitations.............................................316
Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions..................................................315
Hilly Condition Usage........................................315
When Following a Vehicle...............................315
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting........................................325
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages.........................................................325
Adaptive Front Lighting..............................133
How Does Adaptive Front Lighting
Work....................................................................133
Switching Adaptive Front Lighting On and
Off........................................................................134
Adjustable Pedals.........................................119
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors..................140
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................473
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................474
673
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................473
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness....................................................136
Adjusting the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller Mode.......................................406
Selecting the Trailer Brake Effort.................407
Selecting the Trailer Brake Type..................407
Adjusting the Map.......................................594
Changing the Format of the Map................594
Zooming the Map In and Out.......................594
Adjusting the Pedals....................................119
Adjusting the Seatbelt Height...................52
Adjusting the Seatbelt Length..................53
Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy......................................................52
Adjusting the Sound Settings..................571
Balance and Fade...............................................571
Occupancy Mode................................................571
Sound Mode..........................................................571
Speed Compensated Volume........................571
Tone Settings........................................................571
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................117
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................117
Adjusting the Volume.................................570
Aid Mode.........................................................335
How Does Aid Mode Work.............................335
What Is Aid Mode..............................................335
Airbag Precautions........................................60
Airbags...............................................................58
Front Passenger Sensing System..................62
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™.........554
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel....................555
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L..................................556
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................558
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™.........557
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L.................................559
Alert and Aid Mode.....................................335
How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work..........336
What Is Alert and Aid Mode...........................335
Alert Mode......................................................334
Adjusting the Steering Wheel Vibration
Intensity............................................................335
How Does Alert Mode Work..........................335
What Is Alert Mode...........................................334
AM/FM Radio.................................................572
AM/FM Radio Limitations...............................572
Selecting a Radio Station...............................572
Ambient Lighting..........................................136
Adjusting Ambient Lighting............................136
Switching Ambient Lighting On and
Off.......................................................................136
Anti-Lock Braking System........................273
Anti-Lock Braking System
Limitations.......................................................273
Anti-Theft Alarm System............................111
Arming the Anti-Theft Alarm System..........112
Disarming the Anti-Theft Alarm
System................................................................112
How Does the Anti-Theft Alarm System
Work......................................................................111
What Are the Inclination Sensors...................111
What Are the Interior Sensors..........................111
What Is the Anti-Theft Alarm System..........111
What Is the Battery Backup Alarm.................111
What Is the Perimeter Alarm............................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings.........112
Setting the Alarm Security Level...................112
Switching Ask on Exit On and Off..................112
What are the Alarm Security Levels.............112
What Is Ask on Exit..............................................112
Appendices....................................................670
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake..............................................................276
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency...................................................276
App Precautions..........................................590
App Requirements.....................................590
Apps.................................................................590
Audio System................................................570
AM/FM Radio.......................................................572
674
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Audio System – Troubleshooting.................577
Digital Radio.........................................................573
Satellite Radio.....................................................574
Audio System Precautions.......................570
Audio System – Troubleshooting...........577
Audio System – Information
Messages..........................................................577
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror..................141
What Is the Auto-Dimming Exterior
Mirror...................................................................141
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror..................139
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Limitations.......................................................139
What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior
Mirror..................................................................139
Auto Hold........................................................283
Auto Hold Indicators...................................283
Autolamps.......................................................125
Autolamp Settings.............................................125
What Are Autolamps.........................................125
Autolock............................................................85
Autolock Requirements.....................................85
Switching Autolock On and Off......................85
What Is Autolock..................................................85
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake..............................................276
Automatic Crash Shutoff.........................440
Automatic Crash Shutoff
Precautions....................................................440
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle..............................440
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff..............440
Automatic Emergency Braking................351
Switching Automatic Emergency Braking
On and Off.......................................................352
What Is Automatic Emergency
Braking...............................................................351
Automatic Engine Stop..............................215
How Does Automatic Engine Stop
Work....................................................................215
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop..............216
Switching Automatic Engine Stop On and
Off........................................................................215
What Is Automatic Engine Stop....................215
Automatic High Beam Control................128
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators..........................................................130
Automatic High Beam Control
Limitations.......................................................129
Automatic High Beam Control
Precautions......................................................129
Automatic High Beam Control
Requirements..................................................129
How Does Automatic High Beam Control
Work....................................................................128
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control...............................................................130
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.......................................................130
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting.........................................130
Automatic High Beam Control –
Information Messages.................................130
Automatic Locking Mode.............................51
Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode........52
Engaging Automatic Locking Mode...............51
What Is Automatic Locking Mode...................51
When to Use Automatic Locking Mode........51
Automatic Return to Park (P).................256
Automatic Return to Park (P)
Limitations......................................................256
How Does Automatic Return to Park (P)
Work..................................................................256
What Is Automatic Return to Park
(P)......................................................................256
Automatic Transmission...........................253
Automatic Return to Park (P).......................256
Automatic Transmission Positions.............253
Manually Shifting Gears..................................254
Manual Park Release........................................257
Temporary Neutral Mode...............................255
Automatic Transmission Positions.......253
Drive (D)................................................................253
Manual (M)..........................................................254
Neutral (N)...........................................................253
Park (P).................................................................253
Reverse (R) .........................................................253
Automatic Transmission
Precautions.................................................253
Auto Mode......................................................160
Auto Mode Indicators.......................................160
Switching Auto Mode On and Off...............160
Switching Dual Mode On and Off ................161
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................224
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting...........225
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators......................224
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions.................224
675
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Auto-Start-Stop –
Troubleshooting........................................225
Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................226
Auto-Start-Stop – Information
Messages.........................................................225
Autounlock.......................................................85
Autounlock Requirements................................85
Switching Autounlock On and Off................85
What Is Autounlock.............................................85
Autowipers......................................................120
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Rain
Sensor................................................................120
Autowipers Settings..........................................120
What Are Autowipers........................................120
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................471
Bed Extender...................................................93
Bed Extender Precautions................................93
Using the Bed Extender.....................................93
Beginning a Voice Interaction.................583
Blind Spot Information System.............340
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting............................................343
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage...........................................................341
Blind Spot Information System
Indicators.....................................................343
Blind Spot Information System
Limitations..................................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Precautions................................................340
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements............................................340
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting........................................343
Blind Spot Information System –
Information Messages................................343
Blind Spot Information System With
Trailer Coverage..........................................341
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage Limitations...................................341
Selecting a Trailer..............................................342
Setting a Trailer Length...................................342
What Is Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Coverage..............................................341
Bluetooth®....................................................589
Body Control Module Fuse Box...............451
Accessing the Body Control Module Fuse
Box......................................................................451
Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control
Module Fuse Box...........................................451
Locating the Body Control Module Fuse
Box......................................................................451
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........455
Booster Seats..................................................46
Types of Booster Seats......................................46
Brake Fluid Specification...........................274
Brake Over Accelerator..............................273
Brake Precautions........................................273
Brakes...............................................................273
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................273
Brakes – Troubleshooting...............................274
Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................274
Brakes – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................274
Brakes – Warning Lamps................................274
Breaking-In....................................................430
Brakes and Clutch.............................................430
Tires........................................................................430
C
Calculating Payload....................................363
Calculating the Load Limit.......................363
Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity..................................................364
California Proposition 65 - United States of America....................................................641
Canceling the Set Speed...........................314
Capacities and Specifications................524
Catalytic Converter......................................251
Catalytic Converter –
Troubleshooting.............................................251
Catalytic Converter Precautions.............251
Catalytic Converter –
Troubleshooting.........................................251
Catalytic Converter – Warning
Lamps................................................................251
676
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Center Console Work Surface................200
Center Console Work Surface –
Troubleshooting............................................202
Center Console Work Surface –
Troubleshooting........................................202
Center Console Work Surface – Information
Messages.........................................................202
Changing a Flat Tire....................................516
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................516
Jacking the Vehicle...........................................520
Removing the Spare Tire.................................519
Removing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag......................................................................518
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire.......................521
Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag......................................................................522
Tire Change Procedure.....................................517
Changing a Road Wheel............................516
Changing the 12V Battery..........................471
Remove and Reinstall the Battery...............472
Changing the Fuel Filter - Diesel.............471
Changing the Fuel Filter - Gasoline........471
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Flip Key...............................73
Battery Replacement Procedure....................73
Changing the Remote Control Battery -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start..........72
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password..................................569
Charging a Device.........................................187
Charging a Wireless Device.....................203
Checking MyKey System Status..............80
Checking the Brake Fluid...........................273
Checking the Coolant................................463
Adding Coolant..................................................464
Coolant Change.................................................465
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management.................................................466
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................465
Severe Climates.................................................465
Checking the Seatbelts................................55
Checking the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Status.....................249
Checking the Tire Pressures....................505
Checking the Wiper Blades........................121
Children and Airbags.....................................61
Child Restraint Anchor Points...................36
Locating the Child Restraint Lower Anchor
Points...................................................................36
Locating the Child Restraint Top Tether
Anchor Points....................................................37
What Are the Child Restraint Anchor
Points...................................................................36
Child Restraints...............................................38
Child Restraint Position Information............38
Child Restraints Recommendation...............39
Child Safety......................................................35
Child Restraint Anchor Points.........................36
Child Restraints.....................................................38
Installing Child Restraints.................................39
Child Safety Locks.........................................48
Left-Hand Side.....................................................48
Right-Hand Side..................................................48
Child Safety Precautions.............................35
Cleaning Products......................................486
Materials...............................................................486
Cleaning the Exterior.................................486
Cleaning Camera Lenses and
Sensors............................................................488
Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or Stainless
Steel...................................................................487
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear
Lamps...............................................................486
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics........................488
Cleaning the Engine Compartment............487
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions..............486
Cleaning the Underbody................................488
Cleaning Wheels................................................487
Cleaning Windows and Wiper
Blades...............................................................487
Cleaning the Interior..................................488
Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats...............490
Cleaning Displays and Screens...................489
Cleaning Moonroof Tracks............................490
Cleaning Plastic.................................................488
Cleaning Seatbelts...........................................490
Cleaning Seats and the Headliner..............489
Cleaning the Instrument Panel....................488
Clearing All MyKeys......................................80
Clearing the Garage Door Opener..........185
Climate Control.............................................158
Auto Mode............................................................160
677
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Climate Control Hints..................................161
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather..............................................................161
General Hints........................................................161
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................161
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................161
Recommended Settings for Cooling............161
Recommended Settings for Heating...........161
Closing the Tailgate......................................96
Closing the Tailgate From Inside Your
Vehicle.................................................................96
Closing the Tailgate From Outside Your
Vehicle.................................................................96
Closing the Tailgate Using the Remote
Control.................................................................97
Cold Weather Precautions.......................430
Connected Vehicle......................................565
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting...........................................566
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................565
Connected Vehicle Data..............................28
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............565
Connected Vehicle Requirements........565
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting.......................................566
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................566
Connecting a Bluetooth® Device.........589
Connecting a Trailer....................................372
Connecting a Trailer –
Troubleshooting.............................................374
Electronic Park Hold..........................................373
Hitches....................................................................371
Recognizing a Trailer.........................................372
Safety Chains.......................................................372
Trailer Brakes.......................................................373
Trailer Connection Alarm................................373
Trailer Connection Checklist..........................373
Trailer Light Check.............................................373
Connecting a Trailer Precautions............371
Connecting a Trailer –
Troubleshooting........................................374
Connecting a Trailer – Information
Messages..........................................................374
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network........................................................565
Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........565
Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........565
What Is the Modem..........................................565
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network........................................................565
Connecting Your Phone............................585
Contacting Us...................................................19
Argentina..................................................................19
Asia Pacific..............................................................19
Australia...................................................................19
Brazil..........................................................................19
Canada......................................................................19
Caribbean, Central America and Israel.........19
Europe.......................................................................19
Ford Credit - US Only..........................................20
Middle East.............................................................20
New Zealand...........................................................19
North Africa ............................................................19
Puerto Rico.............................................................20
South Korea...........................................................20
Sub-Saharan Africa ............................................19
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico................19
United States..........................................................19
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™..........547
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.0L Diesel....................548
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.3L..................................548
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................550
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 3.5L Ecoboost™.........549
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 5.0L.................................550
Crash and Breakdown
Information.................................................436
Automatic Crash Shutoff...............................440
Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................438
Post-Crash Alert System...............................440
Recovery Towing...............................................440
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......65
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Flip
Key....................................................................80
Creating a MyKey - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start...................................................79
Creating a Personal Profile......................593
678
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........569
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot............................................................569
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password.........................................................569
Cross Traffic Alert........................................344
Cross Traffic Alert –
Troubleshooting............................................346
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage..........................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators...................345
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations................344
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions..............344
Cross Traffic Alert –
Troubleshooting........................................346
Cross Traffic Alert – Information
Messages.........................................................346
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage......................................................345
Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer Coverage
Limitations......................................................345
What Is Cross Traffic Alert With Trailer
Coverage..........................................................345
Cruise Control................................................313
Cruise Control Indicators...........................314
Cup Holders...................................................205
Cup Holder Precautions..................................205
Customer Information................................618
Customizing the Instrument Cluster
Display...........................................................153
Adding Screens Using MyView......................153
Adding Screens Using Select
Screens..............................................................153
Configuring Gauges............................................153
D
Data Privacy.....................................................26
Services That Third Parties Provide..............26
Services That We Provide.................................26
Department of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades..................................494
Temperature A B C............................................495
Traction AA A B C..............................................495
Treadwear............................................................494
Deploying and Stowing the Power
Running Boards...........................................116
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................249
Diesel Particulate Filter.............................240
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration...................................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter –
Troubleshooting............................................243
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration...............................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Limitations...........................242
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Precautions..........................241
Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration Requirements......................241
Starting Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration..................................................242
What Is Diesel Particulate Filter Manual
Regeneration ..................................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter
Precautions................................................240
Diesel Particulate Filter
Requirements..............................................241
Diesel Particulate Filter –
Troubleshooting........................................243
Diesel Particulate Filter – Information
Messages.........................................................243
Diesel Particulate Filter – Warning
Lamps...............................................................243
Digital Radio...................................................573
Digital Radio Indicators....................................574
Digital Radio Limitations.................................573
How Does Digital Radio Work.......................573
Switching Digital Radio Reception On and
Off.......................................................................573
What Is Digital Radio........................................573
Directing the Flow of Air............................160
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents..................................................................160
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air
Vents..................................................................160
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents..................................................................160
Disposing of Airbags.....................................66
Distance Alert.................................................351
Adjusting the Sensitivity of Distance
Alert.....................................................................351
What Is Distance Alert......................................351
679
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Distance Indication.....................................350
Distance Indication Indicator.........................351
Switching Distance Indication On and
Off........................................................................351
What Is Distance Indication..........................350
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings........86
Door Ajar Audible Warning...............................86
Doors and Locks.............................................84
Autolock..................................................................85
Autounlock.............................................................85
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.............86
Mislock.....................................................................85
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle.................................................................84
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle.................................................................84
Doors and Locks –
Troubleshooting..........................................86
Doors and Locks – Information
Messages...........................................................86
Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps..............86
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap -
Diesel.............................................................470
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators..........483
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator.........483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.0L Diesel.............483
Drive Belt Routing - 3.3L...........................484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Dual Generators..........484
Drive Belt Routing - 3.5L Ecoboost™,
Vehicles With: Single Generator.........484
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Dual Generators........................................485
Drive Belt Routing - 5.0L, Vehicles With:
Single Generator.......................................485
Drive Mode Control.....................................328
Drive Mode Control –
Troubleshooting.............................................331
Drive Modes.........................................................329
Drive Mode Control –
Troubleshooting.........................................331
Drive Mode Control – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................332
Drive Mode Control – Information
Messages..........................................................331
Drive Mode Control – Warning
Lamps................................................................331
Drive Modes...................................................329
Deep Snow/Sand..............................................329
Eco...........................................................................329
Mud/Ruts..............................................................329
Normal...................................................................329
Rock Crawl...........................................................329
Slippery.................................................................330
Sport......................................................................330
Tow/Haul...............................................................331
Trail...........................................................................331
Driver Alert......................................................355
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting.....................356
Driver Alert Limitations..............................355
Driver Alert Precautions............................355
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting...............356
Driver Alert – Information Messages.........356
Driving Economically.................................430
Driving Hints..................................................428
Off-Road Driving................................................428
E
Easy Entry and Exit.......................................90
Electric Parking Brake Audible
Warning.........................................................277
Electric Parking Brake.................................276
Electric Parking Brake –
Troubleshooting.............................................277
Electric Parking Brake –
Troubleshooting.........................................277
Electric Parking Brake – Information
Messages.........................................................278
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps................................................................277
Electric Power Steering.............................295
Electric Power Steering Adaptive
Steering............................................................295
Electric Power Steering Precautions..........295
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............670
Electronic Locking Differential...............269
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting.............................................272
Electronic Locking Differential
Indicators......................................................272
680
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Electronic Locking Differential
Precautions.................................................269
Operating the Electronic Locking
Differential with a Spare or Mismatched
Tires...................................................................269
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting.........................................272
Electronic Locking Differential –
Information Messages.................................272
Emergency Call Limitations.......................69
Emergency Call Requirements.................68
Emergency Call System Data....................29
Emergency Towing.....................................445
Emission Law - United States of
America.......................................................668
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and
Maintenance..................................................669
Tampering With a Noise Control
System.............................................................668
Enabling Apps on an Android
Device...........................................................590
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device...........590
Enabling or Disabling Personal
Profiles..........................................................592
Enabling Remote Start...............................155
End User License Agreement.................643
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................643
Engine Air Filter.............................................467
Changing the Engine Air Filter......................468
Checking the Engine Air Filter Restriction
Gauge................................................................467
Engine Air Filter - Information
Messages.........................................................470
Engine Block Heater.....................................213
Engine Block Heater Precautions.................213
How Does the Engine Block Heater
Work....................................................................214
Using the Engine Block Heater......................214
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.7L EcoBoost™........................................536
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................537
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.0L Diesel...................................................537
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel Fuel
Blends (B20 Max)........................................539
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................539
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe Duty
Service..............................................................539
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.3L................................................................539
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................540
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L, Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)............................................................543
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................544
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
3.5L Ecoboost™........................................541
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................542
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
5.0L................................................................545
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................546
Engine Oil.......................................................462
Adding Engine Oil..............................................462
Checking the Engine Oil Level......................462
Engine Oil Capacity and
Specification..................................................463
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview........................462
Resetting the Engine Oil Change
Reminder.........................................................463
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................524
Engine Specifications - 3.0L
Diesel.............................................................525
Engine Specifications - 3.3L....................526
Engine Specifications - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................528
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................527
Engine Specifications - 5.0L...................529
Entering a Parallel Parking Space........309
Entering a Perpendicular Parking
Space.............................................................310
Evasive Steering Assist..............................352
Evasive Steering Assist Limitations............352
Switching Evasive Steering Assist On and
Off.......................................................................352
What Is Evasive Steering Assist....................352
681
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Event Data.........................................................27
Active Drive Assist Driver Facing Camera
Data......................................................................28
Exiting a Parking Space.............................310
Export Unique Options.............................669
Extending the Exterior Mirrors..................141
Power Telescoping Mirrors...............................141
Extending the Remote Start
Duration........................................................156
Exterior Bulbs................................................474
Changing a Front Fog Lamp Bulb...............480
Changing a Front Side Marker Lamp
Bulb....................................................................479
Changing a Front Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb....................................................................478
Changing a Headlamp Bulb...........................476
Changing a High Mounted Stoplamp
Bulb....................................................................482
Changing a License Plate Lamp Bulb........482
Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb.........................480
Changing a Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb....................................................................481
Changing a Reversing Lamp Bulb...............482
Changing a Stoplamp Bulb............................481
Exterior Bulb Specification Chart................474
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly..............476
Exterior Lamps...............................................125
Exterior Lamp Audible Warning.....................127
Exterior Lamp Indicators..................................127
How Do Cornering Lamps Work....................125
Switching the Cargo Lamps On.....................127
Switching the Daytime Running Lamps On and Off...............................................................126
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On and
Off........................................................................126
Switching the Spot Lamps On and
Off........................................................................127
Switching the Turn Signal Lamps On and
Off........................................................................125
Exterior Lighting Control............................124
Exterior Lighting............................................124
Adaptive Front Lighting....................................133
Autolamps.............................................................125
Automatic High Beam Control......................128
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting.............................................130
Exterior Lamps.....................................................125
Exterior Zone Lighting........................................127
Glare Free Lighting..............................................131
Glare Free Lighting –
Troubleshooting.............................................133
Headlamps............................................................124
Headlamps – Troubleshooting......................124
Exterior Mirrors..............................................140
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror.........................141
Exterior Zone Lighting..................................127
Exterior Zone Lighting Settings.....................128
Using the Exterior Zone Lighting...................127
What Is Exterior Zone Lighting.......................127
F
Fastening and Unfastening the
Seatbelts........................................................50
Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................50
Using the Seatbelt With Cinch Tongue
...............................................................................5 0
Feature Bar....................................................582
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank................................................247
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank in Cold Weather..................247
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank Using a Fuel Station
Pump..................................................................247
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank Using a Portable
Container.........................................................248
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Flat Tire.................................516
Floor Mats........................................................431
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Manual Folding Mirrors...............140
Folding the Exterior Mirrors - Vehicles
With: Power Folding Mirrors..................140
Switching Auto-fold On and Off....................141
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals................................119
Ford Protect..................................................600
Four-Wheel Drive Driving Hints..............264
Driving In Sand....................................................265
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain................265
Driving on Snow and Ice.................................266
Driving Through Mud and Water..................265
Emergency Maneuvers....................................264
682
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Four-Wheel Drive........................................260
Four-Wheel Drive Driving Hints....................264
Four-Wheel Drive Modes................................263
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting........266
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators...................264
Four-wheel Drive Auto....................................264
Four-wheel Drive High.....................................264
Four-wheel Drive Low......................................264
Two-wheel Drive High.....................................264
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations..................261
Mechanical Shift Blocking..............................262
Operating Four-Wheel Drive with a Spare or Mismatched tires......................................261
Four-Wheel Drive Modes..........................263
Four-Wheel Drive Auto....................................263
Four-Wheel Drive High....................................264
Four-Wheel Drive Low.....................................264
Two-Wheel Drive High.....................................263
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions...............260
Four-Wheel Drive –
Troubleshooting........................................266
Four-Wheel Drive – Information
Messages..........................................................267
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning Lamps.........266
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................562
Front Exterior...................................................33
Front Parking Aid.........................................298
Front Parking Aid Audible Warnings..........299
Front Parking Aid Limitations.......................298
Locating the Front Parking Aid
Sensors.............................................................299
What is the Front Parking Aid.......................298
Front Passenger Sensing System............62
Front Passenger Sensing System
Indicators...........................................................64
Front Passenger Sensing System
Precautions.......................................................64
How Does the Front Passenger Sensing
System Work.....................................................62
What Is the Front Passenger Sensing
System................................................................62
Front Seat Precautions...............................167
Front Seats......................................................167
Heated Seats........................................................174
Manual Seats.......................................................168
Massage Seats.....................................................173
Power Seats..........................................................170
Ventilated Seats..................................................174
Fuel and Refueling.......................................227
Fuel and Refueling –
Troubleshooting............................................239
Fuel Quality..........................................................227
Refueling...............................................................233
Running Out of Fuel..........................................232
Fuel and Refueling Precautions..............227
Fuel and Refueling –
Troubleshooting........................................239
Fuel and Refueling – Information
Messages.........................................................239
Fuel and Refueling – Warning
Lamps...............................................................239
Fuel Gauge......................................................146
Fuel Gauge Limitations.....................................147
Locating the Fuel Filler Door...........................147
What Is Distance to Empty..............................147
What Is the Fuel Gauge....................................146
What Is the Low Fuel Reminder....................147
Fuel Quality....................................................227
Selecting the Correct Fuel..............................227
Selecting the Correct Fuel for Cold
Weather............................................................229
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline............................................................232
Fuel Tank Capacity - Diesel.....................552
Fuel Tank Capacity - Excluding: Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................238
Advertised Capacity.........................................238
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)...............551
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................553
Fuel Tank Capacity - Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................239
Advertised Capacity.........................................239
Fuse Precautions.........................................446
Fuses................................................................446
Body Control Module Fuse Box.....................451
Fuses – Troubleshooting................................454
Under Hood Fuse Box.....................................446
Fuses – Troubleshooting..........................454
Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions........454
G
Garage Door Opener...................................182
683
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Garage Door Opener Limitations...........183
Garage Door Opener Precautions..........182
Garage Door Opener Radio
Frequencies.................................................185
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance.....................................................185
General Maintenance Information.......602
Multi-Point Inspection....................................604
Owner Checks and Services.........................603
Protecting Your Investment..........................602
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................602
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................602
Glare Free Lighting........................................131
Glare Free Lighting Indicators........................132
Glare Free Lighting Limitations......................132
Glare Free Lighting Precautions.....................131
Glare Free Lighting Requirements.................131
How Does Glare Free Lighting Work.............131
Overriding Glare Free Lighting........................132
Switching Glare Free Lighting On and
Off........................................................................132
Glare Free Lighting –
Troubleshooting.........................................133
Glare Free Lighting – Information
Messages..........................................................133
Glasses Holder.............................................208
Locating the Glasses Holder.........................208
Glossary of Tire Terminology..................500
Glove Compartment..................................205
Locking the Glove Compartment................205
Opening the Glove Compartment..............205
H
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................473
Headlamps......................................................124
Headlamp Indicators.........................................124
Using the High Beam Headlamps................124
Headlamps – Troubleshooting...............124
Headlamps – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................124
Heated Seats..................................................174
Heated Seat Precautions.................................174
Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off........................................................................174
Heating
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
High Voltage Battery...................................252
High Voltage Battery Precautions.........252
High Voltage Battery Vehicle
Precautions - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV).............................................................437
Crashes..................................................................437
Fires.........................................................................437
Post-Incident......................................................438
Hill Descent Control...................................289
Hill Descent Control –
Troubleshooting............................................290
Hill Descent Control Indicator................289
Hill Descent Control Precautions..........289
Hill Descent Control –
Troubleshooting.......................................290
Hill Descent Control – Information
Messages.........................................................290
Hill Start Assist.............................................282
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.............282
Hill Start Assist Precautions....................282
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.......282
Hill Start Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................282
Hitches..............................................................371
Hooking Up a Trailer Using a
Weight-Distributing Hitch...........................371
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........455
Horn....................................................................118
How Does 911 Assist Work.........................68
How Does Active Drive Assist
Work...............................................................291
How Does Active Park Assist
Work..............................................................309
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work.....................................315
How Does a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Work................................................................221
....................................................................................221
How Does Auto Hold Work......................283
How Does Blind Spot Information
System Work..............................................340
684
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
How Does Cross Traffic Alert
Work..............................................................344
How Does Drive Mode Control
Work..............................................................328
How Does Driver Alert Work....................355
How Does Easy Entry and Exit
Work................................................................90
How Does Four-Wheel Drive
Work..............................................................260
Using the 2-Speed Automatic Four-Wheel
Drive System..................................................260
Using the Electronic Shift On the Fly
System.............................................................260
How Does Hill Descent Control
Work..............................................................289
How Does Hill Start Assist Work...........282
How Does Pre-Collision Assist
Work...............................................................347
How Does Reverse Braking Assist
Work...............................................................279
How Does Speed Sign Recognition
Work...............................................................357
How Does Stability Control Work.........286
Electronic Stability Control............................286
How Does the 360 Degree Camera
Work..............................................................305
How Does the Diesel Particulate Filter
Work..............................................................240
Active Regeneration.........................................240
Passive Regeneration......................................240
How Does the Garage Door Opener
Work...............................................................182
How Does the Lane Keeping System
Work...............................................................333
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work..................................................................57
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work...............................................179
How Does the Safety Canopy™
Work.................................................................59
How Does the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System Work........................245
How Does the Trailer Reversing Aid
Work...............................................................410
How Does Traction Control Work.........284
How Does Trailer Sway Control
Work..............................................................409
I
How Do Personal Profiles Work.............592
Recalling and Changing a Profile.................592
How Do the Front Airbags Work...............58
How Do the Knee Airbags Work...............59
How Do the Side Airbags Work................58
Hybrid Display Information.......................154
How Does EV Coach Work..............................154
What Is EV Coach...............................................154
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Driving
Characteristics............................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information.......221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Troubleshooting.............................................222
Low Engine Use Mode.......................................221
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information
Indicators......................................................222
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Troubleshooting........................................222
Hybrid Electric Vehicle Information –
Frequently Asked Questions.....................222
Identifying Fuse Types...............................454
Identifying the Audio Unit........................580
Identifying the Climate Control
Unit.................................................................158
Ignition Switch.............................................209
Starting the Engine............................................210
Switching the Ignition Off..............................209
Switching the Ignition On...............................209
Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Mode.................................................................209
Inflating the Tires........................................505
Information and Entertainment Display
Limitations...................................................581
Speed-restricted Features..............................581
Information and Entertainment Display
Overview.......................................................581
Information and Entertainment Display
Precautions..................................................581
Information On Demand Screen -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen...........582
Information on the Tire Sidewall..........495
Information on P Type Tires..........................496
Inspecting the Tire for Damage.............506
Safety Practices.................................................506
Inspecting the Tire for Wear...................506
685
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Inspecting the Wheel Valve
Stems............................................................507
Installing Child Restraints...........................39
Attaching the Front Seat Tether
Strap....................................................................44
Attaching the Rear Seat Tether Strap..........45
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints....................44
Installing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat......................................................................43
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children...............................................................43
Using Seatbelts.....................................................39
Using Tether Straps.............................................44
Instrument Cluster Display........................151
Hybrid Display Information.............................154
Personalized Settings.......................................153
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen................................................................152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen..............................153
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen............152
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch Screen...............151
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu -
Vehicles With: 8 Inch Screen.................152
Instrument Cluster Indicators..................149
Active Drive Assist..............................................149
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................149
Auto Hold Active.................................................149
Auto Hold Unavailable.....................................149
Automatic High Beam......................................149
Automatic Regen Control Off........................149
Auto-Start-Stop.................................................149
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................150
Cruise Control......................................................150
Electronic Locking Differential......................150
Four-Wheel Drive...............................................150
Front Airbag..........................................................150
Front Fog Lamp..................................................150
High Beam............................................................150
Hill Descent..........................................................150
Lamps On..............................................................150
Ready to Drive......................................................150
Reverse Brake Assist.........................................150
Stability Control and Traction
Control...............................................................150
Tow Haul................................................................150
Turn Signal Lamps.............................................150
Wait to Start.........................................................150
Instrument Cluster.......................................144
Fuel Gauge............................................................146
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 12.3 Inch Screen..............................146
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 4.2 Inch Screen...............................144
Instrument Cluster Overview - Vehicles
With: 8 Inch Screen...................................145
Instrument Cluster Warning
Lamps............................................................148
Anti-Lock Brake System..................................148
Battery....................................................................148
Brake System.......................................................148
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..........................................148
Door Ajar................................................................148
Electric Parking Brake.......................................148
Engine Coolant Temperature.........................148
Fasten Seatbelt...................................................148
Hood Ajar...............................................................148
Low Fuel Level.....................................................148
Low Tire Pressure...............................................148
Low Washer Fluid Level...................................148
Oil Pressure...........................................................149
Powertrain Malfunction, Reduced Power,
Electronic Throttle Control, Check
4X4.....................................................................149
Service Engine Soon..........................................149
Stop Safely...........................................................149
Tailgate Ajar..........................................................149
Water in Fuel........................................................149
Instrument Panel.............................................31
Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller....................................................405
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting............................................407
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
Precautions................................................405
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting........................................407
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Frequently Asked Questions...................408
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Information Messages................................407
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control.......324
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance............325
686
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
How Does Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control Work...................................................324
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Alerts..................................................................325
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators.........................................................325
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations.......................................................324
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions.....................................................324
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Requirements.................................................324
Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Off.......................................................................325
Interior Air Quality........................................166
Interior Bulbs.................................................483
Interior Bulb Specification Chart.................483
Interior Lamp Function...............................135
Switching the Interior Lamp Function On and Off...............................................................135
What Is the Interior Lamp Function.............135
Interior Lighting.............................................135
Ambient Lighting................................................136
Interior Lamp Function.....................................135
Interior Mirror..................................................139
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror.........................139
Interior Mirror Precautions........................139
Introduction.......................................................21
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................438
Jump Starting Precautions............................438
Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................439
Preparing the Vehicle.......................................438
K
Keyless Entry....................................................87
Keyless Entry Settings........................................87
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting...................89
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Keyless Entry Keypad....................................89
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Remote Keyless Entry...................................88
Master Access Code............................................87
Keyless Entry Limitations............................87
Keyless Entry Settings..................................87
Clearing All Personal Access Codes.............88
Creating Personal Access Codes...................88
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function..............................................................87
Switching Keyless Entry On and Off.............87
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting.............89
Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................89
Keys and Remote Controls.........................70
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting...............................................77
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting...........................................77
Keys and Remote Controls – Information
Messages............................................................77
L
Lane Centering..............................................322
How Does Lane Centering Work..................322
Lane Centering Alerts.......................................323
Lane Centering Automatic
Cancellation....................................................324
Lane Centering Indicators...............................324
Lane Centering Limitations............................322
Lane Centering Precautions...........................322
Lane Centering Requirements......................322
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off.......................................................................323
Lane Keeping System Indicators...........336
Lane Keeping System................................333
Aid Mode...............................................................335
Alert and Aid Mode...........................................335
Alert Mode............................................................334
Lane Keeping System –
Troubleshooting.............................................337
Lane Keeping System Limitations.........333
Lane Keeping System Precautions.......333
Lane Keeping System –
Troubleshooting........................................337
Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................338
Lane Keeping System – Information
Messages..........................................................337
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft.................................377
687
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to a Remote Control.....................................593
Live Traffic......................................................594
Switching Live Traffic On and Off...............594
What Is Live Traffic...........................................594
Load Carrying...............................................360
Load Carrying Precautions......................360
Loading Your Trailer....................................376
Locating the 360 Degree
Cameras......................................................305
Auxiliary Camera...............................................306
Bed Camera........................................................306
Front View Camera...........................................305
Rear View Camera............................................305
Side View Camera.............................................305
Locating the Blind Spot Information
System Sensors.........................................341
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir........273
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert
Sensors.........................................................345
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel................232
Regular Cab..........................................................232
Super Cab/Crew Cab........................................232
Locating the Keyless Entry Keypad.........87
Locating the Memory Function
Buttons...........................................................181
Locating the Power Outlet.......................190
Bed...........................................................................198
Instrument Panel................................................197
Rear of the Center Console.............................197
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist
Sensors.........................................................349
Locating the Rear View Camera............302
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels...................................361
Locating the Tire label...............................494
Locating the USB Ports.............................186
Charge Only USB Ports....................................186
Data Transfer USB Ports.................................186
Locating the Wireless Accessory
Charger.........................................................203
Locating Your Vehicle.....................................71
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Keyless Entry Keypad................................89
Locking the Doors................................................89
Unlocking the Doors...........................................89
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Using
Remote Keyless Entry...............................88
Locking the Doors................................................88
Unlocking the Doors...........................................88
Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate.........91
Locking the Rear Window Controls.......138
Low Engine Use Mode.................................221
How Does Low Engine Use Mode
Work....................................................................221
Low Engine Use Mode Limitations..............222
What is Low Engine Use Mode......................221
M
Maintenance.................................................455
Engine Air Filter...................................................467
Engine Oil.............................................................462
Exterior Bulbs......................................................474
Interior Bulbs.......................................................483
Maintenance Precautions........................455
Making and Receiving a Phone
Call.................................................................586
During a Phone Call..........................................586
Making Calls........................................................586
Receiving Calls...................................................586
Manually Dimming the Interior
Mirror..............................................................139
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake..............................................................276
...................................................................................276
Manually Shifting Gears............................254
Shifting Using the Buttons on the Selector
Lever..................................................................254
Manual Park Release..................................257
Manual Park Release Precautions...............257
Using Manual Park Release............................257
What Is Manual Park Release........................257
Manual Seats.................................................168
Adjusting the Head Restraint........................168
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................170
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................169
Folding the Seats................................................176
Head Restraint Components.........................168
Installing the Head Restraint.........................169
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................169
Removing the Head Restraint.......................169
Unfolding the Seats............................................177
688
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Massage Seats...............................................173
Adjusting the Massage Seat Settings.........173
Massage Seat Limitations...............................173
Master Access Code......................................87
What Is the Master Access Code....................87
Memory Function..........................................181
Memory Function Precautions.................181
Mislock...............................................................85
Mislock Limitations.............................................85
Switching Mislock On and Off........................85
What Is Mislock.....................................................85
Mobile Communications
Equipment..................................................642
Mobile Device Data........................................29
Moonroof Bounce-Back.............................143
Overriding Moonroof Bounce-Back.............143
What Is Moonroof Bounce-Back..................143
Moonroof.........................................................142
Moonroof Bounce-Back...................................143
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................530
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L Diesel.................531
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L..............................532
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)............................................534
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................533
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L..............................535
Muting the Audio...........................................571
MyKey Settings................................................78
Configurable MyKey Settings...........................78
Non-Configurable MyKey Settings................78
MyKey – Troubleshooting............................81
MyKey – Frequently Asked Questions.........83
MyKey – Information Messages......................81
MyKey™.............................................................78
MyKey Settings......................................................78
MyKey – Troubleshooting..................................81
N
Navigation Map Updates.........................594
Navigation......................................................594
Adjusting the Map.............................................594
Live Traffic............................................................594
Route Guidance.................................................595
Setting a Destination.......................................594
Waypoints............................................................595
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........605
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................607
Oil Change Reminder......................................605
O
Off-Road Driving..........................................428
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-Road...........429
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques...........428
Water Wading.....................................................429
What Is Off-Road Driving...............................428
Opening and Closing the Flip Key............70
Closing Your Flip Key............................................71
Opening Your Flip Key.........................................70
Opening and Closing the Hood..............455
Opening and Closing the Moonroof......142
Closing the Moonroof........................................142
Opening the Moonroof ....................................142
Opening and Closing the Sliding
Windows.......................................................138
Opening and Closing the Sun
Shade.............................................................142
Closing the Sun Shade.....................................142
Opening the Sun Shade...................................142
Opening and Closing the Windows........137
One-Touch Close................................................137
One-Touch Open.................................................137
Opening the Tailgate.....................................91
Opening the Tailgate From Inside Your
Vehicle.................................................................96
Opening the Tailgate From Outside Your
Vehicle..................................................................91
Opening the Tailgate Using the Remote
Control................................................................96
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle.............................................................84
Individually Unlocking and Locking the
Doors Using the Locking Button...............84
Opening the Doors From Inside Your Vehicle
................................................................................85
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle.............................................................84
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Key Blade...........................................................84
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Remote Control...............................................84
Operating Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow...................................................433
689
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Manual..........................................................619
Overriding Reverse Braking Assist........280
Overriding the Set Speed...........................321
P
Parking Aid Indicators...............................300
Parking Aid Precautions............................297
Parking Aids...................................................297
Front Parking Aid...............................................298
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting....................301
Rear Parking Aid.................................................297
Side Parking Aid.................................................299
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting..............301
Parking Aids – Information Messages........301
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................111
How Does the Passive Anti-Theft System
Work......................................................................111
What Is the Passive Anti-Theft
System.................................................................111
Pedestrian Alert System..............................67
Perchlorate....................................................642
Performing a Master Reset......................598
Personalized Settings.................................153
Changing the Measure Unit............................153
Changing the Temperature Unit...................153
Changing the Tire Pressure Unit...................153
Personal Profiles..........................................592
Personal Safety System
Components..................................................57
Personal Safety System™..........................57
Phone Menu..................................................585
..................................................................................585
Favorites...............................................................585
Phone List............................................................585
Phone...............................................................585
Phone Precautions.....................................585
Pickup Bed Anchor Points.......................366
Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Tie-Down Cleats............................................367
Locating the Pickup Bed Anchor
Points................................................................366
Pickup Bed Anchor Point Load
Capacities........................................................367
Pickup Bed Anchor Point
Precautions.....................................................366
Pickup Bed.....................................................366
Pickup Bed Anchor Points.............................366
Pickup Bed Ramps...........................................368
Tailgate Anchor Points....................................368
Pickup Bed Precautions...........................366
Pickup Bed Ramps.....................................368
Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Ramp Holder..................................................369
Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Ramps..............................................................369
Pickup Bed Ramp Precautions....................368
Storing the Pickup Bed Ramps....................370
Playing Media Using Bluetooth®..........589
Playing Media Using the USB Port........186
Playing or Pausing the Audio
Source...........................................................570
Audio Unit.............................................................570
Touchscreen........................................................570
Post-Crash Alert System.........................440
How Does the Post-Crash Alert System
Work..................................................................440
Post-Crash Alert System
Limitations......................................................440
Switching the Post-Crash Alert System
Off......................................................................440
What Is the Post-Crash Alert
System.............................................................440
Power Outlet Indicators.............................198
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2.4kW/7.2kW................................................191
Generator Mode Power Indicator..................191
Power Outlet Status Indicator........................191
Power Outlet Indicators - Vehicles With:
2kW................................................................190
Generator Mode Power Indicator.................190
Power Outlet Status Indicator......................190
Power Outlet Limitations...........................197
Power Outlet..................................................188
Power Outlet – Troubleshooting..................194
Power Outlet Precautions.........................197
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2.4kW/7.2kW...................................189
Power Outlet Precautions - Vehicles
With: 2kW.....................................................188
Power Outlet – Troubleshooting............194
Power Outlet – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................196
690
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Power Outlet – Information
Messages..........................................................194
Power Running Board Kick Switch..........115
....................................................................................116
Power Running Board Precautions.........115
Power Running Board Settings................115
....................................................................................115
Power Running Boards................................115
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting..............................................116
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting..........................................116
Power Running Boards – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................116
Power Seats....................................................170
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................170
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................173
Adjusting the Seat Backrest.............................171
Adjusting the Seat Cushion..............................171
Adjusting the Seat Height................................172
Head Restraint Components.........................170
Installing the Head Restraint...........................171
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward...............................................................171
Removing the Head Restraint.........................171
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations.............348
Intersection Assist.............................................348
Pedestrian Detection Limitations...............348
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions............347
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................347
Automatic Emergency Braking......................351
Distance Alert.......................................................351
Distance Indication...........................................350
Evasive Steering Assist....................................352
Pre-Collision Assist –
Troubleshooting............................................353
Pre-Collision Assist –
Troubleshooting........................................353
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................354
Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................353
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning
Lamps...............................................................353
Preparing Your Vehicle for
Storage.........................................................492
12 Volt Battery.....................................................492
Body........................................................................492
Brakes....................................................................492
Engine....................................................................492
General..................................................................492
Hybrid Battery Systems .................................492
Tires........................................................................493
Programming a MyKey................................80
Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Garage Door Opener
Motor..............................................................184
Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate Opener Motor...................184
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming..................................................184
Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Hand-Held Transmitter...........183
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Flip Key...............................76
General Information ...........................................76
Steps for Programming Your Spare Remote
Control ................................................................76
Programming the Remote Control -
Vehicles With: Push Button Start..........75
General Information............................................75
Steps for Programming Your Spare Remote
Control ................................................................75
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats...........................................61
Puncture
See: Changing a Flat Tire.................................516
Push Button Ignition Switch.....................210
Starting the Engine............................................210
Switching the Ignition Off...............................210
Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Mode..................................................................210
R
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................562
Rear Exterior.....................................................34
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings......................................................180
Rear Occupant Alert System
Indicators.....................................................180
Rear Occupant Alert System
Limitations....................................................179
Rear Occupant Alert System
Precautions..................................................179
691
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Rear Occupant Alert System....................179
Rear Parking Aid...........................................297
Locating the Rear Parking Aid
Sensors.............................................................298
Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings............298
Rear Parking Aid Limitations.........................297
What is the Rear Parking Aid.........................297
Rear Seats.......................................................176
Heated Seats.........................................................177
Manual Seats........................................................176
Rear View Camera Guide Lines..............302
Rear View Camera Precautions.............302
Rear View Camera......................................302
Rear View Camera Settings..........................303
Rear View Camera Settings....................303
Switching Rear View Camera Delay On and
Off......................................................................303
Zooming the Rear View Camera In and
Out.....................................................................303
Recalling a Preset Position........................181
Linking a Preset Position toy Your Remote
Control or Passive Key..................................181
Recovery Towing.........................................440
Accessing the Front Towing Point..............440
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
4x2.................................................................445
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
4x4.................................................................443
Switching Off......................................................444
Switching On.......................................................443
Refueling.........................................................233
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler
Door....................................................................237
Refueling System Overview...........................233
Refueling Your Vehicle.....................................233
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Charge............................................................277
Remote Control Limitations.......................70
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle...........................................................155
Remotely Starting the Vehicle.......................155
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle.....................155
Remote Start Limitations..........................155
Remote Start Precautions........................155
Remote Start Remote Control
Indicators......................................................156
Remote Control Feedback..............................156
Remote Start..................................................155
Remote Start Settings......................................156
Remote Start Settings................................156
Setting the Remote Start Duration..............157
Switching Climate Control Auto Mode On and Off..............................................................156
Switching Climate Control Last Settings
On and Off.......................................................156
Switching the Heated Seat Settings On and
Off.......................................................................156
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
Settings On and Off......................................157
Removing and Installing the
Tailgate............................................................91
Removing the Key Blade...............................71
Removing Your Vehicle From
Storage.........................................................493
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............490
Replacement Parts
Recommendation....................................642
Collision Repairs................................................642
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..............................................................642
Warranty on Replacement Parts.................642
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................74
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter..................166
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades...........121
Reporting Safety Defects in
Canada.........................................................620
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States...........................................................620
Reprogramming the Garage Door
Opener...........................................................185
Resetting Ground Fault Detection.........192
Resetting the Circuit Breaker - Vehicles
With: 7.2kW..................................................193
Resetting the Stopping Position -
Vehicles With: Power Adjustable
Steering Column.........................................118
Resetting Tire Pressure Monitoring
System............................................................511
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure...........................................................511
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
System...............................................................512
Restarting the Engine.................................224
692
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Resuming the Set Speed...........................314
Resuming the Set Speed from a Complete
Stop...................................................................320
Reverse Braking Assist Indicators.........280
Reverse Braking Assist
Precautions.................................................279
Reverse Braking Assist...............................279
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting...........................................280
Reverse Braking Assist –
Troubleshooting.......................................280
Reverse Braking Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................281
Reverse Braking Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................280
Roadside Assistance..................................436
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................437
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................436
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................436
Rollover Warning..........................................618
Route Guidance...........................................595
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume.............................................................595
Canceling Route Guidance............................595
Repeating an Instruction................................595
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................430
Running Out of Fuel....................................232
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................232
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................232
S
Satellite Radio...............................................574
Locating the Satellite Radio Identification
Number.............................................................574
Satellite Radio Limitations.............................574
Satellite Radio Settings...................................575
Selecting a Channel..........................................575
What Is Satellite Radio....................................574
Saving a Preset Position.............................181
Scheduled Maintenance..........................602
Seatbelt Extensions......................................56
Seatbelt Precautions....................................49
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................53
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder
Work.....................................................................53
Seatbelt Reminder Audible Warnings..........55
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators.........................55
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder On and
Off.........................................................................55
Seatbelts...........................................................49
Automatic Locking Mode...................................51
Seatbelt Reminder...............................................53
Sensitive Locking Mode......................................51
Security...............................................................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System..................................111
Anti-Theft Alarm System Settings................112
Passive Anti-Theft System...............................111
Security – Troubleshooting..............................113
Security – Troubleshooting........................113
Security – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................114
Security – Information Messages..................113
Selecting a Drive Mode..............................328
Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive
Mode..............................................................262
Shifting to or from Four-Wheel Drive Low
(4L)....................................................................263
Selecting the Audio Source.....................570
Audio Unit.............................................................570
Touchscreen........................................................570
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Guidelines....................................................246
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Precautions.................................................245
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
Requirements............................................246
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System..........................................................245
Filling the Selective Catalytic Reduction
System Tank....................................................247
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Troubleshooting............................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Troubleshooting........................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Information Messages................................249
Selective Catalytic Reduction System –
Warning Lamps.............................................249
Sending and Receiving a Text
Message.......................................................587
693
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Sensitive Locking Mode................................51
How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Work......................................................................51
What is Sensitive Locking Mode......................51
Service Data......................................................27
Setting a Destination.................................594
Setting a Destination Using a Point of
Interest.............................................................595
Setting a Destination Using a Predictive
Destination......................................................595
Setting a Destination Using a Recent
Destination......................................................595
Setting a Destination Using a Saved
Destination......................................................595
Setting a Destination Using the Map
Screen...............................................................594
Setting a Destination Using the Text Entry
Screen...............................................................594
Setting a Memory Preset...........................571
Settings Data...................................................28
Comfort and Convenience Data.....................28
Entertainment Data............................................28
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Gap..................................................................319
Following a Vehicle...........................................320
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed.............................................................318
Manually Changing the Set Speed..............319
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed from a
Complete Stop...............................................318
Setting the Blower Motor Speed............159
Setting the Clock and Date.......................571
Switching Automatic Time Updates On and
Off.......................................................................572
Setting the Cruise Control Speed...........313
Changing the Set Speed..................................313
Setting the Hill Descent Speed..............289
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Tolerance.......................................358
Setting the Speed Sign Recognition
Speed Warning..........................................358
Setting the Temperature...........................159
Setting the Wake Word.............................583
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for a Conventional Trailer.............................410
Calibrating the System.....................................412
Configuring the Trailer......................................410
Trailer Sensor Installation................................412
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear...............254
Center Console Shifter....................................254
Column Shifter...................................................254
Side Parking Aid...........................................299
Locating the Side Parking Aid
Sensors............................................................300
Side Parking Aid Audible Warnings............300
Side Parking Aid Limitations.........................299
What is the Side Parking Aid.........................299
Sitting in the Correct Position..................167
Snow Plowing Precautions......................432
Snow Plowing...............................................432
Snowplow Mode................................................434
Snowplow Mode..........................................434
Switching Snowplow Mode On and
Off......................................................................434
What Is Snowplow Mode...............................434
Sounding the Panic Alarm...........................71
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Diesel.............................609
Exceptions.............................................................613
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance - Gasoline..........................614
Exceptions............................................................616
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................313
Speed Sign Recognition Indicators.......357
Speed Sign Recognition
Limitations...................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition
Precautions.................................................357
Speed Sign Recognition............................357
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting............................................358
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting........................................358
Speed Sign Recognition – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................359
Speed Sign Recognition – Information
Messages.........................................................358
Stability Control Indicator........................288
Stability Control...........................................286
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch..........................................209
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Precautions................................................209
Starting and Stopping the Engine........209
Automatic Engine Stop....................................215
694
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Engine Block Heater...........................................213
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting.............................................216
Starting the Engine............................................210
Stopping the Engine..........................................214
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting.........................................216
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Frequently Asked Questions.....................218
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Information Messages..................................217
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Warning Lamps..............................................216
Starting the Engine......................................210
Restarting the Engine After Stopping it............................................................................212
Starting a Diesel Engine....................................211
Starting a Gasoline Engine.............................210
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System...............................................................212
Status Bar.......................................................581
Steering...........................................................295
Electric Power Steering...................................295
Steering – Troubleshooting...........................296
Steering – Troubleshooting.....................296
Steering – Information Messages...............296
Steering – Warning Indicators......................296
Steering Wheel...............................................30
Stopping the Engine...................................224
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................214
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................214
Storage............................................................205
Cup Holders.........................................................205
Glasses Holder...................................................208
Glove Compartment........................................205
Under Seat Storage..........................................206
Storing Your Vehicle...................................492
Stowing the Selector Lever - Vehicles
With: Console Shift..................................256
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................142
Switching Active Drive Assist On and
Off...................................................................292
Switching Active Drive Assist Off................292
Switching Active Drive Assist On.................292
Switching Active Park Assist On and
Off..................................................................309
Cancelling Active Park Assist.......................309
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and Off...........................................................317
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................318
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.........................................................................317
Switching Air Conditioning On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On and Off...........................................................135
Switching Android Auto On and
Off...................................................................591
Disabling Android Auto....................................591
Enabling Android Auto with USB.................591
Enabling Android Auto with Wireless.........591
Re-Enabling Android Auto..............................591
Switching Apple CarPlay On and
Off...................................................................591
Disabling Apple CarPlay..................................591
Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB ..............591
Enabling Apple CarPlay with
Wireless.............................................................591
Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay............................591
Switching Auto Hold On and Off...........283
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and
Off...................................................................224
Switching Blind Spot Information
System On and Off..................................340
Switching Climate Control On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and
Off..................................................................344
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off....................................................................313
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................313
Switching Cruise Control On..........................313
Switching Defrost On and Off.................158
Switching Driver Alert On and Off.........355
Resetting Driver Alert.......................................356
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and
Off....................................................................90
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control to Cruise Control........................................321
695
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Switching Generator Mode On and
Off...................................................................192
Using the Bed Control.......................................192
Using the Information and Entertainment
Display Screen................................................192
Using the Instrument Panel............................192
Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Off..................................................................289
Switching Maximum Cooling On and
Off...................................................................159
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Off..................................................................349
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................349
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off....................................................179
Semiannual Reminder......................................179
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off...................................................................158
Switching Repeat Mode On and
Off....................................................................571
Switching Reverse Braking Assist On and
Off..................................................................280
Switching Shuffle Mode On and
Off....................................................................571
Switching Stability Control On and
Off...................................................................287
Stability Control and Traction Control with
Roll Stability Control...................................288
Switching Text Message Notification On and Off.........................................................588
Android..................................................................588
iOS..........................................................................588
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off..................................................................570
Switching the Display On and Off.........573
Audio Unit.............................................................573
Touchscreen.........................................................573
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x2.................271
Switching the Electronic Locking
Differential On and Off - 4x4...............269
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and Off...........................................................135
Individual Map Lamps......................................135
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Off..................................................................438
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and
Off...................................................................159
Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off..........................................................159
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off....................................................118
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off...................................................................159
Switching the Lane Keeping System
Mode.............................................................334
Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off..........................................................334
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and Off...........................................................135
Switching the Trailer Reversing Aid On and Off...........................................................413
Switching Traction Control On and
Off..................................................................284
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and
Off..................................................................409
Switching Utility Idle On and Off -
Vehicles With: Flip Key..............................191
Switching Utility Idle off using the
Information and Entertainment Display
Screen................................................................192
Switching Utility Idle Off using the
Key.......................................................................192
Switching Utility Idle On....................................191
Symbols Glossary..........................................23
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle.................23
T
Tailgate Anchor Points..............................368
Locating the Tailgate Anchor Points..........368
Tailgate Anchor Point Load
Capacities.......................................................368
Tailgate Step....................................................92
Accessing the Tailgate Step.............................92
Stowing the Tailgate Step................................93
Tailgate...............................................................91
Bed Extender.........................................................93
Closing the Tailgate............................................96
Opening the Tailgate...........................................91
Tailgate Step..........................................................92
Tailgate – Troubleshooting.............................102
696
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Tailgate – Troubleshooting.......................102
Tailgate – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................103
Tailgate – Information Messages.................102
Tailgate – Warning Lamps..............................102
Tailgate Work Surface..................................95
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............524
Temporary Neutral Mode.........................255
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode.............255
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode.................255
Temporary Neutral Mode
Limitations.......................................................255
What Is Temporary Neutral Mode...............255
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program - United States of
America.........................................................618
The Mediation and Arbitration Program
- Canada.......................................................619
Tire Care.........................................................505
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Limitations...................................................510
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Overview.....................................................509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Precautions.................................................510
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........509
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting.............................................514
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting.........................................514
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Information Messages.................................515
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Warning
Lamps................................................................514
Tire Replacement Requirements...........501
AGE..........................................................................501
Tire Rotation..................................................507
Tire Rotation Diagram.....................................508
Towing a Trailer Limitations.....................375
Towing a Trailer Precautions....................375
Towing a Trailer.............................................375
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting............404
Towing Weights and Dimensions................378
Towing a Trailer –
Troubleshooting.......................................404
Towing a Trailer – Information
Messages........................................................404
Towing Weights and Dimensions..........378
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................403
Recommended Towing Weights..................378
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight .............................................................403
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions..........443
Towing Your Vehicle...................................443
Towing Your Vehicle –
Troubleshooting............................................445
Towing Your Vehicle –
Troubleshooting........................................445
Towing Your Vehicle – Information
Messages.........................................................445
Traction Control Indicator........................284
Traction Control...........................................284
Traction Control – Troubleshooting...........285
Traction Control –
Troubleshooting........................................285
Traction Control – Information
Messages.........................................................285
Trailer Brake Precautions..........................375
Trailer Reversing Aid Precautions..........410
Trailer Reversing Aid....................................410
Setting Up the Trailer Reversing Aid for a
Conventional Trailer.....................................410
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Troubleshooting.............................................416
Trailer Reversing Aid -
Troubleshooting.........................................416
Trailer Reversing Aid – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................418
Trailer Reversing Aid – Information
Messages..........................................................416
Trailer Sway Control Precautions.........409
Trailer Sway Control..................................409
Trailer Towing Hints.....................................376
Trailer Towing Navigation.........................596
Entering Trailer Dimensions..........................596
Navigation Alerts...............................................596
Switching Trailer Towing Navigation On and Off.............................................................596
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification...............................................561
Transporting the Vehicle...........................441
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Screen............................................................152
Accessing the Trip Computer.........................152
697
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Resetting the Trip Computer..........................152
Trip Computer - Vehicles With: 8 Inch
Screen/12.3 Inch Screen.........................153
Accessing the Trip Computer.........................153
Resetting the Trip Computer..........................153
Type Approvals.............................................622
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind
Spot Information System..........................622
Radio Frequency Certifications for Body
Control Module..............................................622
Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise
Control Module..............................................623
Radio Frequency Certifications for Garage
Door Opener..................................................640
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.............624
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Anti-Theft System.......................................625
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Entry/Passive Start Remote
Control..............................................................628
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Key......................................................................629
Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio
Transceiver Module.......................................631
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC4...............................................................632
Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC4
Low....................................................................634
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Telematics Control Unit.............................635
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) -
FP3.....................................................................636
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) -
FP4.....................................................................637
Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless
Accessory Charging Module....................640
U
Under Hood Fuse Box...............................446
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box........446
Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood
Fuse Box...........................................................447
Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box...........446
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................456
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L
Diesel.............................................................457
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L..................458
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)............................460
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................459
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L...................461
Under Seat Storage....................................206
Locating the Under Seat Storage
Compartment................................................206
Updating the Vehicle Systems
Wirelessly.....................................................597
Applying a Vehicle System Software
Update..............................................................597
Scheduling an Update.....................................597
System Update Requirements.....................597
Viewing Update Details...................................597
USB Ports........................................................186
Using a Slide-In Camper............................361
Using Auto Hold...........................................283
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................80
Using Progressive Range
Selection......................................................256
Using Snow Chains.....................................503
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Column Shift.............200
Using the Center Console Work Surface
- Vehicles With: Console Shift..............201
Using the Instrument Cluster Display
Controls..........................................................151
Back Button...........................................................151
Button......................................................................151
Menu Button..........................................................151
Scroll Buttons.......................................................151
Status Indicator....................................................151
Using the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller....................................................405
Adjusting the Trailer Brake Gain..................406
Using the Remote Control..........................70
Lock...........................................................................70
Panic Alarm............................................................70
Remote Start.........................................................70
Tailgate.....................................................................70
Unlock.......................................................................70
698
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Using the Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views..............................................................414
Hitch Angle Graphic...........................................414
Using the Trailer Reversing Aid
Controller......................................................413
Using This Publication..................................22
V
Vehicle Care..................................................486
Cleaning the Exterior.......................................486
Cleaning the Interior........................................488
Vehicle Identification Number...............564
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number............................................................564
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview..........................................................564
Vehicle Identification.................................564
Vehicle Identification Number.....................564
Vehicle Interior.................................................32
Vehicle System Updates...........................597
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot...............................569
Ventilated Seats............................................174
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off........................................................................174
Ventilated Seat Precautions...........................174
Ventilation
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Automatic Temperature Control.............158
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................163
Venting the Moonroof.................................142
Viewing the Tire Pressures.........................511
Visual Search...................................................30
Voice Interaction Examples.....................583
Voice Interaction..........................................583
W
Washer Fluid Specification......................559
Washers............................................................122
Adding Washer Fluid..........................................122
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and
Off........................................................................122
Using the Windshield Washer........................122
Washer Fluid Specification..............................122
Washer Precautions...........................................122
Washers
See: Wipers and Washers...............................120
Waxing Your Vehicle..................................490
Waypoints......................................................595
Adding a Waypoint...........................................595
Editing Waypoints.............................................595
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Indicators......................................................149
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps...........................................147
What Is 911 Assist..........................................68
What Is a Connected Vehicle..................565
What Is Active Drive Assist.......................291
What Is Active Park Assist.......................309
What is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle............221
What Is Auto-Start-Stop..........................224
What Is Blind Spot Information
System.........................................................340
What Is Brake Coach...................................154
What Is Cross Traffic Alert.......................344
What Is Cruise Control................................313
Requirements.......................................................313
What Is Drive Mode Control....................328
What Is Driver Alert.....................................355
What Is Ford Protect.................................600
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(Canada Only)...............................................601
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans -
United States Only......................................600
What Is Generator Mode............................192
What Is Hill Descent Control...................289
What Is Hill Start Assist............................282
What Is MyKey.................................................78
What Is Pre-Collision Assist.....................347
What Is Remote Start.................................155
What Is Reverse Braking Assist..............279
What Is Speed Sign Recognition............357
What Is the 360 Degree Camera..........305
What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................166
What Is the Catalytic Converter..............251
What Is the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Gauge.............................................................147
What Is the Diesel Particulate
Filter...............................................................240
What Is the Electric Parking Brake........276
What Is the Electronic Locking
Differential..................................................269
699
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge.............................................................147
What Is the Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge.............................................................147
What Is the Garage Door Opener...........182
HomeLink Wireless Control System............182
What Is the Gross Axle Weight
Rating.............................................................361
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)..............361
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.............................................................361
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.............................................................361
What Is the High Voltage Battery..........252
What Is the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller....................................................405
What Is the Lane Keeping System........333
What Is the Memory Function..................181
What Is the Pedestrian Alert
System.............................................................67
What Is the Personal Safety
System.............................................................57
What Is the Power Outlet.........................188
What is the Rear Occupant Alert
System...........................................................179
What Is the Rear View Camera..............302
What Is the Selective Catalytic
Reduction System....................................245
What Is the Speedometer........................146
What Is the Tachometer............................146
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.........................................................509
What Is the Trailer Reversing Aid...........410
What Is the Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge..................................147
What Is the Trip Summary........................154
What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge..............147
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger.........................................................203
What Is Traction Control..........................284
What Is Utility Idle Mode - Vehicles With:
Flip Key...........................................................191
What is Voice Interaction.........................583
Wheel and Tire Information....................494
Wheel Nuts....................................................523
Window Bounce-Back................................137
Overriding Window Bounce-Back................137
What Is Window Bounce-Back......................137
Windows...........................................................137
Window Bounce-Back......................................137
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting.........................................122
Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................123
Wipers and Washers – Warning
Lamps.................................................................122
Wipers and Washers...................................120
Autowipers............................................................120
Washers..................................................................122
Wipers.....................................................................120
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting.............................................122
Wipers...............................................................120
Switching Windshield Wipers On and
Off.......................................................................120
Wiper Precautions..............................................120
Wireless Accessory Charger
Precautions.................................................203
Wireless Accessory Charger....................203
700
F-150 (TFD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Laadi alla
Avalik link on uuendatud
Teie vestluse avalik link on uuendatud. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumendi avalik link
Reklaam
